JP2020171804A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can be improved from a standpoint of a light emission performance.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, an electric illumination board 6570 has a displacement possible width with respect to an acoustic device 6610, so that, the electric illumination board 6570 can transmit vibration of the acoustic device 6610, and arrangement of the electric illumination board 6570 can be made to approach a vibration occurrence position of the acoustic device 6610. Therefore, regardless of the vibration occurrence position of the acoustic device 6610, a front face area can be clearly visually recognized, so that, the game machine can be improved from a standpoint of a light emission performance. In addition, other than the acoustic device 6610, in relationship with an operation device 10300 which incorporates the vibration device therein, it is possible to improve from a standpoint of a light emission performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 244

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a speaker and an LED (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-16588

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 for achieving this object is a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light. The means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine includes a plurality of the vibrating means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the light emitting substrate includes the plurality of the vibrating means. It is stacked and arranged in.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 includes the holding means for holding the vibration means in the gaming machine according to claim 2, and the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction. The holding means is configured so that a load is generated in a direction that suppresses displacement of the light emitting substrate along the stacking direction.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the light emitting effect can be improved in relation to the vibration means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 2, it is possible to prevent the influence of the vibrating means from being excessively generated on the light emitting means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine on the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the direction view of arrow VIII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in line XIVc. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front view exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device in the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. (A) is a side view of the slide claw member according to the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member. It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in the line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device in the direction view of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68A. Is. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the disk member, the ring member and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXXVa-LXXVa line of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame open with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which the components arranged below the window portion of the front frame are disassembled and shown. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a movable bundling member and a harness, (b) is a schematic upper view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a movable bundling member and a harness. It is a schematic back view schematically shown, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 96 (c). (A) and (b) are top surface schematic views of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member and a harness which schematically show a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 124 (a). It is the top view of the speaker assembly in the direction view of arrow CXXXIVc, and (d) is the partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in view of arrow CXXIVd of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXXV line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa of FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board which schematically show the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing the feeding state of the ball by the ball feeding device in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation device in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotating device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotating device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate, the side base material, and the second effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in tenth embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in 11th Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in 12th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member and the slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 203 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). (D) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member which schematically represents the upward concave part which is recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front view of the front frame. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib. (A) is a top view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right side view of the lower plate unit in the arrow L direction, and (b) is a left side view of the lower plate unit in the arrow R direction. It is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa of FIG. 229 (a), and (b) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit in the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. 229 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above effect device. (A) is a front view of the rear unit, and (b) is a front view of the illuminated substrate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination board, a back support member and an audio device in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241 and (b) is a partition member and an electric device in the CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination board, a back support member and an audio device in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 241 and (b) is a partition member and an electric device in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination board, a back support member and an audio device in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241 and (b) is a partition member and an electric device in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. It is a side schematic view of the above effect device. It is sectional drawing of the rear side unit in the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line of FIG. 241 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the front side unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front side unit. (A) is a front view of the compartment unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit and the guided unit. (A) is a front view of the compartment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit. (A) is a front view of the board guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the board guide unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a section unit and a guided unit on the CCLIVa-CCLIVA line of FIG. 251 (b), and (b) is a section unit and a guided unit on the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. 251 (b). (C) is a cross-sectional view of a section unit and a guided unit in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of the transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member. It is a right side view of a transparent tubular member in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. It is a right side view in the L direction view of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of an optical transmission unit. FIG. 241 is a partial cross-sectional view of a rear unit, an audio device, and an optical transmission unit on the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first lighting unit, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit. .. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device. (A) is a front view of the base member and the illuminated substrate, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a right side view of the base member. It is a top view of the base member, (e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illuminated substrate in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line of FIG. 269 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the lining unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lining unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device in the CCLXVa-CCLXXV line of FIG. 274 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a light receiving member in the CCLXVb-CCLXXVb line of FIG. 274 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination substrate and the light receiving member in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line of FIG. 272 (b), and (b) is the base member in the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line of FIG. 272 (b). It is sectional drawing of the illuminated substrate and a light receiving member, (c) is the sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate and the light receiving member in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line of FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 5 is a schematic view of a base member, an illumination substrate, and a light receiving member schematically showing a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect device in the CCLXXXXVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic view of an illuminated substrate of the effect device in the direction view of the arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. 284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in 19th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in 20th Embodiment in the line corresponding to CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) formed in front of the game board 13 by being partitioned by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a manner in which the fingertip is arranged on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's viewpoint will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow IX of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it is invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341f arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly (FIG. FIG. Since the amount of light in (see 12) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of brightness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state Can greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist as an axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect a pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, and the like on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the region inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used and tilted. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 provided with ring members BR1 arranged at the left and right ends at the rear end (back end of the paper in FIG. 12) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and determining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged opposite to the lower frame member 320 and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member that is configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 that is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the above, and a semicircular receiving portion open upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, which is a tilting device 310. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 defines the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings so that the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311 gL and 311 gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311 gL and 311 gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is sized so that the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted, and the arm member is formed when the drive device 340 is operated. Through holes are formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape having an open portion on the front side and extending upward from the upper surface thereof. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move rearward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right sides.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the drive device 341f passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 has a vertical width as compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower bearing portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 includes a main body cover 351 that is vertically divisible and covers three directions except the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the lower end of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and whose vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, a left side detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351 and a right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged in such a manner that they are arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether or not the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14A. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having side fan-shaped openings at the top and bottom, and a lid on the upper opening of the case body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314 arranged in the above, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the shaft, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 15), and a stretch extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate 311h, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate. Mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j which is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 on a surface when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To be equipped.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push-in end (FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates to (see 23).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position where it is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 14 (a)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 14 (c)), the player can use it. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, and the player pushes the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b attached to the top plate member 312a. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical due to its positional relationship. While staying inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is formed in a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portion and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 forming a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 and the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is coaxially supported by the release member 346 and that operates relative to the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of causing the rotation, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of separating the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is bored at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right to form a U-shape in the top view and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged to face each other, and is a disk. A shaft support hole 341b that pivotally supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that is convex in the left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in a manner having a shaft parallel to the shaft of the shaft support hole 341b. , An extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor housing portion 341a, and a lighting support portion 341e thereof. It mainly includes an LED device 341f which is arranged at the upper end and has an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). As a result, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored at one end in a perfect circular shape, and at the shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b, and the like. Mainly prepared.

The cylindrical member 343a includes fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the fixing portion 343a2 on the right side is formed longer toward the center side than the fixing portion 343a1 on the left side. To. Here, the fixing portion 343a2 is specifically formed with a length capable of moving to a position where the movable clutch 343c does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b is a clutch in which a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which a cylindrical member 343a is inserted and an unevenness along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axial center from a surface arranged opposite to the movable clutch 343c. A unit 343b2 is provided.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and an unevenness along the axial direction at the circumferential position of the axial center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. It also includes a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having a top angle of about 100 °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is usually arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. As for the disc cam 344, the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are roughly mirrored, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR, so only the left disc cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. is there. In addition, in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, the state in which the drive device 340 is set to the first initial state is shown as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. The engaging rib 344c, which is projected inward as a rib having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding outward in the radial direction at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d which is projected in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer circumference is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in this embodiment), a second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and an angle θ3 (angle in this embodiment) from the second overhanging portion 344c3. θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. It should be noted that FIG. 21A shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and is pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) with a shaft support hole 346a. From the convex pin 346b which is formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c into which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d formed as a portion overhanging with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, since the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the convex pin 346b inside) and the end of the second spring SP2 are bored along the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 so as to be guideable. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21 (a)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while the engaging portion is in the large angle state. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 21B.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in which the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 24 Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is shown. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand that repeatedly strikes the tilting device 310 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The return of the spring is not in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, it was possible to deal with this by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and space saving cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310. To.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 310 can be quickly returned without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state is calculated in a predetermined period, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is used. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. As a result, the player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A.

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows that the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25, and the rotary claw member 347 rotates. The state in which the posture has changed is shown, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. 29. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is brought into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is moved forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, so that the releasing member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retractable portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises due to the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retractable portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 27). Return to the state shown in 25). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be seen from the player's point of view increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28). By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 28).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 is changed. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 28, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the rising direction, the shaft portion 311c Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 29) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 28. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs an oscillating operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is attached to the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation buttons simply vibrate, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 to determine whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Can only be grasped.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means. As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29) until the second overhanging portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346. By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state of FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, it rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. it can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a motion of reciprocating up and down (fanning motion) through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). In FIG. 32, the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and in FIG. 33, the state shown in FIG. 32 is shown. A state in which the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates is shown, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the disc cam 344 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The posture in which the 310 can be arranged in the second state (the posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state) can be set. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 is changed. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. 33, are tilted by the rotating claw member 347. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to create two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of the jackpot) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is operating up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 33, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion The 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state after the player pushes in the disc cam 344 without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 will be described. To do. According to this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In FIG. 35, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 34 is shown. In FIG. 36, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35, the forward rotation direction is reached until the disc cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The state of rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown, and in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retractable portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c becomes the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. It comes into contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotating claw member 347 stays and is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 35.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to disengage the engaging rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the disk cam 344 passes through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2 as described above.

Here, the player who pushes in the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of leaving his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. is there.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for causing the tilting device 310 to move up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 (See FIG. 14) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the states shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not rise due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. 37 The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate the plate cam 344 to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing the destruction of the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. In FIG. 38, the player's hand that grips and fixes the tilting device 310 in the second state is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is shown. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idle with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disc cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are used. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the third symbol display device 81 is notified so as to stop the gripping operation. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage to prevent a failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. Control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are realigned.

As a result, when the effect is produced by operating the tilting device 310, there is a gap between the operation of the tilting device 310 due to the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to produce an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 40. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in a manner of separating from the release member 346 as the state shown in FIG. 42 shifts to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c abuts on the releasing member 346 from below, but in this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, both of the first states shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42 appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movements after the first state is reached. Is a different operation of either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive noise due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be executed in the future, which may discourage the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves toward the first state from the state shown in FIG. 38 and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is changed. Since the directions are different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342 for the player. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In addition, in FIG. 44, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) as the posture of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 is in the manner shown in FIG. When the player moves up and down, even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. When the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310, it is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward from the position where the ascending is restricted) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether it was moving up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

FIG. 46 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 rotates with respect to the release member 2346 to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 46 (b) shows the release member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and their rotation as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). With the slide claw member 2348, which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , Is mainly provided. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape in which the slide claw member 2348 is slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. The hook-shaped portion 2348b is projected in a hook shape toward the left side of FIG. 45, and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 47 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted into the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower side surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed in the main body plate portion 2348e. As the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d is pushed to the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. The support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted is provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotating on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on a shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in a state of being arranged at an end position (46 counterclockwise).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the convex pin 2348d inserted through the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also decreases.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide and move due to the rotational operation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled when the angle is large. It doesn't move. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 47 shows a state in which the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 47. Is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the release member 2346 is rotated clockwise) and returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 disengages the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b due to the posture change of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will not be done.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a pre-reading means by associating the operation mode with the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, the operation device 2300 for the player The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 is raised by the magnetic force attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 by securing a large magnetic force. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from being raised by the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, lift the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in an embodiment.

As a result, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the ascending direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be determined. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311 gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilt device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311 gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and located at a position opposite to the right side detection piece 311 gR with respect to the surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR, and its extension length is shorter than that of the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. None (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side is inserted. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the pushing end to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is between the first state and the state arranged at the push-in end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324 L. The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. It is possible to effectively give a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is operating ascending rather than colliding.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52B, the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 is raised only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 showing the pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54 (a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54 (b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. The state in which the sensor 4321e is passed downward is shown. Further, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. It passes through 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the end of pushing, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle pushing operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e drive the voice coil motor 352 by the interval of the timing of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end is used as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. It is controlled in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is extruded in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310.

As a result, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so that the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310 after pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of producing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes and operates the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is attached to the lower frame member 5320. The drive motor 5411 for rotating the weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is eccentric is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibrating device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibrating device 5400 includes a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is composed of a flexible material. The flexible member 5420 and the flexible member 5420 are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately accommodated and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. Mainly includes 5430.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and pivotally supporting a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan on the rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 includes a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft projects.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side of the insertion side, and the main body 5421 in the assembled state. In addition to connecting between a pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 that are convexly provided on the left and right and downward sides in the radial direction, and rib-shaped leg portions 5422 that are projected left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a convex leg portion 5424 projecting in a pair of columns upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth formed at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger because the posture maintenance portions 5423 are arranged on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower ribbed leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is projected in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load at one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 is provided adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and the second accommodating portion 5412 in which the weight member 5412 is accommodated. It mainly includes a 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is adjusted from the upper surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 touches the bottom and the load applied during the insertion is released (assembly load release state). The depth is such that the convex leg portion 5424 projects.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to provide a flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension that is slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension that extends slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 under the assembled load state. To.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first region S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310, and the first region are pushed into the player by three degrees. The end area S52, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of the push-in, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be secured to the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (tilting to the left or right on the paper surface in FIG. 59 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the convex leg portion 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows an assembly load release state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the convex leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, when a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load release state and the assembly load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic restoring force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is pushed back. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is ascended only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the accommodating member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60B, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 under the assembly load state. Consists of acceptable aspects.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly cured. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and at uniform intervals to the left and right from the central axis. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the radial outer ends of the rib-shaped leg 5422 move outward on the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-leg 5422) as the flexible members 5420 move downward. It deforms in a manner of moving to the one with the smaller resistance) (see FIG. 60 (b)). In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially applied by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis. In b), a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal region S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61B) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move close to each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). The force to push back in the direction) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. The force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted by configuring the combination of the generated forces.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the start of contact with the convex leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is applied to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be lightened and the impact during the pushing operation can be mitigated satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is different due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 in order to alleviate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where its rotation axis is raised by a radius Ra upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located above the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be widened. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. The vibration can be transmitted to the player through. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembled load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the motor.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and immediately releases the hand (pulse pushing), the tilting device 310 is detected to be pushed and then vibration is generated. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration starts not in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and the preparation for vibration generation is completed, the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, the state in which the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in a central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L are formed in a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R has a support cylinder portion P1 extending in a tubular shape from the disc portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged at the center position thereof, and the support cylinder portion P1 in the axial direction. Along the shaft of a long hole recess C1 recessed from a disk portion in an axisymmetric long hole shape up to a position of about half of the extension distance, and a support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion in the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged so as to sandwich the elongated hole recess C1, and elastically deforms when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated hole recess C1 is formed so that the shape of the recessed cross section is slightly longer than the width dimension of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1.

Further, the facing surface of the elongated hole recess C1 is formed to engage with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

The holding arm portion A1 includes an engaging convex portion A1a that projects from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm toward the opposite side of the arm. .. The engaging convex portion A1a engages with the tip end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction when the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured for a long time.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis near the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side of FIG. 63B) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65B). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set to be longer than that in the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. Can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the fitting groove 5343a3 sandwiched from the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in the front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 that is a groove for fitting an e-ring and positioning the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and a fitting groove thereof. When the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, the engaging groove 5343a4, which is the groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages, is mainly used. Be prepared. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates into which the shaft support holes 341b are bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 afterwards to form a part where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, so that the e-ring is formed in the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent misalignment of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is located on the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4 to the position where the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them can be expanded. After that, when the tip end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically restored, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. Since they come into contact with each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted when a load for regulating the above is applied).

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in a direction in which the resistance is small, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On a surface parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65 (a).

FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67A. It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67A, in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to collapse. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is enlarged and shown. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 67A, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player is restricted from the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67A, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is shown by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67A, when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 67A due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. Since this misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disk cam 5344R, the drive motor can be driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (direction of arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the second spring is in a direction repulsive to it. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disk cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or the disc cam 5344 is operated regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344. Of any of the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased by the disc cam 5344. It can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of.

In the present embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed from a shape that is axisymmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole recess C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 68A, in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied and the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

FIG. 68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and tilted down by an angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting of the arm member 345, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disc cam 5344R also applies to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor. Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, since it is necessary to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle before the occurrence of the overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engaging rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65B), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 66 (b)). As a result, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is configured as a mirror image of the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the first embodiment, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL arranged in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and the disk member 6344L1. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially pivotally supported and rotates relative to a disk member 6344L1 is provided.

In the disk member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disk portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape in the axial direction. The annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convex along the ring rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and a ring shape having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. A lid plate portion 6344h that is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion thereof and is arranged on the outer side in the radial direction.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the central shaft portion 344a is formed by fitting the annular main body 6344g to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the annular body 6344g on the axial disc member 6344L1 side comes into contact with the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface is in contact with the disk member 6344L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations, the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation. , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a and its auxiliary pillar. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a deceleration transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. Mainly includes 6348c.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is composed of a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backflip direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (correctly). (1) A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) by 1/3 in a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 of the first embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c The relative relationship between the two can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disk cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 by the rotary claw member 347 and from the state shown in FIG. 72 by the rotary claw member 347. It can rise to (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and change the position to reach.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and configures the game machine in a manner in which the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height reached, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expected degree is maximized, the expected degree is reached. The magnitude of the above can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement that the player pushes in and operates the tilting device 310, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 is raised, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner can be suppressed.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members can form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. 74. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the LXXVa-LXXVa line, and FIG. 75 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R includes a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. The ring member 7344R2 inserted from the opening side of the ring member 7344R2 in the axial direction and the engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. Mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having the above.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR at a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape and an engaging rib. It is a member having a shape in which 344c is partially omitted (between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. 1 In the radial direction between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled and a fixing that is projected radially outward from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. It mainly includes a protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular elongated hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position deviated from the intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The second elongated hole 7432, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the elongated hole 7431 and the disc member 7344R1 from the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431. A return portion 7433 formed by projecting toward the second elongated hole 7432 side with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

The width direction (short direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outward of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is convexly provided, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. A thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the central portion is mainly provided.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. Thereby, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. As a result, in the assembled state, the engaging member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A), and the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). An arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77B) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and an extension thereof. It is arranged on the side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630 and the engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77B) from the extending tip of the portion 7620. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 is provided with a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof becomes. It is composed of an extension length that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The width direction of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a). c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 78 (e) is a side view. It is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 78 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. 78 (e) ) And FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f).

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an assembly error.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 until the position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d). Moving.

At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the engagement member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 are released from the vertical contact, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (Refer to FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. To do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned steps, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and others. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 80A, the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is obliquely scraped in order to minimize the interference with the engaging rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

79 (a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 starts to rotate. FIG. 79 (b) shows FIG. 79 (a). The state in which the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in) is shown, and FIG. 80 (a) shows the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end. In (b), the state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 81, the right disk cam is shown in the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a) and FIG. 80 (b), the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347 ( (Small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of projecting outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the side surface of the outermost diameter of the engaging member 7344R3, the angle between the releasing member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is small. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. The disk cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. It is arranged (see FIG. 80 (a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member A load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 by pushing the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344 from the 7346.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, and therefore, based on the rotation of the disk cam 7344. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged one equally divided recess 7522 to another different equally divided recess 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase with and is rotated relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. The engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is housed is displaced by one.

That is, by passing through the process shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the other unnecessary parts are not shown.

In FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other is shown, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is above the release member 7346. A state in which the descent is started by being abutted from the above is shown, and in FIG. 83A, a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82B is shown. In (b), the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (clock 82 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Will only be.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction is not generated, and the engaging member 7344R3 is radially outward from the time when the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 until it is separated. Keep overhanging. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state that is not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that is not visible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is moved up from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disk cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is shown. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 84 through the process described in FIG. 79. , A state in which the disc member 7344R1 is rotated relative to the equally divided recessed portion 7522 by one portion is shown. In both FIGS. 84 and 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 hits the engaging portion 346d. The state of contact is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. 2 Move to a state where it sinks below the state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 immediately reaches (without rotating the disk cam 7344) by the ascending operation can be changed from the first state. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 open with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of. In FIG. 90, for convenience, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The members may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side in front view. It can be rotated forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is rotated when viewed from the front. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 so that they cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided so as to be exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the inner frame 12 with the metal plate having holes), the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column is larger). Is pivotally supported by being fitted onto the support pin 19a (which has a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed by a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is formed by fastening and fixing various members (illumination portions 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 is a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than that of the window portion 14c and having transparency, and these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin in an annular shape slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the double glazing. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. The illumination units 8029 to 8033 are lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls is insufficient, and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members formed of punching metal) are provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged vertically.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

It is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area for the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17, or may be provided in a plurality of places, and is a push button type switch as an operation method. However, information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 92) and.

At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving port portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 joins the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed as follows.

On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the upper left and right corners and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic substrate to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is arranged is arranged, and the electronic substrate and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h that communicates with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal boards of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 600 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126), the positional relationship is such that the device faces the upper side in the front-rear direction, and can be brought into contact with each other depending on the situation.

The back side of the front frame 14 is a container-shaped member formed of a resin material with the front side open, and is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross-sectional area decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a forming the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. It is composed of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 like the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173a on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. , A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the position change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is an upward extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), and a part of the main body frame 14a, which is the front frame. On the rotation base end side of 14, an inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion formed of a resin material and opens downward, is arranged between the vertically long plate portions.

The reverse cup portion 178 is a portion for taking measures against fraudulent acts performed by, for example, illegally expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heat and the long cover member can pass through the reverse cup portion 178. It also melts 173. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact (close) with each other on the surface. Further, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the gaming area.

Further, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits the cheating through the piano wire from becoming large. Therefore, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the intrusion of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the cheating before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is assumed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window 14c), the operation of inserting the piano wire deeper is naturally performed by a person who cheats (piano wire). Can be done (without suspicion that the insertion is not working). Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and attempts to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is provided with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one on the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a substrate 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is installed. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side are opened toward the back side so that one end thereof can communicate with the through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. To.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the plate passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened with the game balls stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls spill out is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different, so the board is separated. This is due to the intention of preventing malfunctions in advance.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the constituent members arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and shown, and FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below 14c.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, it is the front side of the upper plate 17, and diagonally upward to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width that is about the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 has a main body bending portion 371 formed into a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side while being fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right end portions, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left and right central portion and the left and right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to be viewed from the front. A plate-shaped member that closes the opening surrounded by the hanging portion 372 formed in a shape, the main body bending portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the main body bending portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. A translucent portion 373 that is fastened and fixed to at least one of the two, a left flat support portion 374 that is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface that is formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. Mainly a right-side plane support portion 375 and a support groove 376 which is a groove recessed from the back surface side in the right-side plane support portion 375 and whose recess width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side. Prepare for.

The front side edge of the main body curved portion 371 has a rounded curved shape, and the back side edge portion has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate is in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 17 in the front-rear direction and the rear left edge portion 371a that are connected to the rear left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 and are above in the assembled state. The back middle edge portion 371b that comes into contact with the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction and the back middle edge portion 371b are continuously provided on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball lending operation portion 40. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball lending operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body and supports the operation handle 51, and is between the hanging portion 372 and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The recessed portion 372 is formed by screwing a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operating device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs that irradiate light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) and 2 LEDs that irradiate light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Each placed.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. To do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then transmits light. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed according to the change from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 comes into contact with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illumination unit 8031 can be suppressed.

The right flat surface support portion 375 comes into contact with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illumination unit 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 8031, 8032 is used. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illumination portion 8031, the illumination portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illuminated portion 8032 is in a state of entering the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front end of the right flat support portion 375. The position with and matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing portion for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The main body frame 14a is sandwiched and fixed to the main body frame 14a), and the passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is sandwiched and fixed to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like), and the metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

The sheet metal member 150 has a front frame even if a passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a wire or a piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted). It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the 145, but also when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. Can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to make a through hole. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear is reduced (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the vertical position of the position where it is to be.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left and right long plate members. There are through holes 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member, and screws are formed above and below the through holes 156, and screws for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 are inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored vertically in a portion (left end) overlapped on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end rather than the through hole 156. Mainly includes an opening / closing restricting portion 159 projecting to the back side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is projected to the back side in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. A protruding portion 148a and a screwing portion 148b formed as a screwable hole for a screw to be inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Mainly prepare.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operating portion back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is bored and the lower edge at a right angle. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that can come into contact with the wall portion 158a vertically and horizontally.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening / closing restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and details will be described later. Under a predetermined condition, it has an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by coming into contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. The strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability by forming the plate thickness).

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting unit 159 is not a part of the operation unit back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a from another member to the back side. It may be composed of a metal part extending to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is formed of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is arranged further on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are erroneously locked when the opening / closing restricting unit 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

As a path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 which is configured in a substantially case shape. Since this is difficult, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels unwell about the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to be sprinkled with drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) fail. There is a risk of

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since the components are separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion. It is not a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps), pass through the inside of the operation device 300, and go below the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), a liquid such as drinking water is sent to the drive motor 342. It can be hung directly and can be prevented from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that a liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other parts are covered by the bottom plate portion 321, the drinking water or the like may be exposed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows down to the front side and downward due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from overwhelming the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

FIG. 93A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93B, the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and are extended to the left from the upper end of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are up to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to the respective lighting units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) are once arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed to the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 that is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the side surface on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side to be arranged facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184 that are arranged on the side surface) and can lock the binding arm portion 183 and a pair of binding arm portions 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing portion 185 that extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and has an opening.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (with high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole through which a screw is passed in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and having the extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96A), and a portion arranged above the support plate portion 181d. A cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened is mainly provided.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of detent convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and it is possible to determine the posture of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing with respect to the plate member 14d.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from sliding downward by narrowing the distance between the extending end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area of the region accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) is secured while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is fitted in the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to fit the movable arm portion 182. Axial support (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the plane OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape, which are connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a, are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting to the shaft is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls gradually becomes shorter as the distance from each other approaches the plane OS1, and when the plane OS1 is reached, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that is not intended for elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) intended for elastic deformation depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portion 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and a wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately arranged at equal intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 184a, and has an opening width wider than that of the large opening 184a. It mainly comprises a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is desired to be locked with respect to the locking portion 184, the size (tightening condition) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the small opening 184b side. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of 14.

In addition, in FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), the state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range) is shown, and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show. In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing in the vertical direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 at the time of opening and closing.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it is extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. The shape of ~ HN3 can be adapted to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96B and 96D, the shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97A and 97B, a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematic. As an imaginary line, a member fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically illustrated by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also centered on the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since the frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 (FIG. 96). b), also see FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed through the vicinity of a vertically long metal portion (a portion in FIG. 96 (d) with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by arranging the harnesses HN1 to HN3 so as to forcibly bypass them, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from approaching the rotation tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are fitted when the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to improve the fit (which is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, in the case where the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire advances toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraud from gaining the profit of fraud.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to facilitate illegal winning), the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. It is possible to prevent the ball from being fired against a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, so that it is possible to prevent the illegal benefit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that a person who commits fraudulent acts will not be able to collect the bills and the remaining amount of balls inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to exert a deterrent against cheating.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity is performed without leaving the seat, so that the game machine store side can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the game machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed. As a result, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end of the ball guide opening 53 is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) on the right side of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50, respectively. The S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 are provided so that the extension direction faces (switches) at least once on both the left and right sides.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), so that the vertical dimensions of the game area and the effect area can be increased. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (when the 50-minute lower plate runs out of balls, remove the balls from the Senryo box). A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress) can be configured by being required to replenish.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension directions are bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and they are common. It has features. That is, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and the second bending on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 are arranged with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. , Equipped with. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, among the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. The proximity walls Nc and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc are mainly provided, and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The approach wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small-diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the distance between the gap Nin and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach route for the wire HM that is illegally inserted, a route that proceeds to the upstream side of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side with the ball guide opening 53 as the entrance can be considered. A person who commits a fraudulent act will proceed while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 upside down, the wire HM can be made to enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent further progress of the wire HM, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. it can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further advances, if the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM projects in a downward position, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the gaming area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device such as the above to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit by obtaining an illegal payout ball.

It will be described back to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the spheres flowing down the ball removing passage 147 are arranged in the merging area CE, the spheres flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the merging flow path CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 in the vertical direction. The left-right width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 projects downward toward the front side.

In the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage portion 145a is positioned with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the aisle portion 145a is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set larger in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when the spheres stay in the foul ball passage portion 145, the number of spheres that can be retained can be increased because a plurality of spheres can be arranged in different positions in the front-rear direction upstream of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the merging region CE at the same time, so that the spheres can reach the merging region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and engaging.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. From the inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c which is extended in a plate shape toward the back surface side and is curved so as to extend upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the foul ball receiving portion 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

As a result, the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

Since the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a), the outer shape of the foul ball passage portion 145 is larger than that. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIGS. 100 and 101, a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is shown.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long on the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illumination portion 8031 and the illumination portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 do not need to be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, respectively. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400 after fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. It is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other to the left and right by the configuration in which the portions are sandwiched and fitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frames. The state decomposed from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is formed in a recessed portion 462,482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole formed in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, which is FIG. 108 and FIG. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction are fastened and fixed, and the main body frame is formed. It mainly includes vertically long plate-shaped support plate portions 510 that are fastened and fixed to 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted into the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. (See FIG. 86), a fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the substrate member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of facing the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115B), the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are oriented in the left-right direction. Can be suppressed from collapsing. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extension portion 511a is displaced to the right side by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extension portion 511a is displaced. The outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the back side end portion as a surface substantially located on the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end of the support plate 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate 510. It comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide member 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 107 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It enters the 540 and exits from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the inflow and outflow of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting the screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screws to the back fastening portion 527.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screws to the back fastening portion 556.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate portion 510 from the front side in the fastening preparation state, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, after the protrusion 566 is inserted through the pin support hole 515, the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down by the amount of the misalignment with respect to the support plate 510 to eliminate the misalignment and easily fasten. Can be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), and has an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that is opaque to light and a resin material thereof. It includes an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R comes into contact with the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L and the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, and the front side end portions are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction and light. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a non-transmissive resin material. It mainly includes an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In addition, FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. , Inserted into the lower fastening portion 523, which is arranged at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, the plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and the inner lens member 530 is formed longer than the short fastening portion 525. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 which are inserted into the main body plate portion 521 and are projected from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wavy shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. To be equipped.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that contacts (matches the shape) the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged in a posture of inclining to the left toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect of light can be made different for each opening 524.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface with a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. It includes a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four locations above and below, and function as a window for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right in the design shape between the above-mentioned boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a wave shape in which the front end portion 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in the shape of a vertically long plate substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. Will be done.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is bored in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. It also has support holes 531b and 531c through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screws are fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied in the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned with each other.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and has a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending to the right from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (front end portion in top view). (Triangular shape with the tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is turned to the left and right via the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. To. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing the light from the so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to be emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are dispersed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against a resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Examples thereof include resins, polystyrene-based resins, and AS resins (acrylic nitriles, styrene copolymer compounds). Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain a light guide member 540 having a high average brightness and a small decrease in the brightness distribution.

In the present embodiment, the light guide member 540 is set to have a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front end portion is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 and is formed to the left and right. Is also formed from a wavy wavy shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. The degree of wavy shape is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design in which distortion after thermal bending is small, practical mechanical characteristics are maintained well, and three-dimensional degrees of freedom can be imparted. ..

The details of the wavy shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but it is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. It has a wavy shape that is located to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot-bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C. It is made by pressing the base material against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not deformed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 is inserted with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560. Mainly includes a fastening portion 542 to be formed.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The back side end portion of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the back side end portion of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An outer cover that projects to the right in a region surrounded by an inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and the plurality of insertion holes 553. An overhanging portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a protrusion from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced from the front side end portion of the light guide member 540 to the front side. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is projected toward the front side at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protrusions fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The installation portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 on the side opposite to the light guide member 540, a bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) that bulges in a semicircular shape in a side view toward the front side is vertically arranged. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be in a strip-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged on the outer lens member 550, but not on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws. it can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved according to the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The 540 and the main body plate portion 551 come into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 114 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction of being arranged so as to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 from being displaced from each other, and the light is accurately incident from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be made to.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 are receiving surfaces capable of accepting the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastened portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a formed with a slightly larger vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. At the front end of the inner cover member 520, it is a receiving surface that can accept the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a vertical width thereof. It is formed in a long hole shape with a long width and a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the main body plate portion 561 to the back surface side.

The upper fastening portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 comes into vertical contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stablely supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted inside (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

A method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 112 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a).

It should be noted that FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the convex portion. The state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112 (b)). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front side end portion of the right panel unit (front side of the light guide member 540 from the front side surface). Since the number of screws for fastening and fixing the light can be reduced, and thus the area where the light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It can be easily made visible in a strip shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. By applying a load to the optical member 540, the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L are inserted. The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R constitutes a surface that is parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that allows contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are respectively fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and at least two procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure. ..

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing to the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, assembling and disassembling can be performed in two procedures, so that the operator performing maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 in either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the work time can be shortened.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid together in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid with each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is disassembled. It is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that travel inside the 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are fastened to the front surface. By making it difficult to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel inside the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. Note that in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the plane of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 toward the opening 524 can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at a position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for directing by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as the boundary. It can be provided, and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top, corresponding to the increase in the vertical width as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is smaller. , It is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be produced can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of light that can be visually recognized as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equivalent to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower opening 524 can be strengthened, the light production can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be seen by the player. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 that faces the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, and the width of the opening 524 that faces the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, among the 524 openings, the lower opening 524 is formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, in a place where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is collected. In a place where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emitting mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114B are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the area KE is defined as a band-shaped area extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE is adjacent to the lower end of the opening 524 below it. Matches the top edge of. Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 512a in the front-rear direction to the region KE travels in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114 (c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light condensing action is reduced, the light is visually recognized by the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by forming the light guide member 540 into a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface in the region KE, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. Durability can be improved.

Further, by forming the convex shape to the left side in the region KE, the concave shape can be formed on the right side, and the portion where the light is diffused and the portion where the light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding part (the part corresponding to the area KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, an effect of light that cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the jackpot expectation of the effect to be high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of eye fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the player can play for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the player who is cheating is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the player who is cheating can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and has the same gradient in the horizontal direction over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes long, the taper is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the portion near the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is larger than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives the light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531b is increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. As a result, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the foremost surface (small difference in strength). )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LED 512a that generates the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, the player can visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not right beside but on the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (See the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b). The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) are arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. A unit fitted to (see) and supported from below, which is located at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 100) and the front surface of the upper frame member 410. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , Is mainly provided. Note that in FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The contained LED emits light to produce a light effect.

The lighting unit 401 is a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back surface side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back surface side in a tubular shape and is inside the tubular shape. A tubular portion 405 whose shape is formed so as to penetrate the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Is mainly provided.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. This is the part that improves sex.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical displacement of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 vertically is formed in a recess on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed with the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and is formed of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 that is fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where it projects from the opening 414 to the front side. It is mainly provided with a lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back surface side to prevent the lens member from falling off to the back surface side and constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that is arranged to face the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 formed through a slightly large inner shape and an opening 414 formed through the upper right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in a wavy shape substantially the same as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted with the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring extending through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. As a result, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible when viewed from the front. The LED 14e2 is arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side on the lower right corner surface, and a concave portion from the back side on the lower left corner surface. The supported groove 418 to be supported, the fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that the screw can be screwed in, and the second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in the upper and lower positions. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state thereof (see FIG. 86). ), The load (weight, etc.) given by the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight, etc.) given by the lamp can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. The expansion rib 419a is provided.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a part sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with ribs having the same shape at three positions at 120 ° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is a fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and a recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at a lower position of the main body member 411. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape on the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and a wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward from the extending end portion and forming an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421. It is mainly provided with an opening 424 composed of a plurality of small-diameter through holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left and right center positions (upper end positions of the curved shape) and penetrate in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside) in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings in the speaker assembly 450 for passing vibrations generated toward the front side.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is visible to the player through the opening 414.

FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. At the lower end, it is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an audio device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 to form a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. After forming a space between the front assembly 460, which is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front assembly 460, which is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in front view, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). Mainly includes a side assembly 480.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits a directing sound in connection with the game. One end of the speaker 451 is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the terminal of the speaker connecting wire 453. By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the speaker lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. It is possible to reproduce and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body portion 461 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and has an open back side, and a plurality of recesses formed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width. 462 and the extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside in the vertical width. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end portion of the main body portion 461 to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and the main body portion 461. A through hole 466 that is circularly penetrated through the speaker 451 on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and rear. A connection hole 469 through which a plurality of fastening portions 468 for fastening and fixing the screws inserted in the side assembly 480 and screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. And a front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 has a base end side main body portion 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed as a region divided in the left-right direction, and the base end side main body portion 461B on the left-right central side (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body 461T connected to the center side of the intermediate main body 461M in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 121). The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between them and the rear side assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion (an edge portion on which a flange or the like is not formed on the inside) without a barb on the inside.

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screws inserted through the through holes 463a are inserted into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a, and the through holes 483a and the through holes 483a of the rear assembly 480. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened as the screw is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between them (the resin material is sandwiched and fastened and fixed to the hard material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in the front and rear, and is bent a plurality of times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). It is a rib that forms. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is provided with a main body 481 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and the front side is open, and a semicircular tip from the upper and lower edges of the main body 481 toward the center of the vertical width. A plate-like extension plate extending from the back side edge of the plurality of recessed portions 482 and the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 from the vertical width outward. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side, and a through hole through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction are formed. A plurality of through holes 488 and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction are mainly provided.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape to the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. The front side wall portion 481H is formed from a shape that is internally fitted to the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position that sandwiches the wiring pressing convex portion 484 on the left and right at intervals that allow the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and penetrates the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width of being fitted in the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connecting wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, by passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connecting line 453. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the speaker connection line 453.

The light passing through hole 485 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same positions as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 123) that bends by rotation. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and it may bend to the left or right, the compressive force does not work well and there is a possibility that the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, the back surface is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). It can be reinforced with the strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424 It is placed at a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), for ease of understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 arranged to face each other face each other. Is shown in the unfolded state toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the center of the left and right sides of the paper, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the acoustic chamber is inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the base end side main body 461B of the front assembly 460. It is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately vertically arranged toward the left side. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are provided at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed during assembly. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e. Can be done.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear side assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly, but in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws avoids the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is left (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side) and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U directions).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) closest to the left and right direction. , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent in the vertical direction. It is possible to secure a longer traveling path length of the oscillating wave Ws as compared with the left-right width of the space.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the oscillating wave Ws passes through the openings formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and the generation of the standing wave by the oscillating wave Ws is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be caused by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 472 and located on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the (arrow L, U direction).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b also have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are formed at a plurality of locations (this) alternately up and down toward the left side. In the embodiment, the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are arranged at five locations).

Since the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity of the main body portion 481 is strengthened by the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e. Can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See), they are arranged facing each other in the front-back direction.

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be caused by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b located above the recessed portion 482 and located on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrows L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482, 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output is output from the back side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) travels to the tip side main body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially opens an opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, and an opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420. As you can see, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back portion of the speaker 451 is an opening and an opening 424 formed by the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portions 471 and 491. Since it is in direct contact with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 via (see FIG. 120), the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 should be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being disturbed. Can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471,491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect, and can raise the player's interest in and excitement for the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws as a path for avoiding the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is stipulated. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (sound). ) Sound can be tuned.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purposes. It is arranged in a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced, and the fastening portion 468 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

Further, the extension plates 461 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the expansion rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and the rib portions 467c and 487c, respectively. The 467d and 487d are arranged on the extension plate 433 and 483 side of the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the fastening portion 419 is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 436 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other to bring the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 and the rear. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing with 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from the plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is a front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passing recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451 so that the wire or piano wire It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the locations where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such fraudulent activity is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent activity can be lowered, and it is easy to prevent the profit of the fraudulent activity.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). is there. In addition, in FIG. 124 (a) and FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is shown. Is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. The outer surface 481Ho (upper surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and is fitted to the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that. As a result, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so that the rib portions in contact with each other have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed) in the intermediate main body 461M as compared with the tip side main body 461T. As a result, the acoustic effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the front end side main body 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body 461M. It is largely secured in a mode that bulges in the front-rear direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip-side main body 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip-side main body 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear the deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 124 (a).

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fixed to the fastening portion 419 by the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a, so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the rear assembly 480 are fixed. This is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), whereby the front assembly 460 and the rear are assembled. It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back surface side is arranged inside). Then, at the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the playback output is output from the speakers 451 arranged in the other speaker assembly 450R and 450L. It is possible to avoid conflict with the sound to be played, and to reproduce the reproduced sound with high quality as a transparent sound without disturbing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 125 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e on the entire surface, but is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and in contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin), but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that is done.

For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be arranged, or a glass member may be arranged. A member made of concrete may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, the sound can be thickened.

Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like are applicable. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of spikes, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450.

For example, when arranging it on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, is arranged between the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the tightening of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the members (loads applied to each other) and adjust the sound effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) and the connecting hole 469 thereof. The upper side is provided by a through hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in shape and a screw inserted into the through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right positions where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be screwed is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to fasten and fix the screw. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to the relationship between the main body frame 14a which is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. In FIG. 127 (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated from each other in the front-rear direction for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13 and a cup shape in which the central portion is open. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a form a tapered shape that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa of FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) are board surface support devices 600. It is a side view of the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 which schematically showed the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, some configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 is first temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is adjusted. The portion is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128A, the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated about an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). Rotate it so that it approaches the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is mounted in an assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the leading edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (a portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to evacuate from the route, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotating claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by changing to a fixed state. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum. Therefore, according to the principle of leverage, the rear claw member 640 is rotated via the game board 13. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened due to the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). When the right end of 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed in to close the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. Is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end portion on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower surfaces are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, one board support device 600 will be described and the other board support 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 130 (a) and FIG. 130 (b), the fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board surface support device 600 is used. The release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is shown. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 can rotate to a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A regulated front claw member rotatably supported by a rotating front claw member 620 that is pivotally supported and a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the rotating front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620. It mainly includes a 630 and a rear rotation claw member 640 that is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is arranged on the back surface side of the front rotation claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620.

The frame member 610 consists of a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. On the back side of the support hole 612, the arc recess 614 is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along the arc centered on the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615 and a pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615, which extend from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and are fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). Mainly includes a fixing plate 616 of the above.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed. , Fixed in the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged to face each other on the left and right sides and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and the plate portions 621a that penetrate the plate portions 621a in a straight line. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports that are formed through a straight line on the back side of the plate portion 621a and the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. Mainly provided with a hole 624.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the regulated front claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation claw member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides, and is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction and an extension portion 621a2 that extends in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. The back-side extension plate 621c is extended by tilting downward by about 45 degrees with respect to the plate portion 621a, and extends vertically from the back-side end of the extension portion 621a2 toward the plate portion 621a on the opposite side. The front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d and the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. And mainly prepare.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The back surface extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)), while the torsion spring is in the process of changing the state to the fixed state. By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb begins to come into contact with the main body plate portion 611.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the claw member 640 after rotation is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined from the lower end to the front side. 633, and a curved surface 634 formed to be curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a are mainly provided.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion that is arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby restricting the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. Mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the tilt angle is such that the back surface of the game board 13 is in contact with the surface. It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), the cover members 171 and the board support device 600 are fixed to the multi-function cover member 171 and the board support device 600 which are arranged close to the board support device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, FIG. 134 (a) shows the released state of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) shows the fixed state of the board surface support device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by simply pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the fixed position after rotation.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulation front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is regulated by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 620 The front side on which the extension portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the front claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, while the regulation rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a, which is the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIG. 134 (a)). (Up to 135 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

In the angle range (the range between FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a)) in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates, the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630 is relative to the regulated front claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the attitude change of the regulated front claw member 630 when operating due to the downward load changes the attitude toward the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). Since it becomes a posture change), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, so that the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 without the game board 13 being pushed inward.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from rotating due to the downward load being applied to the regulated front claw member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extension plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Here, in the case where the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the rotation front claw member 620 is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it may occur.

Assuming that the board support device 600 stabilizes at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the distance between the two will be shortened and the game will be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 by the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the rotating front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 and the regulated front claw Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135A, the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotating front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotating front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the clerk to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, the game board 13 is 90% stable. In this case, the case where the front frame 14 is not closed is solved, and in this case, a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14. The board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so as to abut the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 on the board surface support device 600 in the released state (FIG. 134 (a). ), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640 after rotation, and the front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135A, the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d. Therefore, the rotating front claw member 620 via the rotating rear claw member 640. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb given to the player is given as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resistive portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is located from the portion that contacts the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) toward the portion that contacts the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius of the biaxial member P62 is gradually increased.

As a result, when the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the rotating front claw member 620 is rotated to displace the second shaft member P62, The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 135 The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship of being separated from the regulation front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 in the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not come into contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is the multifunction cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward on the front surface to rotate the regulation front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the regulation front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-rear position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back surface extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are released.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other in the vertical direction. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the operation of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630. The amount of displacement of 640 is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and the rotation front claw member 620. It is possible to displace in the direction of widening the angle between the rotation and the claw member 640.

Therefore, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the displacement amount of the front claw member 620, so that the game board is supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. The displacement of the front-rear position of 13 can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 on the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 136, the release state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board surface support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but when the game board 13 is arranged, the front frame 14 is closed. Is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is released, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulation rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 138 counterclockwise direction) are opposite, so that the reaction force becomes excessive, so it is difficult to do with a normal load. As described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing restricting unit 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated by the action of the regulation rod 615. The direction (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (FIG. 138 counterclockwise direction) are not opposite, and can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above. Yes (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 can be pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159, and the board surface support device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. In addition, in FIGS. 140 and 141, a state in which the cover member for closing the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12 is shown.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then inverted back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 143 (b), the back side of only the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The shaft is rotatably supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) that partially covers the front surface of the 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. It mainly includes a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the posture of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. 718 and a plurality of positioning convex portions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted in the right corner portion, and a locking portion 713 in which the hook portion 723 can be locked on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. The convex portion 714, which is projected to the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 in the closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) of the cover member 721 are arranged to face each other. It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. It mainly includes a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, the ball launching unit 112a can be repaired (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) before the failure occurs.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the base member 711, a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). It mainly includes a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state with an allowable state that allows the flow to the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722. A ball-passing opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 arranged in a positional relationship slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball-passing opening 724. Mainly includes a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not it is present, a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generating solenoid 741, and a ball. A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward as the distance from the ball passing opening 724 is increased, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. It is mainly provided with a regulated overhanging portion 745 which is extended by a sufficient interval and whose extending end projects toward the sphere passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and includes a flow plate portion 724a that inclines downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction. The rib portion 724b, which is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like shape and is inclined downward as the extending tip surface toward the back side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c which is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the sphere P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in a manner separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged so as to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. It is possible to prevent the member 725 from colliding with the member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. It is formed as a long hole along the direction and has a straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the through hole 731a for passing the fastening screw and the bulging portion 716a. The regulation groove 731b is formed in a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731 when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716. It can be slid along the straight line to be output, whereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P81 (the firing intensity when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and is a base with screws inserted into mounting holes 732 formed in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. It is attached to the member 710.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and comes into contact with two front and rear positions on the peripheral surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the sphere P8 upward. It is configured to guide you.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the ball by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c), the cover member 721 is not shown in order to facilitate understanding.

In the ball feed device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats above the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts on the front side wall of the foundation member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the foundation member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclination portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with an acute-angled tip is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Mainly includes an upper blade portion 725c extending from the above.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and allowed to enter will be described.

146 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a), and FIG. 147 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after launching the ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of some constituent members of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge portion of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current is passed through the launching solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs, so that the sphere P8 is given a launching force and the sphere P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a)). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. , It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by utilizing the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture that is closer to the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the thread Y8 moves while being pulled by the ball P8 that rolls on the launch rail 730 through the lower side of the flow plate portion 724a, and the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 is the flow plate portion 724a. Since it moves along the upper surface, the thread Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c that overhangs the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. ..

When the player holds the front end (other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is loaded by applying a load due to the firing of the ball P8 to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, it is possible that the thread Y8 is not sufficiently pulled and the thread Y8 is not cut. However, in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and that of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The composition of is almost the same.

The effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (an operation including at least one of an operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The drive side arm member 910 that rotates by being pivotally supported by the back plate 1100 and the driving force of the drive motor 921 is transmitted via the arm gear 924, and the drive side arm member 910 are driven. The drive motor 921 that generates the driving force, the transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910 are interlocked with each other. On the left and right opposite sides of the thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction, the thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal operation device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the central main body of the support base material 801 to the right of the upper end portion, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 801P is bored at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801 and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P, extending rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes and inside. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which the detection arc plate 880d of the free fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion that constitutes an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion that constitutes an region below the upper portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly vertically as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later, the support base material 801 is arranged so as to be movable up and down. The operating space can be reduced when the 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P, respectively, as described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer circumference of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, it can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. It is arranged to the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the support base material 801 from being separated from the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 via the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. The plate-shaped flat plate member 803 is provided on the back surface side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the peripheral edge also has an irregular shape in front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and are molded into substantially the same shape, although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, so that the specific color (red) becomes darker on the outer peripheral edge without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, a vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and a radial center portion, respectively. There is.

The petals 802 are from the rear side portion 802a rather than the rear side portion 802a arranged on the tip rounded side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, the right side of the paper surface in FIG. The front side portion 802b arranged on the pointed tip side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side 802a is stacked on the back side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to the five petals 802 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge portion extends forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending rearwardly in a cylindrical shape and having a screw hole inside are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 (in the lateral direction).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls of each flat plate member 803 in the circumferential direction (short direction), and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screwed portions 802S of the petal 802, and the petal 802 is provided on the front side. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 from the front, and the screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby the flat plate member 803 is brought into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 156. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction at two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding the two locations. The positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five locations where the screwing portion 813S having the screw hole is integrally formed. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 814 has only an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this way, a set consisting of three slits, the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). Each end of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in the front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are the slits on both sides. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose centers coincide with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the pair consisting of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed more closely so as to be close to each other inward, which also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. However, as described above, when the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged so as to extend along the inclined direction D12, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the slit member 810 can be arranged accordingly. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is small at both ends of the slide member 820 so that the tip portion has a semicircular shape in front view. The center of the extending portion to be molded, the central portion where the thickness is larger than that of the effecting portion at the position between the extending portions, the screw insertion hole 821 bored in the extending portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that is projected from the front side to the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. To be equipped.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is in a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles with the central slit 814. And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In the fully fitted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, respectively, and are screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are almost along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is in a position facing a certain outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so that it slides in.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 of the rotating plate 830, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side of the rotating plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and is formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a shape in which a peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to be closed in a loop shape elongated in front view. It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to drop.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the clockwise direction in the front view along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and thereafter. The rotating plate 830 extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape in the clockwise direction of the front view from the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

On the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward in a peripheral wall shape from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and having teeth on the outer peripheral surface is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably pivotally supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161A, the third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the second gear 830G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , It is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, there are three locations on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screwing portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is provided at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and has a positioning boss with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. Positioning is performed by inserting 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and fixing is performed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to separate.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the central axis rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the supporting base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a lumen portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth is formed. Around the inner cavity portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two screw holes on the left and right sides of the inner cavity portion 856, and a front screw-in portion 857 having screw holes inside, and the front screw-in portion 857 to the inner cavity portion 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, and extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 to the inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at a position equidistant from both rear screwed portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to project rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

The LED substrate 861 is formed with screw insertion holes 862 and positioning holes 863 at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and screwing the screw into the front screwing portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location in the center and a large number of locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around the one location. Each of the LEDs 865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

Lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decorative member 868 is made of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, extending from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a columnar shape, and a screw can be screwed into the central portion. A pair of screw-in portions 869 in which a screw hole is formed are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. The screwing portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is brought into contact with the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED substrate 861 sandwiched from the front side, and the screw is screwed into the screwing portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. A cylindrical member having a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and having a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 and a main body cylindrical member 883 rotatably and freely fitted to each other are mainly provided.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion formed and in which the screwing portion 883S is not formed among the above four locations.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in the outer diameter direction in a rib shape with the same protrusion length as the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at the intermediate position in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and is also axially projected. A sliding rib 883b extending over is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened portion, forms a cup shape with a bottom, and abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side, and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by irradiating light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion having a size capable of inserting the central decorative member 868.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161A, a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G. It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and screw insertion holes are formed around the pivot opening 880a at positions corresponding to two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a in the 880b.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880. Positioning is performed by inserting 883a (see FIG. 163) into the positioning hole 880c, and fixing is performed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and the photo is arranged so that the member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D can be detected. It is detected by the coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d can be detected regardless of the posture in which the fourth gear 880G starts rotating (minimum angle). 72 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and also from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear side screwing portion 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 so as to project forward, and as shown in FIG. 154, the slit member 810 is attached to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged by the screwing portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b at eight points along the circumferential direction, so that the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 is formed. The slit member 810 is in linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the 813, so that the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is formed. It is supported smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by applying a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the innermost deepest part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the above, and the supporting elongated hole 1140 formed as an elongated hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 in between. Mainly prepared.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910, and is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right near the outer periphery at the front end portion thereof so that screws can be screwed into the support column 1110. A screw-in portion 1111 to be formed and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side in pairs on the same surface as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 which is convexly provided in a columnar shape with a step on the front side at a position closer to one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the elongated main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121, the second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and the second accommodating portion 1122 are arranged in opposite directions to the first accommodating portion 1121 and the drive side arm member. It mainly includes a third accommodating portion 1123 in which the arm gear 924 fitted with the 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line. Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is formed in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a supporting elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a supporting portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screw-in portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) that are formed in an elongated hole extending to the left and right so as to be slidably movable to the left and right by the lateral base material 1000S. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by the base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 at the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in the front view, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member to be fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150, the fastening plate portion 1001S which is arranged at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S is projected in a columnar shape toward the back side in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the long holes 931 to be supported, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner of the front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Mainly includes a ridge portion 1005S which is projected on the front side along an arc shape having the same center as the above.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip of the supported convex portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between the two, and in that state, a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 is screwed from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S to support the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the normal position, but is formed at a convex height that allows a contact when the second effect member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position. Will be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941, and is on the back side in the right corner portion in the front view. Axial support column 941 that is projected in a columnar shape and is axially supported by a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged close to the shafted support column 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. Part 942 and the like are mainly provided.

The shafted support column 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and is a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A screw-in portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S arranged at the tip of the shaft support support portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with a collar sandwiched between them. By screwing the screw into the lid member 945, the lid member 945 acts as a stopper. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip-side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces the vicinity of the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc concave portion 1004S to generate resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 that are configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and the arm gear 924 in a range of a predetermined angle in the out-of-diameter direction. The detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 overhanging the petal operating device 800, the shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports the collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates the urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800, and the support elongated hole. A cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in front view so as to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right of 1140, and a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden by the board cover 1000C in front view. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effecting member 940 with a slight distance from the second producing member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is missing, the screwed portion 1006S makes the second effect member 940. 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction. The 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. As a result, even when the heavy device called the petal operation device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910, it is easy to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIG. 168, FIGS. 170 and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900 and the back plate. 1100 is a front view, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 show a connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. (Refer to 151), it extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle rotation range), so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171 the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates in advance of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 in a manner of projecting toward the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, the second effect member 940 operates following the petal operation device 800. It can be visually recognized as if it were.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view which shows through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of a slit member 810 and a rotating plate 830.

175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 expands from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expansion shown in FIGS. After passing through the middle position, the expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the rotation operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position, and then the gathering operation (third operation) is performed. It is configured so that it can return to the initial position (gathering position) by performing operation).

At the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is the inner end (the end on the circular opening 811 side) of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810. As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. It is in a state of gathering that makes up the flowers.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c). By interlocking the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)), the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 can easily be fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof. As a result, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly linear from the inner end to the outside along the central slit 814. Guided by to move.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expansion operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination. Becomes faster.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. 177. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. ..

As the guide rail 832 is tilted clockwise in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Further, as the guide rail 832 is curved in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side with respect to the direction D15, the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed become more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823 to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the certainty of power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. , The structure is divided into roles.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially and becomes fully open, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. FIG. 178 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is subsequently locked to the outer end of the central slit 814. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before due to a small torque that is lower than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member The 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the front-view counterclockwise direction indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. In this way, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotary power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotating plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous without any delay. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view clockwise) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction in the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is formed. While being braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), whereby the expansion operation is performed. Is gathered in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit, to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit, in the central slit 814, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are moved from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the central portion. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the gathering state, and finishes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is further rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). It rotates clockwise in the front view in the gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the assembled state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this gathering operation to the rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift after a while, or to shift immediately so as to be continuous without a pause. It can also be.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is rotating.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by a wall on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent and formed toward the front side in a manner in which the notch 9145b is covered from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back surface side, and is upwardly generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes a thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. This is for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible fraudulent activities will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly launched, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146 to the other end of the thread Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that even if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the thread Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, thereby opening the ball P9 as a winning opening. It is possible to repeatedly pass through 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and it is possible to obtain an illegal profit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, a thin plate blade is passed through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed toward the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is brought when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. As a result, when the thread Y8 is pulled, the thin plate blade portion 9153 is prevented from warping or bending when an outward load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 of the foul ball passage portion 9145. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits cheating is afraid of discovering cheating, after grasping the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of pants). ), It is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around. While stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right, and the bottom opening arranged behind the ball pulling lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right-sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes. That is, since the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give the ball discharged to the lower plate 50 in the front-rear direction a velocity component in the right direction (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side), among the balls to be discharged, The proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8 can be increased.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side occupies a region of about two-thirds of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53. The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and a boarding restriction step portion is formed at the boundary. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated with. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the boarding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding regulation step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by a wall on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 184 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 185 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed from diagonally above left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2. Then, the sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side in a manner of covering the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). Radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to be convex from the side surface on the back surface side to the back surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius is about Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 collide with the ball P8 and crack or chip. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape that extends toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily inserted into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a portion constituting the bifurcated blade portion of 10153, and extends to the left in a manner of slightly ascending and tilting from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angled recess 10155 having an acute recessed deep portion is formed between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 can enter the acute-angled concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8 can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side as compared with the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraud. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portions connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are configured to abut on the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right opposite sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand and causing the ball P8 to flow back through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and be discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the opposite directions at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area is lengthened, so that the detection of fraudulent activity can be accelerated.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the thread Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a weak firing intensity and did not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment uses the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball receiving port 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is made of a resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have an arc shape similar to that of the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game region side. A guide member formed to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 having a width at which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a formed and arranged close to the ball launching unit 112a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b and.

A foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furniture, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In the present embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the permissible amount, the full tank switch (not shown) that is arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act as described above, in which balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c so that the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, by hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to project cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and to form a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance to the base member 68b1. A long screw B11 is inserted into the through hole drilled as the mounting hole and the through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position with the through hole, and in that state, the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that comes into contact with the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment). , About 1/3 below the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. Can be avoided. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball that rolls on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 with a closing plate 2062b4 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and a width (about 2 [mm] in the present embodiment) through which the thread can enter. It is recessed to the back side to the right position. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is provided with a notch 2062b3 for a semicircle on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed, so that the same method as described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment is performed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act through a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end (ball P8 is fixed) on the side of the thread Y8 protruding toward the player. Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball P9 toward the front side (see FIG. 182), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion that projects downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be switchable between ON and OFF when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) shows. The state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. Further, in FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch is shown. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the sphere flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. 190 (b), the sphere immediately flows away. Since the state shown in 190 (a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored by the timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at the shortest, 0.6 seconds later). Because it can be done.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that moves while filling the passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 191 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When advancing the tip of a device such as an endoscope in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball in the foul ball passage 2062c, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is dispelled. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is excluded by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the weight portion 68a2 is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long soft portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a2 is maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, it is possible to control so as to sound an alarm when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , Cheating can be detected early.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped as much as possible (see FIG. 190 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it is early. Can be exchanged for. As a result, compared to the case where the replacement member for the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraudulent activity even before the replacement and the trouble of forgetting the storage location and searching for it can be saved. The effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by the fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be arranged).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. It is possible to maintain the deterrence of fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the exchange has been carried out, and even if it has been exchanged, the degree of damage is unknown. it can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the free fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a flange portion 2887 thereof, as compared with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment. A regulation portion 2888 that protrudes from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 to the back surface side is provided. The free fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment has only a difference in the back cover 2886 as compared with the free fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment, and is provided with the same as the free fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The regulating portion 2888 projects to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the regulation portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operations of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. .. In addition, in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is shown in time series, and the simultaneous points are shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b), respectively. The state of is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 that change the posture by the action of the regulation unit 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other, centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that inclines in a manner away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulating unit 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a) (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are inclined. At petal 802, posture changes occur to the extent possible.

As the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 changes in this way, the load from the regulating portion 2888 is received, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), since the narrow slide rib 803a of the slide member 2820 only comes into contact with the slits 815 on both sides, frictional resistance is suppressed, and the slide member 2820 has slits 814 and 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a with the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T with the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed) increases frictional resistance. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the sliding member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance of the sliding member 2820 to the movement of the slits 814 and 815 in the longitudinal direction. The torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) without waiting (slide member 2820 in the normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the moving resistance of the sliding member 2820 and the moving resistance of the slide member 2820 in an inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operating device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 196 (a), FIG. 196 (b) and FIG. 197, the appearance of the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, the regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b as shown in FIG. 196 (b), and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 become the normal postures. Be returned.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and thus the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

The case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is in contact with the regulating portion 2888 has been described, but if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petal 802 can be moved to the fully open position and rotated at the fully open position, which is also possible in this embodiment.

Further, the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888 is such that the petal 802 slightly changes its posture even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position or at the petal 802 rotating at the fully open position. By setting the position so that the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be evacuated, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in the front view. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it serves as a mark as to whether or not the petal 802 passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. The difference in perspective can make a difference between the petal 802 expanding to the maximum and performing a rotational operation, and the petal 802 expanding halfway to perform a rotational operation.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can function as a directing part. As a result, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The regulation unit 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulation unit 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulation unit 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 coming into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, the meaning to be conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while making a slight change in posture in contact with the regulating portion 2888. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts with the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position, but if the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the petal 802 changes its posture. The degree of spread varies. Therefore, even if the regulation portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described in the expanding position, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 198 and 199, an operation example of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is shown in time series. Further, in FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. Since it is the same as in the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is widened in the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Of the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a to be provided and the side slits 815 arranged on the front view clockwise side of the central slit 814, the side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the front view clockwise side. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814 and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814. Inside, a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b, which is recessed in a wall portion on the front clockwise side in a manner of widening the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction, is mainly provided.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from a position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)) of the slit member 3810. Is formed in.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)) from a position where it is arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803. Is formed continuously to.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts rotating clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (the slide rib 803a at the right end is a clock). It moves in the direction of entering the peripheral concave portion 3815a (see FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)) with the portion that first abuts with the 3810 as a fulcrum.

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. And the contact between the central recessed portion 3814a and the screwed portion 2803S and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are clocked with a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance given to the slit member 3810 by the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. When the slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side comes into contact with the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a moves to the front counterclockwise side from the concave base end of the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)). Therefore, by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the front view clockwise direction, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved. The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194 (b). ), The rotation operation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 (rotating around the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Rotational motion) is present (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). (See a)), the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view (see FIG. 199 (b)). That is, the rotational operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) can be obtained. From the position of the petals 802 to be fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the gathering position (see FIG. 195). Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment is the curvature of the lower frame member 8320. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The second state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 (a), the first state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 201, and the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 202 (b). The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been explained in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments of the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment. Yes, and other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. On the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are bored along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are bored at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. Mainly provided with a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the above-mentioned liquid such as drinking water downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but the possibility that foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the easier it is for the tilting device 310 to be displaced (deformed) to the left or right near the front end. In addition, this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed so as not to be a gap V13 enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin). However, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right side (for example, to the left), the gap V13 formed in the other side (for example, to the right) is formed in the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The size of the gap V13 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the two and the coin, and the size can be such that a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also formed in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by shifting (deforming) the position by applying a load toward the back side, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, when a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the left or right gap V13 or the front-rear gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, and the tilting device 310 tilts, a coin is coined. There is a possibility that foreign matter in the shape may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward to the left and right toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good feeling of operation, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be performed by the operation device 8300, so the coin-shaped foreign substance is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as it is discovered that the coin-shaped foreign matter has been removed, but in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

203 (a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (c) is a side view of the operating device 8300. FIG. 203 (d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (e) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 203 (a). FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right center positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (left and right in the vertical view in the second state). In the first state of the tilting device 310, the tilting D81 is tilted downward toward the center of the left and right due to being curved toward the center, and the tilting D82 is tilted downward toward the front side due to the tilting device 310. (See FIG. 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required as the size of the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily secured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign matter in a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. The size is larger than the size of the object. That is, in the present embodiment, a portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a lateral width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits the light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portion of the lens member 313 which is connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 is mirror-finished (mirror-finished member) in the present embodiment. Is fixed) to reflect the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

Due to this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member 8320 will continue to remain. It should be noted that this effect is not limited to the case of visual recognition through the first through hole 8326a, but is the same when visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set so that the largest possible coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) can be discharged. The width in the normal direction of is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. Can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is removed. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the standing state (posture) as it is.

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

To remove the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since the installation portion 15a is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which it is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)). Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit / receive signals to / from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to quickly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to normal operation, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. Note that FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and FIG. 204 (b) shows the front frame 14 as the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The front-rear displacement member 2652, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and is displaceably supported in the front-rear direction, and the locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652, The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below at two front and rear positions and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and is on the front side of the front / rear displacement member 2652. It is provided with an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies an urging force toward.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), the torsion spring NBb is abutted. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member NBb and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the rear position. , It is a continuously connected inclined surface.

The tilt angle and formation range of the inclined surface 2652a are such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned downward at the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned upward at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652. Set.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the post-rotation claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and pushes it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, so that the torsion spring NBb is a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force that becomes the force, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of selection of the operator and workability.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are crawled above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegality of melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire and infiltrating the inside as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt out to detect fraud at an early stage has been described. However, the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment is used when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is restored to a tensile shape (stored shape) by applying heat. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape in which the back side and the lower surface side are opened, and the main body box portion 2281 which is stacked above the reverse cup portion 2178 and the back side opening so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. A back cover member 2282 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and a back cover member 2282 are provided with a space.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, extends from the lower right corner portion and abuts on the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and narrows the opening from the lower corner portion upward. The narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, the protruding portion 2285 projecting upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284, and the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 are recessed from the back side. The first conductive portion 2286, which is housed in a concave portion and one end projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and hits the upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a contactable length, a torsion spring SP15 for generating an urging force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and a protrusion on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. It includes a shape memory spring 2288 that is supported by the portion 2285 and is arranged below the second conductive portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205 (b)) (FIG. 205 (b)). c) By doing so, the continuity is cut off, and the fact that the continuity is cut off is input and an error signal is output.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

By filling the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173 by the extension portion 2283, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, maintains the shape after deformation in a low temperature state, and has a property of returning to a shape memorized in advance by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. ..

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back lid member 228 in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state and then returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and reduces the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, forming the light guide member 540 in a curved manner causes a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 which schematically represents the part 2543b, and FIG. 206 (c) is a schematic downward concave part 2543c which is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, which schematically represents a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 206 (e) schematically represents an upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 206A, the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, the region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and the lower and inner lens member 530 with reference to the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is this. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the eighth embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in the substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 206A, the light proceeds in the direction of collecting light toward the inner lens member 530 side and in the direction of spreading light toward the outer lens member 550 side according to the above-described configuration. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate and have a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the left and right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed while producing a light emitting effect. The effect can be improved.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 15 is formed flat has been described, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400. As a result, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower plate unit 6400 is improved. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the paper surface will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface will be described as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 is arranged in front of the operation device 10300 in which the swing device member 10310 is arranged in the upward position in FIG. 207 and the operation device 10300 below the operation device 10300. The lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, the horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the light emission effect, and the upper part of the front frame 10014 that mainly covers the light emission effect and It mainly includes an upper effect device 6500 for executing sound effect.

The above-mentioned glass unit 16 is arranged in an area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and a game area in which the game ball flows down is configured on the back side of the glass unit 16. It is the same as the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, FIG. 207 omits the illustration of the state of the back side of the glass unit 16, and FIG. 208 shows the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). Omitted, the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be visually recognized from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is arranged.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 shows a directional view (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) along the longitudinal direction of the lever member of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)). To.

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, which are formed in the shape of a thin plate and have flexibility to the extent that they can be bent and deformed. As shown in FIG. 209, the accommodation recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the degree of the recess toward the back side increases as it approaches the center on the left and right, and the center of the accommodation recess 17a on the left and right and the operation device. It is arranged so that the left and right centers of the 10300 are aligned with each other.

The back side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodating recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the back side as it approaches the center on the left and right. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) side of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the center on the left and right.

Therefore, in the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be large, the vertical displacement of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front-rear position from the metal body portion 10014a to the fitting position. It is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, in the left and right positions (positions separated from the center to the left and right) where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, the operation can be performed even if the front and rear positions from the metal body 10014a to the fitting position are lengthened. There is no problem in suppressing the displacement of the device 10300 in the vertical direction, and by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal body portion 10014a. A wide arrangement area such as the upper plate 17 and the frame button 22 can be secured.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 shows a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the front side of the outer frame 11 with the left end portion axially supported by the hinge 19 as the center.

The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. The front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12 by removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19. Since the configurations to be newly described are respectively arranged on the front frame 10014, the description will be described below focusing on the front frame 10014.

FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. In addition, in FIGS. 211 and 212, a state in which the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014 is shown.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member forming a skeleton, includes a metal main body 10014a integrally formed with a front door mounting bracket 58, and the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are metal main bodies 10014a. It is fastened and fixed to. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal body portion 10014a side (back side), and the metal body portion 10014a has a fastening portion. A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male screw) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body 10014a and screwing and tightening the fastening member (male screw) into the fastening portion.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operating device 10300 is held so as to be sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear of the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, the configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order.

FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower plate unit 6400 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and is shown in a directional view from the back side, and the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their insertion holes 6801R and 6801L are shown for easy understanding. The assembly direction line connecting the fastening points is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled to the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330 is plate-shaped so as to project from the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts on the upper surface of the convex portion T10 so as to ride on it.

Below the operating device 10300, a bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is arranged. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) formed with an opening toward the front side and a recessed portion De2 with the inner case member 10330 side opposite (lower side) and the back side open. Be prepared.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape in a rear view with the lower side open, and is formed in a size that can be fitted to the plate-shaped convex portion T10, that is, is recessed with the plate-shaped convex portion T10. By fitting with the portion De2, the operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. Further, since the plate-shaped convex portion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-shaped convex portion T10. In addition, the fitting here may be such that the bottom member De can be aligned with the plate-shaped convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of a gap.

At the tip of the plate-shaped convex portion T10, a pair of left and right cylindrical projecting portions projecting in a thin columnar shape toward the front side and a fastening screw are formed so as to be screwable at an intermediate position between the pair of columnar projecting portions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of cylindrical projecting portions are inserted into the recesses recessed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-shaped convex portion T10 and the bottom member De. The fastening screw to be formed and screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into the insertion hole formed at the corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and by tightening this fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, the concave portion De2 formed in the latter half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-shaped convex portion T10, while the front half portion on the opposite side (see FIG. 215 (a)) supports the plate shape. It is arranged above the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a of the portion 6426. That is, the front half portion of the bottom member De is arranged so as to face the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be in contact with the resin member 6427.

It should be noted that the possibility of contact here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may be in contact with the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be separated from each other while a load is applied to the operation device 10300. The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may come into contact with each other when the operating device 10300 is displaced downward due to a vibration effect.

After fitting the operation device 10300 into the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by fastening a fastening screw to be inserted into the front frame 10014 from the back side.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 is covered with a plurality of fastening portions 10333 (three locations in the present embodiment) formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, and one of the fastening portions 10333. It is a metal plate, and is mainly provided with a metal plate portion 10334 that is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and can receive a compressive force when fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be in contact with the edge portion of the insertion hole H10a formed in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter capable of inserting the fastening screw. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is arranged on the front side of the metal main body portion 10014a. However, a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be passed through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal body 10014a.

Here, in the periphery of the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than that of the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of the through hole is designed so as not to interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is covered on the back surface side of the fastening portion 10333.

As a result, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal body portion 10014a by fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 to the front frame 10014. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal body portion 10014a can be electrically conductive, they can have the same role as the so-called ground wire. As a result, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

Further, by arranging the metal plate portion 10334 between them, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a function of a washer. As a result, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal body portion 10014a.

The shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw-in hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claws are formed so as to be displaced in the front-rear position, the function of the spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

The locations where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts required for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom in design on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is a problem because the operation device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load in the sinking direction (downward direction) is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses the subduction displacement of the operation device 10300 on the front side while concentrating the fastening points on the back side. This will be described in order below.

First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side is fitted with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the front side portion of the operating device 10300 is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by the fitting portion 6426d, and the subduction displacement is suppressed.

Next, the operations of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with a plate-shaped projecting portion on the back side edge of the upper half portion arranged on the back side of the swing operation member 10310.

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half portion, and a plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d that further project from the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c. Mainly prepared.

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-shaped overhanging portion 10322c that projects in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half portion. The right front cover 10322 is not formed with a portion corresponding to the partial overhanging portion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d are configured as portions to be inserted and fitted into the accommodating recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodating recess 17a of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the housing recesses 17a have a lower edge overhanging portion 10017b whose lower edge projects to the front side with substantially the same overhang width over the left and right sides of the housing recess 17a, and the left and right sides of the housing recess 17a. On both sides, below the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b, at positions slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c, they are arranged to face the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b in a manner of projecting to the front side. A plurality of opposed overhanging portions 10017c forming a groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d whose upper side is bored in the front-rear direction as a long hole at a surface position with the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b. And an escape hole 10017e formed in the front-rear direction at a position arranged side by side with the facing overhanging portion 10017c on the right side.

When assembling the operation device 10300 into the accommodating recess 17a, the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposite overhang 10017c, and a plurality of partial overhangs 10321d Is inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodating recesses 17a.

In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction by fitting the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c into the groove between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the facing overhang 10017c. Is suppressed.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial overhangs 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with respect to the accommodating recess 17a. It is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, since the accommodating recess 17a is formed in an open arch shape on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are in contact with each other and accommodated inside the arch, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated. Can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or the back side direction.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the position shift of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a load toward the rear to the swing operation member 10310. (Return to the original position at an early stage).

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, he / she mainly operates it with his / her left hand. In a general gaming posture (a posture facing the pachinko machine 10010), the player operates the swinging operation member 10310 at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 10010. In the operation of the arranged operation device 10300, since the left hand is extended diagonally to the right front, it is rare that the load at the time of the operation has no left-right component.

Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 is given a load toward the rear and at the same time a load is applied in the left-right direction, so that the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left-right directions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the accommodating recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged between them. Therefore, when the operation device 10300 is displaced. The restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that can occur occurs in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in the direction of returning the operating device 10300 to the original position. As a result, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be restored at an early stage.

From each of the above configurations, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodating recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation device 10300 with respect to the accommodating recess 17a.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which the fixed assembly portion 6802 described later of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be arranged at a position where it projects outward from the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c.

Next, the operation device 10300 and its surroundings will be described. First, the outline of the internal structure of the operation device 10300 will be described. 215 (a), 215 (b), 216 (a) and 216 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line CCXVa-CCXVa of FIG. 207.

FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIGS. 215 (b), 216 (a), and 216 (b) show. , The state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), in the operation device 10300, the lever member 10340 that pivotally supports the swing operation member 10310 with the shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is centered on the displacement of the shaft support rod 10363 arranged on the arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1 and the shaft support rod 10363 thereof. Displacement is possible in a manner combined with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is configured to be generated by the operation of the player.

That is, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swing operation member 10310 can be pushed in in the form of rotational displacement centered on the shaft support rod 10363. (Pushing operation).

Further, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the lower front side, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down in the form of rotational displacement centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1. Can be (push down operation).

Further, in the state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation is performed by the action of the posture correction device 10312 (the action of giving a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b). The member 10310 is in a posture in which the member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (backflip posture, a posture in which the member 10340 is backward by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, since the angle of change in posture of the swing operating member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. ..

Further, when the lens member 10317 that is displaceably supported by the swing operation member 10310 is pushed (push operation) while the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 is swung due to the load during the operation. The operating member 10310 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support rod 10363 and is displaced in a manner of tilting forward, so that the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 can be changed to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216 (b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply a load for operation from a plurality of directions, and if the load mode is different, the displacement mode of the swing operation member 10310 is also available. It can be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by a drive motor around the lever support shaft 10331d1. As a result, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibrating device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 is directly or indirectly contacted with the lens member 10317. It is configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a bobbin member (arranged on the lever member 10340 side) which is a cylindrical member around which a copper wire is wound. A disk-shaped plate in which a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected. The pressing member is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

The vibrating device 10366 is configured to be capable of generating linear vibration along the direction Y17a along the straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

As a result, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making maximum use of the vibration energy of the vibrating device 10366, and the effect of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be improved.

Next, the details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. In the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, where the outer end (the end opposite to the swing operation member 10310) is formed to be curved, the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. The radius. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the range of motion of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured, and the player can grip the swing operation member 10310. You can secure a space to put your finger in.

Further, since the bending of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310, the design can be improved and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be caused as a whole. , The allowable width of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L bored in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to both left and right ends of the accommodating recess 17a can be inserted. A fixing assembly portion 6802 for inseparably fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330 with a fastening screw is provided.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodating recesses 17a through insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the farthest points from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane passing through the center in the left-right direction and orthogonal to the left-right direction), and the load is difficult to be transmitted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that is inserted through the 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the accommodating recess 17a.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed at the center in the left-right direction of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. The position is shifted to the right from the position where the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are located on the backmost side). That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left and right centers to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left and right centers. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

In the present embodiment, since the boundary between the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is deviated from the center in the left-right direction, one member (mainly, the portion located on the backmost side) of the accommodation recess 17a is located. In the embodiment, the alignment with the accommodating recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), so that the assembly can be facilitated as compared with the case where the alignment is performed by both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted during the operation of the operation device 10300. Here, the swing operation member 10310 can be arranged close to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 on the back side (particularly, they are arranged close to each other at an upward position (see FIG. 218)). Since this is a location, there is a risk that the fastening screw will loosen due to the transmission of the load during operation of the operating device 10300. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fixed assembly 6802 is arranged so as to be shifted to the left and right from the left and right centers where the load during operation is maximized, so that the transmitted load is reduced as compared with the load during operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

In this way, by shifting the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and also shifting the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the assembly efficiency can be improved and the fastening screw can be loosened. It can be made less likely to occur.

Both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 in the fixed assembly portion 6802. That is, in the fixed assembly portion 6802, the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

However, with respect to the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is inserted into a through hole formed in the upper plate portion of the inner case member 10330 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 220), and the upper plate portion thereof. Is only sandwiched by the fixed assembly 6802 from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the number of fastening points formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced as compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, respectively.

As a result, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when many fastening points are provided on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are less likely to bend due to the rigidity of the fastening screws, and may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to easily bend while maintaining the fastening portion, the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be reduced, but in this case, the durability may be lowered or fraudulent activity may be caused. There is a risk of

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening points as in the present embodiment, it is possible to sufficiently bend the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. As a result, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be disassembled to the left and right in a state of being integrated with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fastened to the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a) in the front-rear direction. Will be done.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 can move relative to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 can move relative to the right cover member 10324. , The assembly position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be described below.

The operation device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 so that the back side is formed along the curved surface of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided, and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are provided with adjusting elongated holes 10323a and 10324a, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at the outer upper end, respectively.

The adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively. Since they are elongated in the left-right direction, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed due to variations in molding or the like. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjusting elongated holes 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a recessed in the right direction from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 in contact with the left front cover 10321 and the fitting recess 10322a. In a state where the wall member 10322b to be mounted in the embodiment is provided and the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the movement to the left is stopped by the end face of the left front cover 10321 to prevent the wall. The member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

With such a configuration, when the wall member 10322b is replaced, the wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is a load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). This is the place where you repeatedly receive). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of the assembling work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to the transition from FIGS. 221 and 222 to 219 and 220). After being fastened and fixed, the left front cover 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330 to align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. It is fixed.

Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 and the left cover member 10323 are purposely used to correct the misalignment of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. It is necessary to loosen the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shift the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to make a correction.

Further, in anticipation of this, when the left front cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully tightened to the inner case member 10330 but are weakly fastened and fixed to determine the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left front cover 10321 After the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream side of the assembly procedure), the work procedure return of fastening and fixing the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream side of the assembly procedure) occurs. However, since the work itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification of the work.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so that the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are placed in the inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, the assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 include shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R in which the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344 and the front edge portion are arranged so as to face each other. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing the gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and the piano wire is inserted into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts to be attempted or mischievous acts of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is displaced due to the influence of the load (impact) during operation and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are operated during the operation of the operation device 10300. There is a risk that the 6803L and 6803R will rub against each other and resin shavings will be generated. Resin shavings have little effect as long as they are small, but if a large amount of resin shavings is clogged in the detection groove of a light-transmitting type switch typified by the so-called photocoupler type, the shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a risk that the degree of freedom in selecting the switch that can be adopted is limited.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembly portion 6802 as the fastening point of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is located at the left and right center position (the place where the load during operation and the load during operation are generated at the maximum). Since it is arranged at a position separated from the left and right, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a from shifting, prevent the generation of resin shavings, and suppress erroneous detection. In the present embodiment, the photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation in the backward rotation direction of the swing operation member 10310, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

Then, when the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward rotation direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is shielded, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, since no load is applied to the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, the durability can be improved as compared with the case where the load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, and a front view fan shape on the lower side of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, which are continuously formed as the plate portions of the above, are mainly provided.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (that is, a lever support shaft 10331d1 (that is, FIG. 215)) on which the back surface can come into contact with the curved portion of the upper front side of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. It is formed as a surface of an arc shape) with a center angle of about 90 degrees centered on).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R include a protruding interference portion 6805a projecting from the back surface side to the back surface side. The protruding interference portion 6805a is arranged slightly inside the inner edge portion Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to project to the back side.

As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a displaces the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively, in a state of being assembled (see FIG. 220). It is regulated by Rm1. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being disassembled in such a manner that they are separated from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer circumferences of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, and are connected so as to expand outward in the front view and bend toward the front side at the expanding tip. It includes curved portions 6806L and 6806R.

The left front cover 10321 includes fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L, which are formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in at the right end portion and are arranged vertically. Further, the right front cover 10322 includes insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, 6808R which are arranged vertically at the left end portion and are bored so that fastening screws can be inserted.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). As a result, the load and impact associated with the operation of the operation device 10300 can be dispersed in each fastening portion, and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be suppressed.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion that is easily visible to the player (particularly, it is easily visible from the front view). It is possible to prevent the performance of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, see FIG. 207) from being deteriorated. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a bored in the left-right direction is sandwiched in the portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and the inner case member 10330 is sandwiched and fixed by the fastening screw. .. It should be noted that the tip of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner of contacting the left surface of the plate portion on which the insertion hole 6802R is formed, not in the so-called “co-tightening” mode. .. In other words, by fastening, no compressive load is generated on the portion of the insertion hole H23a to be bored.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load during operation on the operation device 10300, the operations of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent within the above-mentioned gap range. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fixed assembly portion 6802 from being similarly displaced when a minute displacement that may occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs.

It should be noted that the extending length of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed at the time of fastening. .. In this case, since the restoring force of the portion of the insertion hole H23a to be bored increases the fastening force, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into an insertion hole H23b drilled in the left-right direction is screwed in a portion protruding toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing the fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In this embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted into a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable along the left-right direction at a portion protruding toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing the fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion and the insertion hole are formed at a plurality of locations along the forming direction of the facing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, but the combination of the objects to be fastened is formed at each location. It is configured differently. As a result, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at the same time, so that the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be described below.

First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at one place, it is possible to prevent one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

Next, if the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fixed at one place in the same manner, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. it can.

After that, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screw into the fixing assembly 6802 to fasten and fix the cover. Further, by screwing and fixing the fastening screw in the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

In this way, by forming the portion where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, as compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 only in the fastening mode. The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening work can be improved as compared with the case where the fastening screw is inserted in both the left and right directions.

Further, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Since the operation direction of each operation unit of the operation device 10300 is along a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the direction of each operation unit of the operation device 10300. It is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of. That is, when a load or impact during operation is generated along the operation direction, no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw is generated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to a load or impact during operation of the operating device 10300.

In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (including a part operated by operation. For example, a swing operation member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 10340, etc.), but all the operation parts are levers. Since the design operates in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if the operating portion does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating portion that pushes in the diagonally left and right directions), the operating portion of each operating portion The direction found as the balance (average) of the operation directions (for example, the intermediate angular direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the operation part where the operation instruction is frequently performed may be targeted (operation instruction is rarely generated). You may set the fastening direction (ignoring the operation part that you just need to do).

223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Except for the portion to be formed and the portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed, a plurality of surfaces arranged to face each other come into contact with each other in the vertical direction.

In the contacting portion, a plate-shaped portion extends to the right from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending to the right along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223 (a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, it is restricted that the shielding plate portion 6803R is displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from passing between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In the present embodiment, the inner case member 10330 arranged below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the back side portion is housed therein, and the lever member 10340 thereof are driven. It is possible to prevent the liquid from coming into contact with the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, or an electric system (such as a substrate) that drives the drive motor.

In addition, the cuts of the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the center of the left and right of the swing operation member 10310, while the cuts (joining surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same surface as the left and right center position of 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the cuts of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340 is arranged closer to the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (in the bulging portion from the inner case member 10330 to the left). Correspondence, see FIG. 218), even if the lower part between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L gets wet, the liquid that wets that part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. It is possible to prevent the drive motor from getting wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb extending to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate portion 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-shaped support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body portion 6411 and the lower plate of the lining base member 6410 There is a possibility that the liquid passes between the main body box portion 6421 of the forming member 6420 and flows toward the through hole 6412 or flows along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, when the liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may hit the player or wet the Senryo box.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of the liquid by sandwiching the through hole 6412 without a gap. By suppressing the passage of the liquid between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will hit the player or wet the Senryo box, so that the player can use it. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are streaked in a manner of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak portion D23 formed in is provided. The streaky portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The streak portion D23 serves as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. That is, the rigidity along the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is maintained (or decreased) while maintaining (or decreasing) the rigidity in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23, as compared with the case where the streak portion D23 is formed as a simple plate. Improve (anisotropic). This will be described by taking the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and have a role as a portion for filling the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be displaceable slightly downward by a load or impact during operation for the purpose of preventing the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodating recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

That is, when operating the operation device 10300, there is a possibility that a gap may be formed between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are extended (elastically deformed and bent) in the vertical direction, so that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a, and a gap can be accommodated. Can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed) in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed, thereby providing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since it is made larger (because it is made more rigid), it is possible to suppress vibration or deformation more than necessary when the shape is restored. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for one purpose of taking measures against problems that may occur during the operation of the operation device 10300.

Since the streaky portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape in front view, when a downward load is applied in the center, the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R can withstand upwards (pulling force is generated) on both the left and right sides. .. That is, even if a downward load is applied during the operation of the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned early.

On the other hand, even if a load is generated in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23, the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the downstream side due to the allowable deformation based on the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R include end streaky portions D24 formed in a streak shape in a manner of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streaky portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The end streak portion D24 mainly includes left and right streak portions D24a formed on the left and right sides and a central streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and each is formed as a countermeasure against a load in different directions.

The left and right streaks D24a are streaks arranged above the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and are formed in a shape that is inclined downward toward the back side. This downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load (along the direction of the load) such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310. That is, the resistance to the operation load can be improved by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a.

As for the inclination angle of the left and right streaks D24a, those arranged on the left and right sides are formed to have a stepwise larger angle with respect to the front-rear direction than those arranged on the left and right center sides. That is, the streaky portion extends in a plurality of directions. As a result, the resistance to the load during operation of the lens member 10317 can be improved regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

Moreover, the forming width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R on which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter in the one arranged on the left and right side than in the one arranged on the left and right center side. That is, since the formation width is shortened toward the side (left and right side) where the inclination in the front-rear direction corresponds to a large force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is small, and the resistance force is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the inclination in the front-rear direction is large as the direction in which the load is likely to be large during operation (the direction in which the hand is waved down).

On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion arranged downward from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portion on the front side), and has a shape that rises and inclines toward the back side. Formed from. This ascending inclination corresponds to the direction of the load when the operating device 10300 (inner case member 10330) tilts forward.

That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the central reinforcing portion D24b by the central reinforcing portion D24b, the load during the tilting operation centering on the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 causes the operation device 10300 (inside). It is possible to improve the resistance to the case member 10330) being displaced forward.

In addition, the central muscle portion D24b is formed of a total of seven muscles, one in the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right center side toward the back side. As a result, when the operation device 10300 (inner case member 10330) is displaced forward due to the load during the tilting operation centered on the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the displacement occurs in the left-right direction. The resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the bending in the left-right direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is more severe than the bending in the vertical direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the vertical direction). It becomes a large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge portion). When the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed in such a manner that The load (stress) applied to the load can be released (stress concentration can be avoided).

Even in the case of bending and deforming in this way, the lower edge overhanging portion so that the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. It is supported between 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are formed longer in the front-rear direction toward the left and right outer sides, so that the left front cover 10321 And it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the right front cover 10322 and the accommodating recess 17a.

Further, by making the flexibility of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the downstream side (V-shaped design member) of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operating device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operating device 10300. The ease of transmission to 6450 (see FIG. 232) can be changed by the direction of vibration or load.

That is, it is possible to easily transmit the vibration along the vertical direction and the operation load to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while the vibration and the operation in the left-right direction. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50. It can be difficult to do. As a result, even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swinging operation member 10310, it is possible to prevent the vibration and the load from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50, giving the player a sense of discomfort. it can.

Further, where the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c formed on the upper edges thereof are elongated on the left and right. It is inserted between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, when the shapes of the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c are compared with the shapes of the lower edge overhangs 10017b and the facing overhangs 10017c, the vicinity of the left and right ends is displaced in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the upper end portion on the front side of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrudes to the front side of the accommodating recess 17a), the curvature of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c is loosened (the left and right ends are displaced to the back side). It is preferable that the molding error can be dealt with by deforming so as to (make it).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the streaky portions D23 are formed on the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R along the vertical direction, the rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R in the horizontal direction is compared with the rigidity in the vertical direction. To be lowered. Therefore, when the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are deformed to the side where the curvature becomes loose, the deformation of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. , The deformation width of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be handled can be increased.

In this way, the streak portion D23 does not improve (weaken) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the forming direction (horizontal direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

Based on these facts, the streaky portion D23 may cause a problem when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled, see FIG. 213), and a problem that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated. It is possible to correspond to both.

It will be described back to FIG. 212. In the present embodiment, a flat plate-shaped flat plate portion (a plate-shaped portion in which a ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed along the metal main body portion 10014a) is formed on the lower left front portion of the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. A plate-shaped upper plate portion extending to the front side so as to be bent at the upper end portion of the upper portion of the flat plate portion, which is configured to be inclined downward toward the right. A back covering portion 10014b formed from a resin material is disposed in the embodiment. That is, the back covering portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross-sectional shape on a plane orthogonal to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The back covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is abutted (connected) to the flat plate portion at the rear end portion and is abutted (connected) to the upper plate portion at the right end portion thereof. In the region (space) formed in this way on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back covering portion 10014b face each other, balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, so-called foul balls, and the like are stored. Will be. Next, the details of the lower plate unit 6400 constituting the lower plate 50 will be described.

FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower plate unit 6400 is shown at an angle looking up from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower plate unit 6400 is a cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a in a manner that covers the front side of the metal body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212). The base member 6410, the lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted to the lining base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and the lower plate that is a plate-shaped device attached to the lining base member 6410 from below. One of the ball discharging device 6430 fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420 and the lower plate forming member 6420 being attached to the lining base member 6410 at the left end of the lining base member 6410 in a manner capable of preventing the lower plate forming member 6420 from coming off from the back side. , An intermediate holding member 6440 that is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side), and a V that is arranged on the upper part of the front side of the lining base member 6410 and is formed in a V shape from the front view from the resin material. Mainly includes a character design member 6450.

The lining foundation member 6410 has a main body portion 6411 formed in a substantially flat shape with a lower bottom surface and a substantially box shape with the back surface and the upper surface open, and a slight skeleton portion in the front-rear direction in the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through hole 6412 formed through the remaining hole 6412, and a projecting shape portion 6413 projecting downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the left-right center side of the main body portion 6411 with reference to the through hole 6412, and a protrusion thereof. On the back side of the shape portion 6413, a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness of the protrusion shape portion 6413 is substantially equal to other portions of the main body portion 6411 is mainly provided.

By configuring the recessed shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. Can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 exert a plurality of advantageous effects at a position where the operation device 10300 is held from below, and the details will be described later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the size of the bottom surface shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is formed to be much larger than the size of the bottom surface opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball pulling lever 52.

By forming the through hole 6412 in advance in this way, the ejection speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 can be adjusted to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the lining base member 6410. It is possible to correspond to the discharge speed of the ball.

That is, the ejection speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432. For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as that of the bottom opening 6432, the ejection speed of the ball is set to that. It cannot be made larger than this. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, the size of the bottom opening 6432 may be changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 may be changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412 ( (By changing the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430), the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the ball from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the lining base member 6410. In other words, the discharge rate (discharge mode) of the ball can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower plate unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

The demand for changing the ejection speed of the ball is not limited to the case where the playability of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a manner that requires the payout ball to be transferred to the Senryo box, and in a manner that does not require the payout ball to be transferred to the Senryo box (so-called "personal"). In the case of).

When it is necessary to transfer the payout ball to the Senryo box, if the ball is discharged at high speed, the ball may overflow from the Senryo box frequently, so the ball is designed to be discharged at a slower speed than the specified speed. It is desirable to be done.

In the present embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm], and is based on a comparison between the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a sphere shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]). The upper limit of the balls that can be ejected from the opening at the same time is limited to about 7.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the payout balls to the Senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the Senryo box, so that the upper limit of the desired ball ejection speed changes significantly in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the paid-out balls flow into the automatic counters arranged in each of the pachinko machines 10010. Therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, the balls are built in the automatic counters. The operating speed of the ball sink is illustrated.

As described above, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the ejection speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view, but there is a possibility that the strength of the main body portion 6411 is lowered. There is. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, so the size and arrangement of the through hole 6412 However, it may be limited to the extent that it can withstand the load during operation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the lining base member 6410 in a manner of compensating for the decrease in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the lines shown by the imaginary lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 as the fastening directions in a manner in which the lining base member 6410 is sandwiched from above and below. , The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the left and right long skeleton portions located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited in any way. For example, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 may be designed so that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 come into contact with each other before the fastening (arranged at the fastening preparation position). (See FIG. 233), there is a gap between the two before fastening, but the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw, and pressure may be applied.

Further, the portion to be pressed does not have to be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side portion in the vicinity of the projecting shape portion 6413) and the back side portion (a long plate portion arranged behind the through hole 6412) that may be impacted each time it is opened and closed. Since a large load is likely to occur, it is preferable to adopt a design mode that suppresses the load.

By sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 in this way, the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently secured, so that the bottom opening 6432 is formed. The bottom opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about the decrease in strength due to the above. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 in which the lower plate 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface, a discharge port 6422 opened vertically on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and a main body box portion. An L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting from the back side of the bottom surface of the 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from the bottom surface, and a ball discharging device 6430 projecting downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) the range surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 into which fastening screws are screwed, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge portion of the discharge port 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421. Mainly includes a plate-shaped support portion 6426 extending to the right from the right end portion of the above, and a flexible resin member 6427 mounted on the upper surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426.

The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position which is the front end portion and the right end portion of the lower plate 50. The upper surface of the bottom of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface in a manner of descending and inclining toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball flowing into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows down toward the discharge port 6422 and is discharged. Since the outlet 6422 is arranged on the front side close to the player, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 where a load from the operation device 10300 is likely to occur, and the effect of the strength decrease due to the formation of the through hole is considered. Therefore, the discharge port 6422 is combined with the ball discharge device 6430. The measures are taken by, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has a different protrusion length at the left and right positions, which corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, the lower plate 50 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the right, so that the upper surface of the lower bottom portion (through hole) of the main body portion 6411 is formed. In order to bring it into contact with the upper surface of the edge portion of 6412), it is necessary to shorten the protrusion length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 toward the right, which corresponds to this. As a result of this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end portion (lower end portion) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 (contacted by line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portion 6424 is formed at two locations on the front side end where a load from the player is likely to occur, and one on the back side end where a load is likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By preferentially providing the fastening points in the places where the load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the lower plate forming member 6420 from being displaced due to the fixing being displaced when the load is generated, while limiting the fastening points. ..

Further, since the fastening portion 6424 is arranged in the vicinity of the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body portion 6411 is separately provided even though the fastening portion 6424 is fastened inside the through hole 6412. It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge portion of the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410 (while fastening without forming in) (making it easier to maintain the relative position). Can be done). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 while eliminating the need to form through holes other than the through hole 6412.

The guide rib 6425 is also used for the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball pulling lever 52 and for the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is formed from a long plate shape on the left and right, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is required. Therefore, the ball pulling lever 52 is in the long direction. Since it slides in the left-right direction corresponding to the above, the movement guidance of the ball pulling lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 are preferably realized.

Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed in pairs as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Further, even if one is damaged, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so that the useful life of the lower plate unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible member having an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

The ball discharging device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-mentioned ball removing lever 52 is arranged, a circular bottom surface opening 6432 formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 that are arranged at positions that overlap with the fastening portion 6424 of 6420 and are tightened by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6424, and a rectangular frame shape that surrounds the fastening hole 6433. Mainly includes a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410.

The ball pulling lever 52 has a grip portion 52a projecting forward so that the player can operate it in a manner of sliding left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). A pair of rib-shaped portions that project upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extend along the left-right direction, and are guided by the guide rib 6425, and are provided with the guided ribs 52c. Is integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom surface opening 6432 is vertically opposed to the discharge port 6422 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between them. As described above, when the ball pulling lever 52 is not operated, the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432. Therefore, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined by the closing plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being lowered while adopting the configuration (arranged).

The details of the fastening mode of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 is provided with a flange portion 6431a that projects outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat side and both left and right sides) excluding the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is internally fitted into the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410 with a gap, and when the ball discharge device 6430 is fitted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the collar is fitted. The portion 6431a comes into contact with the lower surface portion of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that allows contact from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front-back and left-right directions, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is formed. , As described above, abuts in the vertical direction with the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

In this way, the ball discharge device 6430 can be positioned on the lining base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharge device 6430, and the balls are fastened after aligning the positions of the configurations. Each configuration can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening. Therefore, the assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the lining base member 6410 is inserted, and is formed through a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding from the front side and a metal main body portion 10014a (see FIG. 211). A portion where a screw to be inserted into a through hole to be formed is fastened and fixed, and a plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding from the back side and a portion that interferes with the left upper end portion of the lining foundation member 6410 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes an interference portion 6443 formed in a plate shape.

FIG. 226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. 226 and 227 show a state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from FIGS. 224 and 225.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is opened and the opening width is narrowed toward the center of the left and right, and the V-shaped main body portion 6451 is arranged downward toward the center of the left and right. A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the main body 6451, a positioning portion 6453 formed near the center of the lower edge of the main body 6451, and left and right of the main body 6451. It is formed by a plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 that are formed so as to extend to the back side near the end portion so that the fastening screw can be screwed in, and a plate shape that extends in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side portion of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right-side reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the elongated direction of the main body 6451 and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 on the left side of the main body 6451 are formed and aligned in the elongated direction of the main body 6451. Mainly provided with a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. As a result, it is possible to limit the places where a through hole is likely to be formed in order for a person who commits a fraudulent act to invade the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. That is, it is less difficult to make a through hole in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 than in the case of making a through hole in the V-shaped design member 6450, so that an illegal through hole is formed in the left front cover 10321 or It can be made to open in the right front cover 10322.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the points to be checked regularly to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the through hole is likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the check load can be reduced as compared with the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

The main body portion 6451 is formed of a thin wall, and is said to be flexible and deformable in the direction of narrowing the groove width (deflectable and deformable in a manner of being crushed up and down). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 fits with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, the vertical displacement that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated is transmitted through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Be transmitted. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 bends and deforms in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the groove of the main body 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 is caused by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

That is, at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 can be operated by deforming the V-shaped design member 6450 and then transmitted to the downstream side (for example, the lining foundation member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the displacement amount of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 by the operation can be suppressed. Or, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 is a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with reference to the center of the left and right, and a plate-shaped protruding portion protruding toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. Mainly equipped with 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion fixed to the lining foundation member 6410 by screwing the fastening screw into the recess formed on the front side with the fastening portion of the lining foundation member 6410 inserted from the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in a manner approaching from the back side of the lining foundation member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 226 and 227).

It should be noted that at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6452) is invisible in the lower plate forming member 6420 in the insertion direction view of the fastening screw (FIG. 230 (b)). That is, in the state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the lining foundation member 6410, the fastening screw inserted into at least a part of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the lining foundation member 6410 to the V-shaped design member Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a pre-stage for disassembling the 6450, the number of man-hours required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is bored in the front side vertically elongated portion 6426c described later in the front-rear direction, and a fastening screw screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted, and the fastening screw is inserted to the lower right fastening portion 6453L. It is provided with an insertion portion 6426c1 to be fixed with. In addition, the operating device 10300 is arranged so as to shield the insertion portion 6426c1 from the rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, on the premise of disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from the shielding position. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the required man-hours such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to illegally remove the V-shaped design member 6450 and suppress fraudulent acts that enter the inside through the created gap.

The plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R abuts on the upper surface of the front vertical portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R.

As a result, for example, even when the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) and the fitting portion 6426d of the operating device 10300 are applied. The front side portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the ascending direction as the operating device 10300 is displaced in the ascending direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, the ascending displacement of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed.

The left and right overhanging fastening portions 6454 are portions where fastening screws to be inserted into a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed in, and the fastening position is , The back side (the side close to the metal main body 10014a) from the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L.

The right-side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left-side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin-walled shape that can be bent and deformed by themselves to transmit displacement downstream by their own deformation. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing the above. As shown in FIG. 227, the left side reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged more densely than the right side reinforcing rib 6455. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib 6456. In addition, in FIG. 228 (a) and FIG. 228 (b), the cross section in the plane which divides the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 in the thickness direction is shown. Further, while the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have a common thickness, they are designed so as to change the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction in accordance with the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right side reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a joint portion to be coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. A mode in which the distance between the 6455a and the upper facing portion 6455b, which is arranged parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, increases toward the back side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. Mainly includes a lower facing portion 6455c, which is arranged so as to face each other in a manner inclined by.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion in which the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point, and the load can be distributed in the front-rear position. As a result, the load capacity of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and it is possible to prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, the generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower facing portion 6455c is reinforced on the right side because the separation width from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 becomes longer toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the back side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to increase). It is possible to increase the allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself, and it is possible to avoid collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 when the displacement occurs.

Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the displacement and the load transmitted via the right front cover 10322 to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the downstream side (lower right side) of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322, but the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member for operation. It is possible to reduce the rate at which the load, displacement, and vibration associated with the operation and drive of the device 10300 are transmitted to the operation handle 51. As a result, it is possible to ensure the playability that the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left side reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a joint portion to be coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. The 6456a, the upper facing portion 6456b which is arranged parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and the overhanging portion 6456c which projects toward the back side from the back side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower facing portion 6456d which is arranged parallel to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap, and is mainly provided.

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion in which the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point, and the load can be distributed in the front-rear position. As a result, the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and it is possible to prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, the generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The overhanging portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that inclines in a direction (downward) away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the back surface side. As a result, the overhanging portion 6456c is not formed as a portion that always abuts on the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that abuts only when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhanging portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement when the displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

The upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at a surface position with the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front-rear position where the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the back covering portion 10014b when the back covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower facing portion and the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. Is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 abut on the back covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed and the amount of downward displacement of the back covering portion 10014b can be reduced. ..

As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower plate 50 (the space where the balls are stored and which the player may touch) becomes. It can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the back covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, but the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back covering portion 10014b. Can be suppressed. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate an abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged on the right reinforcing ribs as compared to the 6455 placement intervals. Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load. In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand that touches the ball stored in the upper plate 17 arranged on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load is likely to be uneven on the left and right sides. By arranging them in a row, it is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by making the right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 different in shape, it is possible to cope with loads of different modes. That is, in the right-side reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to block the transmission of the load, thereby causing a momentary load or impact via the operating device 10300. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 distributes and supports the load so that the weight is applied to the back through the upper plate 17 for a long time. It is possible to prevent the lining portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to correspond to the mode of the load which tends to be a problem.

229 (a) is a top view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower plate unit. It is a left side view in the arrow R direction view of 6400.

As shown in FIGS. 229 (a) and 230 (b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the concave shape portion 6414 of the lining base member 6410 to the left and right. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed on the upper surface of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 in a surface contact manner, while being arranged away from the recessed shape portion 6414. The details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 will be described below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are portions of a portion that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface in the same manner as the deformation when a part of the main body portion 6411 of the lining base member 6410 is pressed from above. It is a part that constitutes the front and back, and the shape of one of the front and back and the shape of the other are similar. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 in the lower surface view and the inner shape of the concave shape portion 6414 in the upper view are formed as a shape whose scale is changed by the amount that can secure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411. To. Therefore, from one shape, the other shape can be easily imagined.

As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the width of the projecting shape portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the protruding shape portion The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are large. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a manner of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, which will be described in detail later.

Here, in a game-playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be displaced up and down as the player operates the operation device 10300. In relation to this displacement, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are formed of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410. Shavings may be generated due to collision or rubbing.

When shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, shavings may enter the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, resulting in malfunction, or shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor and induce erroneous detection. It is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings because it is possible to do so.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings or reduce the amount of shavings generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414, so that the main body portion 6411 It is possible to eliminate the displacement of other parts such as.

On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member. Since it is converted into a deformation of 6450, it is possible to eliminate the need for displacement of other parts such as the main body portion 6411.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the main body 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 is on the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that rises and inclines toward. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is often placed on a concrete or flooring floor in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt on the floor adheres to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body 6411 is difficult to see from the player, it is preferable to avoid dirt from adhering to the product as long as it is a product.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the front side. When the shape portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is created between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, the portion that comes into contact with the floor surface and adheres to dirt is limited to the protrusion shape portion 6413. can do. Therefore, when the front frame 10014 is installed in a playable state, the game store side only needs to wipe off the dirt on the projecting shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. ..

In addition, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hooking portion on which a finger is hung when carrying the front frame 10014. In the past, the lower plate portion was placed in the center of the left and right sides of the front plate, so it is easy to hook the lower plate portion and lift the front frame and assemble it to the back frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, since the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left side (opening / closing shaft side) in the left-right direction, it is difficult to lift and assemble the front frame 10014 by hooking a hand on the lower plate 50. It is said that it has a similar structure.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking a hand on the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the root side of the operation handle 41, so that the operation handle 51 may be damaged. Is not preferable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the projecting shape portion 6413, which also functions as a finger hook portion, is arranged at the left and right center positions so that it can be recommended to hook a hand on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400 to lift the front frame 10014. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the back frame by hooking his / her hand on the projecting shape portion 6413 to lift the front frame 10014 and axially supporting the front frame 10014 to the back frame.

Then, by setting the work procedure to wipe off the dirt before and after the time when the finger is hung, it is possible to make the operator aware of the part requiring the wiping of the dirt in relation to the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to wipe off the dirt.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is not excessive or deficient according to the amount of deformation expected in the protruding shape portion 6413. More specifically, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body portion 6411, the gap between the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface becomes larger toward the front side, which is formed wider as the protruding shape portion 6413 faces the front side. It corresponds to the increase in the amount of deformation (deflection amount) due to the load.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, even if the projecting shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014, it is easy to secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor. Can be done. On the other hand, when the projecting shape portion 6413 bends and deforms to the limit and the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 can easily come into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body 6411.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is heavier than expected or the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is overloaded, a part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on the floor.

Further, it is said that the deformable amount is formed larger toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413. It works well even during the game execution. For example, when exchanging the Senryo box, a clerk at a game store slides the Senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. At this time, the Senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are moved. May collide. If the impact or load due to this collision is accumulated in the constituent members as fatigue, the constituent members will be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable amount of the projecting shape portion 6413 increases toward the front side where it easily collides with the Senryo box. Therefore, the impact and load due to the collision with the Senryo box can be easily released by deformation (deflection deformation), and the destruction of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable playing environment for the player.

Further, on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the Senryo box and the main body portion 6411 collide with each other on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413 when the Senryo box is replaced. As a result, the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 is damaged can be reduced, so that it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable playing environment for the player.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 are shown, and the outer shapes of the other operating devices 10300 are schematically shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b) of the V-shaped design member 6450 (FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (FIG. 228)). b) Supported by)).

Since the main body 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the rear and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body 6451, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 Is directed in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component for returning the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left and right center. For example, the restoring force of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 from the bending deformation is directed upward and obliquely.

As a result, it is possible to deal with not only the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement. For example, as in the present embodiment, even when the moving direction of the operating portion of the operating device 10300 (for example, the swinging operating member 10310) does not have a left-right component, the downward load given by the player is left-right. It may have a directional component, and when such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can cope with the displacement of the operating device 10300 in the left-right direction by bending and deforming based on its own curved shape (absorbing the displacement in the left-right direction or using the restoring force). (The arrangement of the operating device 10300 can be returned), and further, the reaction forces from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are directed upward and toward the center of the left and right, so that the operating device 10300 can be returned to the position before the displacement at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design (see FIG. 207) of the front frame 10014 in the front view.

233 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa of FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (b) is a lower plate unit 6400 in line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the vicinity of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in the assembled state of the lower plate unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is a protrusion of the lower plate forming member 6420 (the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 on the back surface side portion). It is pressed against the end portion (lower end portion)) and the ball discharge device 6430 (flame portion 6431a). As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that allows contact from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224) in the front-back and left-right directions, and is L-shaped. As described above, the lower end portion of the plate portion 6423 comes into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233 (c)). As a result, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, since the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 when not operated, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined by the closing plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being lowered while adopting the configuration (arranged).

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width becomes wider and the recessed depth increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed so as to be more easily bent toward the front side.

As a result, it is possible to impart sufficient bending performance to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 tends to be large, so that when the operation device 10300 is operated, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lining foundation member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) by the load. This will be described in detail.

As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. The operation timing and operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player is made to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification, and has a role of drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is stopped and controlled at the initial position from the start of the game to the execution of a specific reach effect (see FIG. 215 (a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, the player executes a push operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 for an operation for a notification (notification such as "press a button!") That prompts an operation in the display effect, a stage switching, and the like. To. Therefore, most of the load generated by the operation is the load generated when the lens member 10317 is pushed in and operated, and the load is along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215 (a)). Since the frequency of notifications is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load is high.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is driven and controlled so as to displace the swing operation member 10310 up and down. For example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at a downward position. The notification prompting the operation is executed in the state (see FIG. 215 (b)).

In this case, the operation direction is the direction Y17b (see FIG. 215 (b)) that is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position, and is in that direction Y17b. A load is generated along the line. Since the notification is generated only when a specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is widened toward the front side and the recessed depth is increased. Therefore, the load is increased toward the front side. It is formed so that the corresponding performance of is high.

That is, as compared with the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, it can be configured to cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of the load in an appropriate place, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It is possible to easily avoid being easily damaged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since both the side closer to the player and the side where the load is frequently generated during operation are the front side, the concave shape portion 6414 is wide enough toward the front side. , But not necessarily limited to this, although it was formed in the deep bottom. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of occurrence of the load during the operation is reversed. In this case, the concave shape is widened toward the back side. By forming it on the deep bottom, it is possible to configure it so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of load occurrence at the right place compared to the case where it has a common shape in the front-back direction, and it deforms too much due to the applied load. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem or the fragility due to insufficient deformation.

As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b hits the main body portion 6411 vertically at a position on the left and right outer sides of both left and right width ends of the recessed shape portion 6414. Get in touch.

As a result, the ratio of the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 to the recessed shape portion 6414 can be reduced as compared with the case where the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b abuts on the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the recessed shape portion 6414 from being damaged by the load when operating the operation device 10300.

Further, as a response to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the bending of the plate-shaped portion from the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is used. Therefore, the load capacity can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and the left and right and trailing edge portions of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. A vertically long portion on the front side that is formed to be taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a by being coupled to the front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b that hangs down in a plate shape. It mainly includes a 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d extending from the front side vertically elongated portion 6426c to the back side and being fitted with the operation device 10300. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are appropriately referred to.

The flat plate-shaped portion 6426a is formed to be wider than the left-right width of the recessed shape portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. A hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the lining base member 6410 (between the upper and lower sides). That is, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a does not abut on the main body portion 6411, but the extended end portion of the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b formed in a U-shape when viewed from the bottom (see FIG. 225) abuts on the main body portion 6411. , The position of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a with respect to the lining foundation member 6410 is determined.

As described above, since the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are formed in a box shape with an open lower portion instead of a block shape, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. It is composed. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed with respect to the load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion The 6426b can also be flexed and deformed, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the lining base member 6410 (main body portion 6411, protruding shape portion 6413, and concave shape portion 6414) arranged below the operating device 10300 can be formed. It can be further prevented from being damaged.

The hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b extends to the upper surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend until it enters the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, a space is formed between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shaped portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in FIG. 234). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shaped portion 6414 also serves as a drainage. For example, even when the liquid has infiltrated through the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted through the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be infiltrated into the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid infiltrating behind. Thereby, the infiltration of the liquid can be easily stopped by the front frame 10014.

The front vertically elongated portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operating device 10300 by the fitting portion 6426d extending to the back side, and the lower portion on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load given to the operation device 10300 by the player can be distributed not only to the main body 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load given to each configuration can be weakened. it can.

Further, a space is also formed between the vertically elongated portion 6426c on the front side and the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the vertically elongated portion 6426c on the front side and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drainage. For example, even when the liquid has infiltrated through the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted through the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be infiltrated into the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid infiltrating behind. Thereby, the infiltration of the liquid can be easily stopped by the front frame 10014.

The fitting portion 6426d is formed in a laterally long shape so as to be matable with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to the lower surface and the front side vertically elongated portion 6426c formed on the extension base end side.

Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can withstand even when a load is applied to displace the operating device 10300 downward. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

Here, the operating member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load associated with the operation and vibration of the player's operation member 10300 is transmitted to the plate-shaped support portion 6426 via the resin member, and is transmitted to the lining foundation member 6410 arranged downstream thereof, where the plate-like shape is transmitted. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear in the direction of the load transmitted from the operating member 10300 to the main body 6411. The component of the direction can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur when the load generated from the operating device 10300 is transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, which affects the flow mode of the launched ball, or the board is cracked due to the load transmitted to the board boxes 100 to 104 and the electronic board. Can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the upper effect device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In addition, in FIGS. 235 and 236, the above-mentioned lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are not shown, and the upper effect device 6500 is shown in a state where the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper effect device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the sound device 6610 arranged in pairs on the left and right, and has an illumination substrate 6570 in which light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. , Each component that acts as an intermediary for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (leaf spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the direction of separation from the metal main body 10014a is arranged on the back surface side of the upper effect device 6500. As a result, the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the upper effect device 6500 to the metal main body 10014a can be increased (stable fastening and fixing).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper effect device 6500. In addition, in FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled upward is shown.

The upper effect device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, a front side unit 6520 to 6550 that occupies a front side portion below the upper lid member 6510, and a rear side unit 6560 to arranged behind the front side unit 6520 to 6550. Mainly equipped with 6580.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper effect device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate formed as a semi-elliptical plate-shaped portion obtained by dividing a long ellipse on the left and right into front and back. A plurality of insertion holes 6512 formed up and down near the front side edge portion of the main body plate portion 6511 so that fastening screws can be inserted, and extending downward from the back side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A female screw hole is formed from the back surface of the extension tip, and a plurality of fastening portions 6513 are mainly provided so as to be able to fasten a fastening screw to be inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a into the female screw hole.

The back surface side portion of the upper lid member 6510 from which the fastening portion 6513 extends is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and the other constituent members of the upper effect device 6500 are supported by the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6512. That is, the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 can be utilized to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper effect device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 is provided with a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in such a manner that it tilts forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged so as to face the front surface of the plate on which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513 and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the expanding rib 419a), the upper lid member 6510 has the sound device 6610 and the metal body portion 10014a. It can be prevented from coming off from.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and a concave-convex shape portion 6514 formed in a manner of projecting downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. With this uneven shape portion 6514, it is possible to increase the force that resists the load in the direction perpendicular to the plane (maintaining the shape) as compared with the case where the upper lid member 6510 having the same thickness is composed of a plate-shaped member having a smooth surface. Can be made easier).

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper effect device 6500. In addition, in FIG. 239 and FIG. 240, the illustration of the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is omitted, and the state in which the front side units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear side units 6560 to 6580 is shown. In the present embodiment, the upper effect device 6500 is moved by moving the front unit 6520 to 6550 in the front diagonally downward direction (the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed and the direction along which the surface is aligned) with respect to the rear unit 6560 to 6580. Can be disassembled, but details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the front unit 6520 to 6550 has a role of receiving, refracting, or transmitting light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED, and the rear unit 6560 to 6580 emits light of an LED or the like. It has a role as a means and a role of supporting an illuminated substrate on which a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

241 (a) is a front view of the rear unit 6560 to 6580, FIG. 241 (b) is a front view of the illuminated substrate 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective of the rear unit 6560 to 6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear unit 6560 to 6580 includes a partition member 6560 formed in a manner of partitioning the internal space into a plurality of parts in a front view, and a plurality of LEDs for irradiating the partition member 6560 with light. A pair of the illuminated substrate 6570 to be arranged and the partition member 6560 are laminated and arranged on the back side, and are arranged with a slight gap from the illuminated substrate 6570 in the internal region of the outer shape, and are surface-supported in the outer shape portion. Mainly includes a back support member 6580 and.

It should be noted that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap. Means that.

The partition member 6560 is arranged so as to be close to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570 and face each other, and is configured to partition the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570 from the vicinity of the illuminated substrate 6570. To. By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each section, and the light emission mode of the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 is significantly different. However, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

The partition member 6560 has a facing plate portion 6651 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed in the left and right central portions of the facing plate portion 6651, and a hole in the left and right lower portions of the facing plate portion 6651. A left-right light hole 6563 to be provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted into the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the facing plate portion 6651. , A rectangular tubular shape that surrounds the central light hole 6562 and extends to the front side of the facing plate portion 6651, and a long tubular portion that surrounds the left and right light holes 6563 to the front side of the facing plate portion 6651. A plate-shaped connection formed from an extended left and right tubular portion 6567 and a T-shaped plate-shaped portion in front view, and connecting the opposing plate portion 6651, the central tubular portion 6566, and the left and right tubular portions 6567 on the front side of the opposing plate portion 6651. Mainly includes a unit 6568.

The facing plate portion 6651 includes flange portions 6651a to 6651c that project from the upper edge portion to the back surface side in a long left-right shape. The first flange portion 6651a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6651b is formed in pairs on the left and right, and extends from a position where a cut is made from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6651a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564. The third flange portion 6651c is formed in pairs on the left and right sides, and extends from a position opposite to the end portion of the second flange portion 6651b with the fastening portion 6564 in between to the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the plate-shaped joint portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c has a role as a shielding plate for preventing light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570, and the cut thereof is arranged at least on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is configured in a place where the light emitted from the LED is less likely to leak. In other words, even if light is incident from the outside, the light is hard to be mixed with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange portion 6651a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a position between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563, and the LED is intentionally placed on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is a break where it is not placed. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

The cut between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at a place where the fastening portion 6564 is arranged, and the place where the alternative portion that blocks light is arranged is taken as the cut. It was done. That is, even if the light travels to the cut, the light that is about to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that the occurrence of the event that the light leaks from the cut can be suppressed.

Here, the flange portions 6651a to 6651c can be configured as a series of seamless portions, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c cannot be sufficiently secured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. (Assuming a downward load applied to a member arranged in front of the partition member 6560, a load given by gravity or a player), it is necessary to counteract only by the force generated by the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fastening portion 6564. Occurs. In the present embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the illuminated substrate 6570 decreases, which limits the places where the LEDs can be arranged. This will reduce the design freedom of the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6651a to 6651c into lengths that can secure the rigidity, it is possible to counter the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 with the rigidity of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, the work man-hours can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the illuminated substrate 6570 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length in the long direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6651c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the upper effect device 6500 is formed from a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left-right center in the top view (see FIG. 237). In general, the load given by the player (for example, the hanging load) is applied at the front end of the upper effect device 6500, so that the load given by the player at the left and right center of the upper effect device 6500 is maximum. And gradually becomes smaller as it approaches the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6651c are intentionally made to have different lengths. More specifically, the left-right length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right sides of the first flange portion 6561a is longer than the left-right length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximized. Further, the third flange portion 6651c arranged on the left and right sides thereof is longer than the left and right length of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left-right length is the shortest in the left-right center portion, and gradually increases as it approaches the left-right end portion. As a result, a counterforce can be generated without excess or deficiency in the load applied to the upper effect device 6500.

As a result, deformation and displacement of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 can be stably maintained. The maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case where the force for holding the illuminated substrate 6570 is reduced due to the deformation or displacement in the separation direction to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being displaced, and the deformation in the approaching direction is not limited. This also includes the case where a load in the compression direction is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 due to displacement or displacement to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being destroyed or deformed.

The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563 are a plurality of through holes formed corresponding to the LED pattern arranged on the illumination substrate 6570. The central light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes sized to surround a plurality of LEDs. ..

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed so as to project toward the back side of the fastening portion 6564. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion extending to the front side in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a in which a fastening screw can be inserted at the bottom of the tip. A fastening screw that passes through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the insertion hole 6565a from the back surface side, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to the partition unit 6540 described later. With this configuration, the step of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear unit 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240). it can.

The central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear end portions of the front unit 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 is incident on the front unit 6520 to 6550.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 is a portion in which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper effect device 6500, and the central tubular portion 6566. The upper surface is arranged at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. As a result, since the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 takes charge of the load prior to the central cylinder portion 6566, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylinder portion 6566, and the central cylinder portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. It is possible to easily avoid such a situation.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 is extended downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right tubular portions 6567. As a result, when the load is transmitted to the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portions reaching the left and right tubular portions 6567 also counteracts the load. can do. In this case, since the plate-shaped portion is formed, a counterforce can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-shaped portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right tubular portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The illuminated circuit board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and is a portion to be bored or cut out in a plate-shaped substrate portion 6571 and the substrate portion 6571, and is a fastening portion through which the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted. The insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 formed in the substrate portion 6571 and through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of LEDs arranged in the left and right central portions of the substrate portion 6571 (FIG. 241 It is formed of a first illumination unit 6574 formed from (shown by a uniform rectangle in b) and a plurality of LEDs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illumination unit 6574, and is formed at the vertical center of the substrate unit 6571. A second lighting unit 6575 arranged near the unit, a third lighting unit 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate unit 6571, and a connector 6577 connecting electrical wiring (not shown). Mainly prepare.

As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction, and is relative to the partition member 6560. It is arranged according to the positional relationship. That is, the first illumination unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second illumination unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third illumination unit 6576 is under the partition member 6560. Each is placed below the edge. As a result, each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area partitioned by the partition member 6560. The first illumination unit 6574 and the second illumination unit 6575 illuminate the inner region of the partition member 6560, whereas the third illumination unit 6576 illuminates the outer region of the partition member 6560.

The third illumination unit 6576 is shown so as to be partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in the front view. As will be described later, since the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 travels diagonally downward by the light receiving member 6558, it is necessary to avoid a situation in which the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is blocked by the partition member 6560. As a result, the third illumination unit 6576 and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to overlap at least partially in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the substrate portion 6571 is designed so that the fastening force at the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 does not act on the fastening insertion portion 6572. That is, the illuminated substrate 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed from a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval) when viewed from the front. As a result, the assembly efficiency can be improved, and the details will be described later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, is a pair of members having substantially symmetrical shapes with each other, and is a front plate portion 6581 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6570 and its front. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the back side, and a front plate. A pair of rear box portions 6584, which is connected to the left and right edges of the portion 6581 (the edge opposite to the opposite side of the pair of members) and the lower edge portion and is formed in a box shape and is opened to the back side. A box-shaped lower surface box portion 6585 having a smooth upper surface and being opened downward on the side close to the rear surface box portion 6584 on the mating side, which is a portion of the portion 6584, and the lower surface box portion 6585 and the front plate portion thereof. A plate-shaped portion connected to the 6581 and facing the mating member (back support member 6580) and facing the facing plate portion 6586, and a cut penetrating vertically between the facing plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. It mainly includes a notch portion 6587 which is a notch.

The front plate portion 6581 is a plurality of fastening supports composed of an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A through hole formed from a portion 6581a and a vertically long oval shape having a width slightly longer than the diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560, and is arranged at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front-rear direction. A plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly bored in the lower edge portion forming the boundary between the plurality of positioning holes 6581b and the rear box portion 6584 and capable of inserting fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front unit 6520 to 6550, and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c thereof. Similar to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of positioning elongated holes 6581d formed in a long hole shape along the lower edge portion forming the boundary with the rear box portion 6584 and used for positioning the front unit 6520 to 6550, and an electric wire. It is mainly provided with a wiring hole 6581e, which is formed at a position corresponding to the connector 6577 of the decorative substrate 6570 and allows electrical wiring to pass in the front-rear direction.

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes a minor diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560, while the outer width in the left-right direction is 6570. It is made longer than the left-right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted inside the oval rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the illuminated substrate 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the oval rib. (See FIG. 244 (a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front unit 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front unit 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the direction of inclination in which the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination. (See FIG. 247).

As a result, it becomes easier to avoid interference between the front unit 6520 to 6550 and the illuminated substrate 6570 as compared with the case where the opening is made in the front-rear direction, and the positions of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are moved closer to the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed with the same size, a wide arrangement area of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be secured, and when the illuminated substrate 6570 is formed with the same size. The area where the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (a load in the hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion for suppressing the forward tilt of the partition member 6560.

The upper plate portion 6583 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be matable with the fastening portion 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is formed in a rectangular shape in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513) with the upper and rear sides open.

The rear box portion 6584 includes an overhanging portion 6584a that projects toward the front side of the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmission portion 6584b made of punching metal that is covered with an opening formed in the overhanging portion 6584a, and a right member. The light receiving portion 6584c formed from the light transmitting member arranged at the right end portion of the overhanging portion 6584a, and the light receiving portion 6584c arranged at the position closest to the center of the upper end portion (the position closer to the front plate portion 6581), and are in an assembled state. (See FIG. 207), the pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed so as to generate an urging force in the direction of repulsion from the metal main body 10014a and the insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are inserted. It mainly includes a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which the fastening screws are fastened.

The overhanging portion 6584a has an upper edge portion formed from a shape that follows the shape of the lower edge of the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 241), and the upper surface thereof constitutes a guide surface that guides the front unit 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission unit 6584b is a portion through which a sound wave generated from the sound device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. The sound transmission unit 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating film 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the audio device 6610.

The light receiving unit 6584c is a portion that receives light emitted from the lighting unit 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED arranged in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014 and shows the player as a light emitting effect. Is. In this embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a manner different from that of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, while the light emitting effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed at the time of the variation effect having a high probability of occurrence, the normal variation effect and reach effect, the demonstration effect, etc., the light emission effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a probability of occurrence. It is executed when an extremely low and extremely advantageous effect is generated for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c.

The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion through which the front unit 6520 to 6550 enters from the lower side, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted from the back side is fastened to the metal main body portion 10014a.

The cutout portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from an exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is bored up and down on the lower surface of the left and right central portion (the portion farthest from the vibrating film 6611) of the acoustic device 6610. To form. That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by the support plate portion 10014d supporting the back side of the sound device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as a sound toward the back side due to the vibration of the diaphragm 6611, as opposed to a sound output toward the front side due to the vibration of the vibration film 6611. This is the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 to the outside through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex type speaker). By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, it is possible to simultaneously generate sounds having different tones.

244 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241. FIG. 244 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the CCXLIVb of FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 in the −CCXLIVb line, and FIG. 245 (a) shows the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 6570, a partial cross-sectional view of the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610, FIG. 245 (b) shows the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. 241. It is a partial cross-sectional view, and FIG. 246 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241. FIG. 246 (b). Is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. 241.

In addition, in FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is enlarged and shown. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. As a result, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the illuminated substrate 6570 (vibration width) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. ..

As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), the fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6580a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the illuminated substrate 6570 sandwiched therein. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, in the illuminated substrate 6570, the fastening insertion portion 657 is only aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening portion.

Further, while the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a abuts on the back surface of the illuminated substrate 6570, the partition member 6560 is separated from the illuminated substrate 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is not sandwiched in the front-rear position, the illuminated substrate 6570 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilt displacement).

Further, the lower edge portion of the illuminated substrate 6570 is not supported by the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This also applies to FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape to such an extent that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244 (a)). It will be described that the forming in this way facilitates the assembly of the partition member 6560 to the back surface support member 6580.

As in the conventional case, for example, when the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564, the partition member 6560 is positioned vertically and horizontally with respect to the back support member 6580. Will need to be assembled.

However, in the present embodiment, since the illumination board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, the back support member 6580 of the illumination board 6570 is assembled when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align with the above, which may make the work difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ribs and the positioning holes 6581b of the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, and the fastening support portion 6581a have a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Since it is formed by, it can be assembled even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

As an example of the assembly order, first, the illuminated substrate 6570 is attached to the compartment member 6560 so that the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the compartment member 6560 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570. At this time, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 does not have to be determined in the long direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be an arbitrary position.

In the present embodiment, the flange portions 6651a to 6651c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illuminated substrate 6570, so that when the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled to the compartment member 6560, the compartment member of the illuminated substrate 6570 The misalignment with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not have to be determined in the elongated direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be an arbitrary position. That is, rough positioning (for example, positioning such that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242) and positioning with a sufficiently long allowable width in the vertical direction) may be performed. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved with respect to the back support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, screw in the fastening screw (see FIG. 244 (a)).

In this state, even if the position of the illuminated substrate 5670 is displaced, the partition member 6560 is lowered to a position where the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)) by its own weight. And aligned with the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged non-fixed between the partition member 6560 and the back support member, and it is generally easy to have difficulty in aligning the illuminated substrate 6570. By forming the ribs and the positioning holes 6581b of the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, and the fastening support portion 6581a in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape), although it is an assembly mode. , Assembling efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is misaligned, it is configured to be corrected to the original position by its own weight. Therefore, due to the misalignment of the illumination board 5670, the effect of the light emitting effect during the game is maintained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

The expansion hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). The central light hole 6562 is arranged in an inverted T shape at the left and right central portions (arranged at four locations, see FIG. 241), and is arranged in a substantially gourd shape (approximately pot shape) on the outer side thereof. It is mainly provided with a direct entry hole 6562b (arranged at eight locations, see FIG. 241). The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later in FIG. 263.

The expansion hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole through which the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined so that the opposite distance increases toward the direction.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be defined. That is, the way the light is shown to the player can be changed depending on the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion raised toward the front side of the expansion hole 6562a is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closed portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). As a result, the light that has passed through the expansion hole 6562a can be incident on the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521 without leaking.

FIG. 246 (a) shows the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246 (b) shows the positioning slot 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the front side units 6520 to 6550 are formed from the rear side units 6560 to the rear side units 6560 to along the inclination direction. It is assembled to 6580 and fastened and fixed.

Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved as compared with the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the illumination substrate 6570 can be positioned so as to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the illumination substrate 6570 can be secured. .. On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front unit 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the audio device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed on the left and right outer sides where the vibration film 6611 of the speaker is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the front side. It can be formed (see FIGS. 235 and 246).

As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning slot 6581d incline downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. The reason why it is formed (not inclined) along the above is that the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in the back support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a. In the present embodiment, since the pulling direction is set in the same front-rear direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a, the shapes of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are distorted. It is formed in (a shape whose shape changes depending on the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back surface side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated by fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the wall thickness of the upper edge of the portion to which the load is applied due to fastening is thinned toward the center of the hole, so that the load is imbalanced between the upper edge and the rest. Is likely to occur, and the fastening screw may loosen depending on the usage condition and the number of years of use.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be adopted, but the difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points results in high cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening points in question, the cost will increase due to the inability to make the fastening screw a common part, while the fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, which will lead to high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is arranged so as to face each other across the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in a recessed shape in the front wall 6620 ( It includes a retaining plate portion 6621 that is a part of the portion (concave formed) and is formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion on which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area in which the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the back support member 6580. Further, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, further progress of the fastening screw is restricted and the fastening screw is prevented from falling out. Can be prevented.

When the fastening screw is not loose, the retaining plate portion 6621 is formed with a size that is slightly spaced from the head of the screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when the sound is output from the sound device 6610, the vibration of the sound device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit from 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

Further, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 that are recessed at the back position of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoidance recess 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) to such an extent that contact with the head of the fastening screw can be avoided (a slight gap between the contact avoiding recess 6622). It is recessed in the dimension that can be

As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. Further, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same front-rear direction as the resin die punching direction, the wall thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, which is sufficient. Fastening force can be generated. Therefore, it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a will loosen, but if the fastening screw loosens, the same function as the retaining plate portion 6621 described above can be avoided from contact. It can be generated in the recess 6622.

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when the sound is output from the sound device 6610, the vibration of the sound device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit from 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, the fastening screw is configured so that the transmission of vibration generated by the contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw can be grasped. It is possible to notice the occurrence of looseness, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the fastening screw is left loose.

For example, it is exemplified that the transmission of vibration is configured to generate an abnormal noise or the vibration is detected.

As described with reference to FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged close to the back support member 6580, while being arranged without being fixed to the back support member 6580. Will be done. As a result, the acoustic device 6610 and the illumination board 6570 can be arranged close to each other with the back support member 6580 in between, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illumination board 6570 for illumination. It is possible to prevent the substrate 6570 from cracking.

Here, the partition member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position other than the effect portion (that is, the illumination unit 6574 to 6576) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and the ratio of the effect portion on the surface of the illuminated substrate 6570 is determined. For the purpose of ensuring a large size, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

Therefore, the problem that the partition member 6560 is likely to be insufficiently fixed is likely to occur, and without countermeasures, the partition member 6560 may transmit the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580, and the partition member 6610 may be transmitted. When the 6560 vibrates, the effect of the effect may be poor, the fastening portion may be loosened, or the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partition member 6560 is fixed from another direction to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560. On the other hand, it will be described with reference to FIG. 247.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper effect device 6500. In FIG. 247, the fastening location, the fastening direction, and the fastening direction of each component of the upper effect device 6500 are schematically shown. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the upper effect device 6500 is configured such that the front and lower surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580 are surrounded by the front units 6520 to 6550, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper lid member 6510. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front unit 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In the present embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted via the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is in the thickness direction (see FIG. 238). Easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction).

Along with this displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the center of the front and rear, the distance between the front and rear of the insertion holes 6512 formed apart from the front and back is shortened. As a result, a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the back surface side is generated, and a compression load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

That is, since the partition member 6560 can be sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 to apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. Can be done.

Here, even if the width in the front-rear direction of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, when the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displacement to the side away from the partition member 6560), the partition unit 6540 gives the partition member 6560. The load applied is likely to be insufficient, and the action of suppressing the vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the compartment unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the guided unit 6550, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the compartment unit 6540 from being displaced to the front side. As a result, the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 can be sufficiently secured.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254 (a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 The transmission direction of the vibration can be set to be along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

As a result, the bending deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening points can be suppressed from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even when the vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

By devising the fastening points as shown in FIG. 247, the illuminated substrate 6570 is placed close to the acoustic device 6610, which is prone to vibration, in a non-fixed state, thereby preventing damage to the illuminated substrate 6570. It is possible to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560 by transmitting the vibration to the partition member 6560 that prevents the illuminated substrate 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by an allowable amount or more.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintaining performance of the upper effect device 6500 while improving the durability of the illumination substrate 6570 arranged close to the audio device 6610.

Further, one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment is to correspond to the displacement amount of the upper lid member 6510. That is, since the upper lid member 6510 has a configuration in which the back surface side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in a thin plate shape in the front-rear direction, the upper lid member 6510 is likely to be curved and displaced in a manner in which the displacement amount on the front surface side is larger than that on the back surface side. It is for that.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end portion of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the radius of curvature is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 starting from the back end portion due to the shape of the upper lid member 6510. Can be curved and displaced at. In this case, the upper lid member 6510 itself is given a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members arranged below it are given a compressive load.

Since the direction of this compression load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the displacement amount increases (toward the front side), it is relative to the front-rear direction. It will follow the direction of downward inclination toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction that is downwardly inclined toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. Therefore, the fastening direction of the fastening screw and the upper lid It is possible to bring the direction of the compression load generated by the displacement of the member 6510 closer to that of the member 6510.

As a result, in addition to being able to sufficiently generate a resistance force against the compression load at the fastening position, the component of the compression load applied in the direction in which the fastening screw is sheared (the direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) becomes small, so that the fastening screw breaks. Can be suppressed.

The fastening screws that form the fastening direction in the direction of downward inclination toward the front side are used for fastening the plate guide unit 6550, and the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the lower side and the back side of the illuminated substrate 6570. (See screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246 (a)). In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced. Therefore, the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the displacement allowance of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, even if the illuminated substrate 6570 is displaced, if the displacement amount becomes excessive, the excessive displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be regulated by making it possible to contact the plate guide unit 6550.

Further, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the illuminated substrate 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration source.

In the present embodiment, the fastening portions (fastening support portion 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left and right center sides (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction descends toward the front side. Fastening portions (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the direction of inclination are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not arranged in close proximity to each other.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation (displacement) generated on one fastening portion on the other fastening portion. That is, even if the fastening portion along the front-rear direction is loosened and the displacement occurs in the front-rear direction, the affected portion can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that the fastening portion is inclined downward. It is possible to avoid a load in the direction of inclination (along the front-rear direction) from the fastening direction with respect to the fastening portion along the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the screw.

Further, the resistance force of the upper effect device 6500 to the load in the pushing down direction can be improved by fixing the portion that is long in the front-rear direction on the left and right center side with the fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is downwardly inclined toward the front side is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the pushing down direction than the fastening portion in which the fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction is downwardly inclined toward the front side on the left and right outer sides formed short along the front-rear direction, the resistance to the load in the pushing-down direction is reduced. It is possible to secure the arrangement area of the lighting substrate 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 while minimizing the influence of the above.

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560-6580 on the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line of FIG. 241 (a). In addition, the specific part is enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the illuminated substrate 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 comes into contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. Further, while the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partition member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, the contact positions are formed so as not to coincide with each other in the front and rear directions.

With this configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 and adjust the susceptibility to displacement. It will be described in order below. First, the improvement of the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described.

Here, when the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 come into contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at positions that coincide with each other in the front and rear, for some reason (error during resin molding, improper fastening, etc.), the partition When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the plate thickness of the illuminated substrate 6570, a compressive force is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570, and when the applied load is large, electricity is applied. The decorative substrate 6570 may crack.

Further, even when a compressive force is not applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 at the time of assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, so that a load (for example, a load in the compression direction) is applied. There is a possibility that the illumination substrate 6570 may be cracked by this load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions of contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 on the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 do not match in the front and rear (there are places where they abut at offset positions). Even if a load is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the illuminated substrate 6570 but a load that bends the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, it is possible to deal with the bending and deformation of the illuminated substrate 6570, so that the possibility of cracking of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be reduced.

Next, the adjustment of the susceptibility to displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described. In the illuminated substrate 6570, the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) of the partition member 6560 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 are inserted to prevent misalignment, but in the present embodiment, they are densely packed near the center of the left and right. Arranged (see FIG. 243).

In addition, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is in contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, the contact resistance between the illuminated substrate 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally large, and sufficient frictional resistance can be secured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 in the vicinity of the left and right central portions of the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, even when the peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to easily maintain the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (particularly the lower side) of the illuminated substrate 6570, neither the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 nor the fastening portion 6564 is arranged, and a load compressed from the front and rear is not generated. Displacement can be made more likely to occur as compared with the left and right central portions of the 6570.

Therefore, when the peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 or the third illumination unit 6576 of the illumination substrate 6570 can be easily changed.

In the present embodiment, since the sound devices 6610 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the vibration mode of the illuminated substrate 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each sound device 6610. That is, there is a case where the sound is output only from the right sound device 6610 and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially, and a case where the sound is output only from the left sound device 6610 and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially. The illumination substrate 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes depending on whether the vibration is caused or the sound is output from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610 to vibrate the left and right sides of the illumination substrate 6570.

Next, the front unit 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550. It should be noted that in FIGS. 249 and 250, the reference numerals of the detailed configurations are omitted for ease of understanding.

In FIGS. 249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illumination substrate 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed so as to surround the optical transmission unit 6520 and forming an outer frame. The state in which the member 6530, the partition unit 6540 that abuts on the front and rear of the partition member 6560 and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 that is guided to the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is shown. To.

In the light emission effect via the front unit 6520 to 6550, the optical transmission unit 6520 receives the light from the first illumination unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives the light from the second illumination unit 6575, and the guided unit. The 6550 receives the light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

251 (a) is a front view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252 (a) is a compartment. FIG. 252 (b) is a front view of the unit 6540, FIG. 252 (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the board guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a board guide. It is a rear view of the unit 6550.

254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVa-CCLIVA line of FIG. 251 (b), and FIG. 254 (b) is the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. 251 (b). FIG. 254 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 254 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251 (b).

FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

The partition unit 6540 is formed of a milky white member 6541 formed of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape in a front view, and a light transmission unit 6520 formed through the center of the milky white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. A through hole 6542 formed so that the rear side portion can be inserted, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are portions protruding inward of the through hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530. A pair of post-guidance fastening portions to which a plurality of insertion holes 6544 in which fastening screws for fastening and fixing are inserted so as to be inserted and fastening screws extending in a tubular shape to the back side and passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 are fastened. The 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape that are open to the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547, which are plate-shaped portions and have insertion holes 6547b in which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 are inserted into the plate guide unit 6550, and colorless and transparent light. It mainly includes a transparent lining member 6548 formed from a permeable resin material so as to cover the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541.

The partition unit 6540 has a front side edge formed from a curved shape that bulges toward the front side in the top view like the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape in the front view, and is centered on the back side in the side view. It is formed from a substantially arc shape (see FIG. 254 (a)).

The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a on the upper surface to which fastening screws to be inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side in accordance with the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. As a result, the front end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be brought into contact with each other on a surface, and the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be prevented from changing. Can be done.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed toward the back surface side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion that is arranged to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is located on the back surface of the front bottom portion and the upper surface of the lower plate portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Is formed with a jagged decoration with a short left and right width. This jagged shape is formed by an uneven shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

With this shape, the light incident from the back surface side can be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can be uniformly emitted in front view.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape with the upper side open in a rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. It is mainly provided with a projecting rib 6547c which has a semi-oval shape and projects to the front side.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion where an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed is inserted is formed in the screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) and a load generated by fastening and fixing is received. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is related to the resin die punching direction (in the present embodiment, the front-rear direction), and the wall thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load is applied due to the fastening is increased. It is thinned toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254 (b)).

In this case, the load is likely to be imbalanced between the upper edge portion and the rest, so that there is a possibility that the fastening screw may loosen when a small misalignment occurs repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550. is there.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be adopted, but the difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points results in high cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening points in question, the cost will increase due to the inability to make the fastening screw a common part, while the fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, which will lead to high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to be prevented from being displaced from the partition unit 6540 at a plurality of locations. That is, first, the screwing portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the projecting rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, so that the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented from being displaced downward (FIGS. 247 and 254). See (b)).

Secondly, the front upper end portion of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage with the back surface side lower end portion of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6548b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 254 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced toward the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540.

Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced upward with respect to the partition unit 6540.

Since the displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be suppressed mainly by these first to third contact structures, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screwed portion 6554a. Can be done.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V-shape in front view, and has a lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a extending in a plate shape to the back side at the V-shaped lower edge connecting portion and a back edge portion to the back surface. A plurality of locking convex portions 6548b, which are projected to the side in a plate shape, are provided. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

Similar to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, a jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a. As a result, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cutout portion can be supplemented with the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, so that the transparent lining member 6548 extends in the left-right direction. Can emit light uniformly.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the back surface side (see FIG. 254 (c)). In order to form the 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the back surface side like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. ..

If this inclined surface is to be formed by the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the drawing direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the pulling direction is the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while the direction is upward and inclined toward the back side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, which only increases the difficulty of mold design. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but instead is formed by the transparent lining member 6548 (see FIG. 254 (c)). Further, in the assembled state, the white partition member 6560 is arranged to face the lower side of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent lining member 6548 forming the inclined surface, so that the transparent lining member 6548 is directed to the player. It is possible to visually recognize the whole of the above with a uniform color (white).

As a result, the drawing direction of the molding die of the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that is laid on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear drawing direction. While having a shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent lining member 6548 is inclined in the direction of entering the inside of the partition unit 6540 in the front view), the light emission of the transparent lining member 6548 is played in a uniform light emitting mode. It can be visually recognized by a person.

In other words, the partition unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the distance between the top and bottom is narrowed), while the back portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 adjacent to each other. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the above (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in a uniform light emitting mode.

In this case, it is difficult to set the drawing direction of the molding die of the transparent lining member 6548 to the front-rear direction, but the transparent lining member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-rear direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the direction of ascending inclination) as the punching direction of the molding die, the manufacturing process in which the die is resin-molded in the front-rear direction (one direction). The transparent lining member 6548 can be manufactured by the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent lining member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visually recognized through the transparent lining member 6548 can be made to emit light uniformly.

The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is formed of a colored opaque resin material in a substantially V-shape in front view, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580, and the main body resin member 6551 and the main body resin member 6551. An extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape on the back side along the lower edge of the left and right center portions, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure through holes 6553 bored at the back side end portion of the extension plate portion 6552. A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 and facing the insertion plate portion 6547 of the partition unit 6540 to fasten and fix the fastening screws, and the left and right sides of the main body resin member 6551. A plurality of back-side fastening portions 6555, which are arranged along the lower edge and are fastened and fixed with fastening screws passing through the screw insertion portion 6581c (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back-side support member 6580, and the back-side fastening portion 6555 thereof. A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 that are projected in a rib shape between the two and are inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back support member 6580, and a plurality of insertion rib portions that are formed in the front-rear direction on the left and right arms. It mainly includes a through hole 6557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed in a plurality of through holes 6557.

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the die pulling direction. That is, each component is formed in an inclined direction that ascends toward the back surface side or in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6553.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed in a plurality of small hole shapes (the range is subdivided). Is formed). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which a thin wire such as a piano wire is inserted.

Further, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width is narrowed toward the end of the hole and toward the back side. As a result, the hole can be clogged with the fine wire rod. Therefore, when the fine wire rod is further advanced to the back after entering the exhaust pressure through hole 6553, or when a load is applied by hooking it on a specific member. The movement resistance of the thin wire can be increased. As a result, the time required for fraudulent activity can be extended, and fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The front side fastening portion 6554 includes a screw-in portion 6554a to which the fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of wall-shaped positioning wall portions 6554b on the left and right sides of the screw-in portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at intervals slightly longer than the width and length of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned with each other.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the elongated direction. Guided portion 6558a, and a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b formed in a box shape in which the front side of the guided portion 6558a is bulged and the back side is open so as to be fitted into the through hole 6557, and the guided portion 6558b. Mainly includes an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the central side end portion (end portion on the side facing the pair of light receiving members 6558) of the portion 6558a.

The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570. The above-mentioned decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. As a result, light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (1 to 2 in FIG. 241 (b)). However, it can be visually recognized as uniform light over the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of a point light source can be diminished).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture of being inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (a posture in which the light receiving surface is inclined so as to be along the traveling direction of light in the assembling direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guide unit 6550). Since it is mounted in a posture that intersects with the assembling direction), the light emitted from the LED arranged on the third illumination unit 6576 of the illumination substrate 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is received in the front-rear direction. It can be refracted when passing through the member 6558, and can be advanced in a direction of obliquely downward inclination toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed so that the objects arranged on the left and right outer sides have a shorter bulge length toward the front side than the objects arranged on the left and right inner sides. Thereby, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected below the partition unit 6540.

The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550, which is arranged to face the partition member 6560, is formed from a planar shape particularly in the extension plate portion 6552 of the central portion, and has no partition. Difficult to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition for partitioning the area above the extending plate portion 6552, the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

It will be described back to FIG. 249. In the description so far, the portions that receive the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 arranged on the left and right have been described. Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520, which is a portion that receives the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, will be described.

257 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258 (a) is a rear view. It is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (orange in the present embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and is a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body portion 6531 thereof. An opening 6532 that is formed in a substantially gourd shape (approximately a pot shape) in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and a protruding rib 6533 that is projected in a rib shape on the back side along the lower edge of the main body 6531. A plurality of fastening portions 6534, which are arranged at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that fastening screws to be inserted into the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed in, are mainly provided.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is opaque to light, the portion inside the outer shape that transmits light is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed from a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241 (a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521, but since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed differently depending on the difference in the front-rear position, it is in front of the opening 6532. It is possible to allow the player who visually recognizes the light to visually recognize a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width becomes longer as it approaches the opening 6532 (so that both the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction), so that the transparent tubular member 6521 The light that is visually recognized from the front of the opening 6532 around the position where it overlaps the upper plate portion in the front-rear direction is visually recognized in a pattern that spreads horizontally as compared with the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind the range of the light that is visible to the player. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first illumination unit 6574 (or the illumination substrate 6570), it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range. The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

The projecting rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking convex portion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent lining member 6548, and is arranged at a position where the formation of the locking convex portion 6548b is omitted. In the present embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking convex portion 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (they are formed on a curve having the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other. Will be).

FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The optical transmission unit 6520 is a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a bottomed tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface arranged at an intermediate position between the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer circumference, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape covered with a transparent tubular member 6521 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin. , A shielding member 6524 formed in a tubular shape so that a portion opposite to the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523 can be inserted from a colored (white in the present embodiment) resin material, and the shielding member 6524. A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion capable of surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front end portion, and an outer extension extending to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. It mainly includes a frame extension portion 6526.

The bottomed tubular member 6521 is a member that extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction, has a curved shape so that the left and right wall portions are constricted inward, and has an LED arranged in the first lighting unit 6574 and the front-rear direction. A region surrounded by a rear outer shape portion 6521a formed from an outer shape overlapping with the LED, a plurality of light receiving protrusions 6521b projecting from the back outer shape portion 6521a to the back side at a position facing the LED, and a back outer shape portion 6521a. A closing portion 6521c that closes the LED in a plate shape, a plurality of light transmitting holes 6521d formed in the closing portion 6521c at a position facing the LED, and at least the left and right width of the upper wall and the distance between the left and right wall parts toward the front side. It mainly includes a main body tubular portion 6521e that becomes longer toward the main body, and a frame-shaped extending portion 6521f that extends to the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body tubular portion 6521e.

The light receiving protrusion portion 6521b is a portion to be inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by shortening the distance between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illumination unit is connected to the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the facing plate portion 6651 of the partition member 6560. Light can be incident from the 6574 LEDs. As a result, total reflection can be easily generated.

In this way, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, totally reflected and travels to the front side, whereas the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 described above The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, which are recessed in the direction away from the LED, and travels in the air, and the box-shaped light receiving portion The front side wall portion of the 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is made to emit light. Therefore, the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 or the third irradiation unit 6576 can be visually recognized by the player as a uniform light with a low amount of light as compared with the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574. it can.

Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped light receiving portion 6558b is formed is made of a colorless transparent and light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

The frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is generally formed from a similar shape to the back outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is compared with the outer shape of the back outer shape portion 6521a due to the relationship via the main body tubular portion 6521e. And be enlarged.

Therefore, it can be visually recognized by the player as light that illuminates a large area as compared with the size of the area where the LED is arranged in the first lighting unit 6574.

The shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is such that each portion is arranged at a distance substantially the same distance from the bottom back side surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, the shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523. As a result, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emitting mode.

The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are formed with a size that allows the circular screwing portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted.

The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a flat shape on the back surface side, and is formed in a bottomed tubular shape capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw inserted into the bottom portion. A pair of terminal fastening portions 6523a to which the portions 6543 are fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusing shape (decorative shape consisting of ridges having a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom portion of the cup shape, and the decorative shape portion thereof. It mainly includes a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light emitted from the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. As a result, the player who sees the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can visually recognize the cup-shaped member 6523 as if the surface is emitting light, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region facing the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the front surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f without diffusely reflecting the light passing through the inside of the wall thickness of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f. It can be passed to the side. As a result, the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be visually recognized by the player as clear light.

The back end of the shielding member 6524 is formed from the same shape as the central tubular portion 6566 of the partition member 6560, and is recessed in a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251 (a)). A pair of left and right guide recessed portions 6524a are provided.

The contact plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are formed with a size capable of inserting a circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to accommodate the flange portion 6522, and the extension length thereof is the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate-shaped portion.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are housed inside the outer frame extending portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)), so that the optical transmission unit 6520 The assembled state of the light can be maintained stably. Further, the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 is inserted in the order of the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a, and is fastened and fixed. The assembled state of the 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear end surface of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylinder 6521e to advance forward, and the front end of the frame-shaped extension 6521f. It can be emitted from the cup-shaped member 6523 and irradiated. Since the distance between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is set short, the cup-shaped member 6523 has a line shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523) for the player who visually recognizes the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523. It can be visually recognized in a light emitting mode that shines along the outline). As a result, the difference between the light emitting mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emitting mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above can be highlighted, so that a sharp light emitting effect can be executed. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 261 shows a six-view view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-view view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is symmetrically configured, the left side view is omitted.

261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is a bottom surface of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521.

262 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. In FIG. 262 (e), the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is not shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the transparent tubular member 6521 has a shape in which the left-right surface portion and the lower bottom surface portion are inclined so that the left-right width and the vertical width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that. On the other hand, since the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction, it is not possible to form a portion that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body tubular portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the back surface side is moved in the pulling direction (rear), but the inner surface of the outer surface portion 6521a formed on the rear side portion. If the same inclination is used, interference will occur when the resin mold on the back surface side is moved. Therefore, the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body tubular portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the front side is moved in the pulling direction (front), but a frame shape formed on the front side portion thereof. If the outer surface of the extension portion 6521f has the same inclination, it will interfere when the resin mold is moved. Therefore, the outer surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side to be pulled out forward and the resin mold on the back side to be pulled out to the rear is composed of the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, and the above-mentioned inclination is formed on the front and back sides thereof. Where a surface is formed and the above-mentioned non-sloping surface is formed, the length of the non-sloping surface in the front-rear direction of the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 is compared with the length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter.

As a result, while the transparent tubular member 6521 has a gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position, so that the light passing through the inside of the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress changes in the anteroposterior position of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is incident inside the wall thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, it is possible to facilitate repeating the total reflection until it reaches the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521. Since the leakage of the transparent tubular member 6521 can be suppressed, sufficient light can be visually recognized by the player who sees the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that the vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion is fastened to the guide recessed portion 6524a as compared with the case where the vertical width is the same in the front-rear direction. Since the 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembling can be reduced.

FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit 6560-6580, the acoustic device 6610 and the optical transmission unit 6520 in the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG. 241. FIG. 263 illustrates a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged at assembly positions with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed with a size that causes a slight gap when it is inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of the partition member 6560, and the tip thereof is the facing plate portion. It can be inserted up to the surface position of 6651. Thereby, the distance between the first illumination unit 6574 and the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness of the facing plate portion 6651.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is formed from a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the lateral direction intersecting the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 arranged to face each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b, only the light traveling substantially straight from the first illumination unit 6574 to the front side (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) is incident, and other light is incident. Can be prevented.

The light incident in this way easily travels toward the front side inside the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and even when reflected at the boundary, the angle formed by the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of light is small. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the weakening of the light before reaching the front side end portion of the transparent tubular member 6521.

The dimension of the light receiving protrusion 6521b in the longitudinal direction is set to be about twice the dimension in the lateral direction. Therefore, with respect to the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent tubular member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared with the case described in the wall thickness direction of the surface. Can also be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the back outer shape portion 6521a coupled with the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b does not come into contact with the facing plate portion 6651 and is arranged at a slight interval. As a result, among the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, the light incident from the end surface of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (light having a large angle formed by the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) is reflected to the player. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized.

That is, only the light that passes through the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b and travels within the wall thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e can be visually recognized by the player, and the other light (weak light) can be cut. In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with reference to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylinder portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b passes through the inside of the expansion hole 6562a and passes through the light transmission hole 6521d (see FIG. 260) of the transparent tubular member 6521. It passes through and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the wall thickness of the member but travels in the air, it can be visually recognized as a uniform light by the player.

The raised tip of the expansion hole 6562a and the closing portion 6521c are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light that has passed through the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first illumination unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. It is a front schematic diagram. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes through (total reflection) within the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521. The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized as an enlarged shape (substantially a gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a.

In addition, as described above, since the light in the wall thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 travels to the front end without being weakened, it corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a even in the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The position where it is emitted emits strong light (lights like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer in the strong light emission distance L17b in the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 than in the actual distance between the arrangements L17a of the edge light emitting unit 6574a, so that the light is used as a point as it is. Only visible can be seen, and the effect of light production tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance between the strong light emission arrangements L17b of the visually recognized light is longer than the actual distance L17a between the arrangements of the edge light emitting unit 6574a, so that the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light of the edge light emitting portion 6574a is radially propagated in the direction along the side surface of the transparent tubular member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b). , The light emitted from the adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light visually recognized at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, the line-shaped light can be visually recognized from the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 even in a place where the LEDs of the first illumination unit 6574 are not arranged (between the LEDs) (imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state in which the light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower ends of the first lighting unit 6574 are arranged at the boundary positions between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the main body cylinder portion 6521e (see FIG. 262 (e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above the optical axis, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 to the lower side of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f. It overlaps at the center of the left and right.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), the optical transmission unit 6520 is moved as shown in FIG. 264 (b) even though the LED is not arranged at the center of the lower end portion of the first lighting unit 6574. Through this, line-shaped light can be visually recognized in the lower left, right, and center.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first illumination unit 6574, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520 is increased, and in addition, the light is used as a point. It is possible to weaken the degree of visibility and to visually recognize clear line-shaped light.

When the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside thereof is obscured by the decorative shape provided on the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light traveling inside the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521. It is difficult to grasp the position where the lights intersect. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is indefinite, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission effect from being lowered.

Further, when the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, it is possible to visually recognize as if a new point light source is arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. That is, since it is possible to make the illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The effect of the effect can be improved.

The light emitted from the surface emitting unit 6574b (four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first lighting unit 6574) arranged inside the transparent tubular member 6521 when viewed from the front is inside the transparent tubular member 6521. Pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged holes 6562a arranged to face each other (see FIG. 245 (b)). It progresses radially along.

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface emitting unit 6574b is visually recognized as planar light spreading as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface emitting unit 6574b in the front view. Further, the light is diffusely reflected by being irradiated to the decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light in the front view.

That is, the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the region where the light radiated from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 in the front view and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f) can be brightly illuminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as light having different impressions, that is, edge-shaped light and planar light. In addition, by configuring the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light to be irradiated with diffusely reflected light, it is possible to avoid darkening the boundary. Therefore, the impression of the visually recognized light can be changed stepwise and continuously.

Here, various modes are exemplified as changes in the impression of light that is visually recognized. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emitting state such as light / darkness or blinking, or a change in the color of light.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

As described above, the partition unit 6540 that is visually recognized from the front on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that bulges toward the front in the front and side views. Therefore, the light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 on the left and right and up and down (a direction in which the light diffuses with respect to a point on the back surface side).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the partition unit 6540 has the front side edge located on the back side toward the left and right outer sides, and the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 is emitted from the mounting posture. , The direction in which the cup-shaped member 6523 is separated from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left and right and up and down (the direction in which the light diffuses with respect to the point on the back surface) proceeds.

As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the light becomes larger as the player gets closer to the player, as compared with the case where the light is produced only in a mode in which the light travels in the front-rear direction. Can be improved.

Next, the lateral effect device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral effect device 6700.

In FIG. 265, the upper effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 are not shown, and the direction view from the diagonally right front in a state where the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a is shown. In FIG. 266, a directional view of the lateral effect device 6700 from diagonally left front is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 is an effect device arranged on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the metal main body 10014a, and divides the vertically long elliptical shape in half in a side view. It is formed from the shape of the ellipse.

In the horizontal effect device 6700, a pair of left and right devices having similar shapes are arranged, but since the internal configurations are the same, the horizontal effect device 6700 on the right side will be described in detail, and the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side will be described in detail. The description is omitted.

The horizontal effect device 6700 is covered on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a so as to cover the front side of the base member 6710 so that the front-rear stacking relationship can be visually recognized at the upper end portion of FIG. 266. It is configured in such a manner that the units 6730 to 6760 are arranged.

The fastening of the base member 6710 and the metal body portion 10014a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a. Then, the fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the metal main body 10014a is fastened and fixed to the fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the base member 6710.

Of the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, except for the base member 6710, there are no constituent members to be fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the position where the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where the back side end portion and the surface position of the base member 6710 are formed). Is formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is arranged so as to face the glass unit 16 in close proximity to the glass unit 16 as shown by the unit on the left side in FIG. 265.

Since it is arranged in this way, it is easy to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back surface side of the glass unit 16 can be visually recognized integrally. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700. In FIGS. 267 and 268, a state in which the lining units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side is shown.

As shown in FIG. 267, an illuminated substrate 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to be capable of emitting light are mounted is disposed on the front side of the base member 6710, and the illuminated substrate 6720 is mounted on the illuminated substrate 6720 from the front side. The lining units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 in a covering manner.

That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports an illuminated substrate 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 and the illuminated substrate 6720. Mainly includes a light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 and a light receiving side unit composed of an inverted unit 6730 to 6760 that receives the light emitted from the light emitting side unit and makes the player visually recognize the light. .. First, the light emitting side unit will be described.

269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720, FIG. 269 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (c) is a right side view of the base member 6710. 269 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a view of FIG. 269 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 6710 and the illumination substrate 6720 in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line.

As shown in FIGS. 269 (a) to 269 (f), the base member 6710 has a flat plate-shaped support plate portion 6711 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and arranged on the back side of the illuminated substrate 6720, and an electric circuit board. A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting toward the front side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 in which fastening screws are inserted so as to be inserted at positions outside the illuminated substrate 6720 and close to the illuminated substrate 6720 in front view, and insertion holes 6736 at two locations above and below. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which the fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a portion of the support plate portion 6711 (step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) on the right side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 (enclosing the game area). Multiple alignment holes 6716 drilled as long vertical holes in the area (opposite side of the window, opposite side of the glass unit 16), and a plate shape with steps from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. The outer frame plate portion 6717 extending to the illumination plate portion 6717 and the inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back surface side are mainly provided.

The tip of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 is arranged so as to face the back surface portion near the outer shape portion of the illuminated substrate 6720, and comes into surface contact with the illuminated substrate 6720. As a result, a gap is provided between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the support plate 6711 on the back side of the portion other than the vicinity of the outer shape (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illuminated substrate 6720.

As a result, the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a, and the amount of heat transferred to the illuminated substrate 6720 even if the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710. Since it is possible to suppress (suppress to be low), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as a high temperature of the illuminated substrate 6720 and malfunction.

The positioning protrusion portion 6713 is a portion for aligning the illuminated substrate 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into the positioning holes 6722 formed at two positions of the illuminated substrate 6720. That is, the illuminated substrate 6720 is provided with a positioning hole 6722 at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 6713 with reference to the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269 (a)). Will be set up.

The insertion hole 6714 includes a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the lining units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6735 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268), and positions them. It is a through hole that is formed so that it can be matched and through which a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and the fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 6736 is formed so as to be screwable. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the upper and lower fastening portions 6715.

The alignment hole 6716 is a hole through which the projecting portions 6743, 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the lining units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. The lining units 6730 to 6760 are formed from a substantially cup shape in which a pair of thin-walled plate-shaped members (flat plate member 6740 and curved plate member 6750) are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides and open to the back side (see FIG. 268). ), It is fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side portion (edge-shaped portion).

Here, the joint portion between the base member 6710 and the lining units 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer shape portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load given by the player (for example, the player collides with the player). It can be displaced by the load generated by this. As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear end portion having a thin wall shape, it is deformed when a load is applied to the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction). Or, there is a risk of misalignment with respect to the base member 6710. In order to prevent this, the number of fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a possibility that the number of man-hours for the assembly work increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the increase in the number of fixed portions, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are formed as base members by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716. It is possible to suppress the positional deviation (positional deviation in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6471 of the flat plate member 6740 is arranged close to the outer surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, the player left the flat plate member 6740. Even if a load in the direction is applied, the flat plate member 6740 comes into contact with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 on a surface, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lining units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while suppressing the increase in the man-hours for the assembly work. The main body plate portion 6741 can be provided with a concavo-convex forming portion 6741a in which a fine concavo-convex shape is formed in a contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, so that the load can be dispersed. ..

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal main body portion 10014a and comes into surface contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 to cover (cover) the right side of the metal main body portion 10014a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal body portion 10014a from being visually recognized by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a that is recessed along the front-rear direction from a part of the alignment holes 6716. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, while it is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recess 6717a is formed in a size that fits with the projecting portion 6743 or is arranged so as to face each other with a slight gap in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, as compared with the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the positioning hole 6716, the area in which the projecting portion 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), and thus the flat plate member. It is possible to prevent the 6740 from being displaced with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion of the curved plate member 6750 that is arranged to face the main body curved portion 6751, and is formed in a surface shape facing the game region side (inside).

The illuminated circuit board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and has an arbitrary main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and an arbitrary main body plate portion 6721. It mainly includes an LED chip D1 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in a pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the movement from side to side and up and down, and the movement to the front and back is performed by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). Movement is restricted by being sandwiched between (see).

The LED chip D1 in the present embodiment has a similar chip mounted on it, but in relation to the region shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 269 (a) as the boundary of the region showing the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760. It can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting unit D1a arranged inside the frame of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting unit D1b arranged outside the frame of the imaginary line. Mainly prepare. The difference between the light emitting units D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode that is visually recognized by the player, but the details will be described later.

Next, the lining units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the lining units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lining units 6730 to 6760.

As is clear from the states shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, which are decomposed and shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, the lining units 6730 to 6760 are formed of a light-transmitting resin inside and light passing through the inside. The light receiving member 6730 is provided so as to be refractable and covers the illuminated substrate 6720 from the front side, and the front portion thereof is covered with other constituent members.

272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. 273 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and FIG. 273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). is there.

274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274 (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. is there.

Note that FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the left side, FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274 (a) is a front perspective view. , The light receiving member 6730 is a rear perspective view seen from the right side, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272 (b), the lining units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for ease of understanding.

The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a light receiving surface portion 6731 which is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of the illuminated substrate 6720 and is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720. An inner extending portion 6732 extending to the back side so as to be bent from the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and an outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. An outer extending portion 6733 extending to the back side so as to be bent from (the right edge in FIG. 274), and a plurality of extending portions (in the present embodiment) protruding from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in a long rib shape. 5) long ribs 6734, and the base end of the long ribs 6734 (the side to be combined with the light receiving surface 6731) and the front and back of the light receiving surface 6731 are extended from the front to a long fin shape. Multiple fins 6735 (five locations in this embodiment), and a plurality of insertion holes 6736 into which fastening screws arranged at the upper and lower ends and fastened to the fastening portion 6715 (see FIG. 269 (a)) are inserted, and curved. It mainly includes a decorative projecting portion 6715a (see FIG. 276) of the plate member 6750 and a fitting portion 6737 formed from a shape that can be fitted.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and a decorative pattern having a complicated cut is formed on the back surface side. In the decorative pattern, long protrusions arranged along a plurality of concentric circles having different diameters are formed centering on a portion facing the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view of FIG. 274 (b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position facing the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which the light emitted from the back is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731. (See FIG. 275 (b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is also inclined (refracting the light traveling along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 toward the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731). Inclined in mode, see FIG. 275 (b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted near the shaft portion of the long protrusion, travels to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then has a large diameter further away from the shaft of the long protrusion. A wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be made to emit light by refracting at the portion and proceeding to the front side.

Further, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape having a triangular shape in front view and a substantially central portion bulging toward the front side is formed in a manner in which the basic shapes are regularly and densely arranged, and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is a surface emitting portion. A decorative recessed portion 6731a, which is recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape at a position on the front side of D1b, is provided.

With the decorative recessed portion 6731a, it is possible to increase or decrease the surface emission of the light receiving surface portion 6731 (incrementally increasing or decreasing the intensity). That is, since the light is collected on the central side of the recess due to the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emitting mode as compared with other portions.

The inner extension portion 6732 and the outer extension portion 6733 are configured such that the extension end portion abuts on the illuminated substrate 6720 in the front-rear direction, and the extension end portion of the inner extension portion 6732 extends over the entire upper and lower sides. A portion that is in contact with the illuminated substrate 6720 but is not partially in contact with the extended end of the outer extending portion 6733 is formed.

That is, the outer extending portion 6733 includes a separated end portion 6733a which is formed so that the extending length is as short as the plate thickness of the illuminated substrate 6720 so as to be separated from the illuminated substrate 6720 without abutting. In the present embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to flow in and out of the region between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, so that heat can be prevented from being trapped.

Further, when the illuminated substrate 6720 is in contact with the entire upper and lower parts like the inner extending portion 6732, the LED chip D1 arranged so as to project from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732. Therefore, the thicker the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732, the more the area in which the LED chip D1 is arranged is limited.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the illuminated substrate 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chip D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extension portion 6733.

The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion on the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) has dense ridges having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed that is aligned with. As a result, the light emitted to the left through the inner extension portion 6732 will emit surface light (spread radially), and it will be easier for the player to visually recognize the uniform light.

As will be described later, when a part of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes for each region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end of the fin 6735, the light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling on the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b are visually recognized. However, at a position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is more than the light D1p. Is also visually recognized as strong light (the magnitude of the light intensity corresponds to the length of the arrow).

As a result, the magnitude of the light intensity visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed for each of the vertically arranged regions to be visually recognized. It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed up and down. It can be visually changed for each area lined up in.

The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed to have the same thickness without tapering in the front and rear. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed in a substantially linear shape in the rear view, and a V-shaped rib 6734b formed in a substantially V shape by being bent in the rear view.

The side surface of the elongated rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is jagged on the line, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (no surface emission) and is unidirectional. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the side surface of the long rib 6734 from emitting light uniformly. Therefore, when the lateral effect device 6700 is viewed from the left-right direction, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the surface emitting portion are emitted. It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light emitted from D1b is mixed and visually recognized.

That is, the long rib 6734 is formed long vertically and is configured as a portion that can be seen in the left-right direction, while suppressing the light passing through the long rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in the form of surface emission. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily visually recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in two on the upper and lower sides, and are formed so as to extend in a direction in which the linear ribs 6734a are inclined toward the upper and lower center positions toward the left side (center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265), and the left end portion. The 6734a1 is connected to the inner extension 6732, while the right end 6734a2 is separated from the outer extension 6733.

Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can directly enter the inner extension 6732 through the left end 6734a1, while the light passing through the right end 6734a2 can directly enter the outer extension 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized darker.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed and the visibility of the light from the left-right direction is deteriorated, while passing through the left end portion 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a. The light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, in the vicinity of the left end portion 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (interval position) away from the left end portion 6734a1, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b Since it is possible to visually recognize the light by color and brightness, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left-right direction visually recognize the light of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the vertical center position and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 by an intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bent position, while both end portions 6734b2 are separated from the outer extending portion 6733. The reason why the bent position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is arranged to face the bent position.

That is, by shifting the position of receiving the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light (main light) linearly emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a in the front-rear direction becomes the connecting position. Since it is possible to suppress the incident light, it is possible to reduce the loss of light incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has the same function as that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can directly enter the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while the light passing through both end portions 6734b2 can enter the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized darker.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed and the visibility of the light from the left-right direction is deteriorated, while the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is provided. The light that has passed through and entered the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only for the light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (interval position) away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b Since it is possible to visually recognize the light by color and brightness, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left-right direction visually recognize the light of different colors and brightness.

The fin 6735 is formed so as to decrease in thickness from the extending base end toward the tip end side, and includes a tip curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a and a tip bending fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , Is mainly provided.

In the tip curved fin 6735a, the upper and lower inner edges are curved, and the left side surface (inner surface of the front frame 10014) is densely formed with triangular wavy (jagged) notches to form a light diffusing portion. , The right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has an inclined surface in which the extended tip is inclined toward the back side from the upper and lower ends toward the center in the vertical direction and intersects with the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b, and the left side surface (front frame). A triangular wavy (jagged) notch is densely formed on the inner surface of the 10014 to form a light diffusing portion, and the right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, in the tip curved fin 6735a, since the end portion on the left surface side is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, light with a large amount of light emitted from the front side end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a irradiated from the edge light emitting portion D1a (mainly). Light) will be emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inner extending portion 6732 side (back surface side, root side), and the left surface side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the long rib 6734 and the inner extending portion 6732 are coupled, and the elongated rib 6734 is also extended inward by the light passing inside the long rib 6734. It can illuminate the installation part 6732. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a can be combined to produce light emission. , The effect of light emission can be improved.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The mode of passage of light passing through the side surface can be changed from the difference in the formation mode of the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735. That is, the light passing through the left side surface can be visually recognized as uniform light due to the surface light emitting action due to the notch, while the surface emitting action does not reach the light passing through the right side surface, so that the light passes through the right side surface. The light to be emitted can be visually recognized as local light. Needless to say, the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is displaced (for example, vibration caused by the operation of the player or vibration caused by opening and closing the front frame 10014). Since the maintenance work for returning the position to the case) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal effect device 6700, the maintainability can be improved (the difficulty level is low and the time is shortened).

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction in an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and aligns and aligns the light receiving member 6730 with the constituent members of the lining units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. A single recess 6737a is provided so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are limited to one place (while reducing) the place where the recess 6737a is arranged (the place where the fastening part 6753 is arranged) on the inner extending portion 6732 side. The position deviation and posture deviation of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

Here, when the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal effect device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so that the more fastening points there are, the more easily shadows are generated. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal effect device 6700 is formed to be large, the light is separated at the fastening portion, and there is a possibility that the effect of the light effect is reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the bearing capacity is lowered, and there is a possibility that the lateral effect device 6700 may be deformed from the root due to the load given by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening portion is limited to the recess 6737a, and the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to maintain the bearing capacity. ing.

As a result, it is arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light effect portion and the illuminated substrate 6720 at the fastening portion of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side (in the present embodiment). It is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points).

Further, in the present embodiment, light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back surface side through the recess 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG. 275.

275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 in the CCLXVa-CCLXXV line of FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. 275 (b) is a light receiving member 6730 in the CCLXVb-CCLXXVb line of FIG. 274 (b). It is a sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the recess 6737a is arranged in the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b which is arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and the striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via the fastening portion 6753 fitted in the recess 6737a. Light is formed so as to be able to travel to the back side portion of the main body curved portion 6751. That is, the light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back side (opposite side of the light irradiation direction) of the illuminated substrate 6720.

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a place where the fastening screw is fastened, and is considered unsuitable for light emission effect because the fastening screw tends to be in the shadow. However, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion 6753 is intermediately connected on both the upper and lower sides. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw up and down, so that the player can visually recognize the light while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw. That is, by advancing the light from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (diluted).

In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is enlarged and shown. Of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction having a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface portion 6731 while being slowly refracted and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. At that time, it is further refracted and condensed. As a result, it is possible to increase the emission intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a.

As described above, in the light emitting mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of light increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a becomes longer, centering on the decorative recessed portion 6731a in which the intensity of light is increased by focusing. It is said to be a lower mode.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. Compared with the case where the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is irradiated from the light having a higher intensity (light that can be seen in the vicinity of the decorative recessed portion 6731a) than when the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is directly viewed. The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to light having a lower intensity than when the light is directly viewed, and the light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Returning to FIG. 270, a member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member whose back side is open is arranged. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. Is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left-right direction and united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, so that each member is inseparably fixed.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed of a colorless, transparent and light-transmitting resin, and has a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate having a divided oval shape and a main body plate portion 6741 thereof. A flat plate portion that is arranged on a flat surface that is translated from the flat surface to the left side and is connected with a step on the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6471, and a rear end portion of the main body plate portion 6471. A plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear side to the back side, and a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at positions separated from the projecting portion 6743 so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the back surface side, and a main body. A plurality of insertion holes 6745, which are formed in the plate portion 6471 with a size capable of inserting a fastening screw, are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape that is recessed from the left side surface to the left and is projected from the right side surface to the right corresponding to the recessing, and the right end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 is , Aligns with the right side surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

The uneven forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in a manner in which a hexagonal pyramid arranged so as to taper to the left is filled, and produces an action similar to that of a reflector. As a result, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that an external force is applied. It is possible to prevent it from cracking or hanging. Further, it is possible to reduce the contact friction when sliding the base member 6710 to assemble the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

Therefore, after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when an impact is applied by the player or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. In addition to being able to improve durability by making it difficult, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the horizontal effect device 6700.

The mated plate portion 6742 is formed on the right surface in the front-rear direction along the groove portion 6742a in the step between the plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction and the main body plate portion 6741. It is provided with a hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

The protrusion 6743 is a portion to be inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion to be inserted into the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269 (a)). It is a part that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through.

Further, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at positions close to the outside of the right edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. In particular, since the fastening portion 6744 is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269 (a) and 274 (b)), the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member with respect to the flat plate member 6740 are arranged. The misalignment of 6730 can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are arranged at four locations above and below. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions, the fixing force is insufficient even when the number of fastening portions 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small. Can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is arranged so as to face the main body plate portion 6471 of the flat plate member 6740 and is formed to be curved so as to bulge to the left toward the back side, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730. A main body curved portion 6751 formed of a sex resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner side surface, and a curved plate portion arranged in parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751 and on the front side of the main body curved portion 6751. Corresponds to the fitted plate portion 675, which is connected with a step on the edge and is arranged to face the fitted plate portion 6742, the plurality of fastening portions 6753 configured so that the fastening screw can be screwed in from the back side, and the insertion hole 6745. A plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that the fastening screws can be screwed in at the positions to be screwed, and a plurality of insertion holes 6755 in which the fastening screws are inserted so as to be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the main body curved portion 6751. It mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6756 in which fastening screws are formed so as to be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the fitted plate portion 6752.

The main body curved portion 6751 is a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting from the right side to the right in a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b formed in the front-rear direction on the front side portion of the above, a flat partition portion 6751c for partitioning the striped shape on a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner side surface near the rear end portion.

The decorative projecting portion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750.

As a result, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for aligning with the light receiving member 6730. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling even in a configuration in which only one fastening portion 6753 is arranged (less) in the upper and lower central portions as in the present embodiment.

The flat section 6751c is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the leading edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction and the side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the leading edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat section portion 6751c, so that the light is visually recognized as clear light. Can be made to.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game region) of the tip curved fin 6735a is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat section 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the leading edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the leading edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the light is visually recognized as clear light. Can be made to.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

Like the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 675 is a step between a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as fine grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface and the main body curved portion 6751. Is provided with a front-rear direction hole 6752b formed in the direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269). Since a) and FIG. 274 (b)), the misalignment of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750 can be suppressed.

The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is arranged at positions (4 locations) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744, the curved plate member 6750 when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced is reduced. It is possible to suppress wobbling. As a result, the number of fastening portions 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so that the number of places where the light is blocked by the fastening screw can be reduced, and as a result, the light emission effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which the fastening screw can be inserted from the back surface side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6674 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. It is formed (see FIG. 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed so that the inner side surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6674 of the cover member 6760 is arranged to face the right side of the fastening portion 6674 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). Will be done. As a result, the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6674 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 is carelessly used. It can be prevented from being removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6674 back and forth along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 is formed by bending the main body plate portion 6661, which is a flat plate portion having a shape that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6661, and covers the curved plate member 6750. The curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion having a shape that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and the curved plate portion 6762 are extended to the left rear of the curved plate portion 6762 from two positions separated from the upper and lower center positions by approximately the same distance vertically. A plurality of connecting extension portions 6763 connected at the ends and a plurality of fastening screws arranged on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 so as to be screwable. Base end fastening portion formed by screwing a fastening portion 6674 and a fastening screw disposed at the rear end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into an insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of the base member 6710. It mainly includes a 6765 (see FIG. 279) and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 projecting from the rear end side end portion of the main body plate portion 6761 to the rear surface side.

The main body plate portion 6661 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is projected to the left in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a plurality of projecting ribs 6761a.

The projecting rib 6761a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion of the main body plate portion 6761, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and is projected to the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of projecting ribs 6762a are provided.

The projecting rib 6762a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and this overhanging portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The connecting extension portion 6763 includes a protruding rib 6763a that protrudes to the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

The projecting rib 6763a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion at the connecting position of the connecting extension portion 6763, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6674 is configured as a portion capable of restricting the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state (see FIG. 265) of the lateral effect device 6700, whereby the curved plate member 6750 is formed. It is possible to prevent it from being accidentally removed.

In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a and 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b and 6752b restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right, and the relationship between the fastening portion 6674 and the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a regulates the curved plate member It regulates the movement of the 6750 to the left. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The base end fastening portion 6765 is arranged at the back end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 can be screwed. Is formed in. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

The projecting portion 6766 is a portion inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. Further, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are the illuminated substrate 6720 and the illuminated substrate 6720 with respect to the cover member 6760 arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. The misalignment of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line of FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. 280 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the CCLXXXb of FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 on the −CCLXXXb line, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of member 6730.

As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the front-rear distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 rises from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be incident on the long rib 6734 without leakage, and the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) to facilitate the movement toward the front side. ..

Further, in a place where the long rib 6734 is not arranged, the front-rear distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained at the front-back width (formation length) of the long rib 6734 or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area as a portion where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are emitted on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially. It is possible to distinguish it from the light and make it easier to see.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel as clear line-shaped light that travels by totally reflecting the inside of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or through the long rib 6734. While it is visually recognized as light that brightens a small area, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is uniform light (pale light) through the light refracting surface portion of the light receiving surface portion 6731 and the inner extending portion 6732. ) Is visually recognized.

As a result, as compared with the conventional mode in which the lens that collects the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area, the present embodiment According to the above, it is possible to visually recognize the glittering light (line-shaped light) in a small area, while visually recognizing the light (plane-shaped light) spreading in the area of the illuminated substrate 6720. Then, it is possible to easily perform an effect of visually recognizing only one of these different lights or making both of them visible by control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing the light effect.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is used for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are used as light. By making the color and brightness of the above different, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280 (b), on the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction, the right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is positioned with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side surface (front frame 10014). (Inner side surface) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closer to the right side). Therefore, the normal on the left side does not face right beside (the direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720, that is, the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), but the direction having the component facing the front side. Turn to. As a result, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed toward the inner extending portion 6732. Can proceed. The progress of this light will be described with reference to a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 is a schematic view of a base member 6710, an illuminated substrate 6720, and a light receiving member 6730 that schematically show a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

The intensity of the light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the plane of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface increases, but the light itself is irradiated radially. In the present embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, and thus the following will be described in order.

The arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that is incident on the end of the long rib 6734, totally reflects inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and travels to reach the front end of the fin 6735. .. Since the light that reaches the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, the light is partially transmitted (exited) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735 as compared with the case where the light is partially transmitted (exited). , The energy loss of light can be reduced. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is long, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the light having sufficient brightness.

The arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the left side (inside the front frame 10014) side surface before reaching the front side end portion of the fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed in a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

The arrow L23c passes through the long rib 6734 and directly advances to the inner extension portion 6732, and indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light has not been refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, it can be visually recognized brightly. Further, since the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emission manner.

The arrow L23d indicates the traveling direction of the light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as the coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed so that the length in the thickness direction is shorter than that of the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and the fin 6735 is formed on the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014). Since the jagged recess is formed, the long rib 6734 is configured to partially protrude from the fin 6735 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-rear direction in the same manner, it is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all the coupling positions of the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6731, and a part (particularly, the long rib) can be entered. In the region (near the left side surface of 6734), the entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and the light reaching this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Since the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, the light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of the arrow L23d includes the light traveling toward the back surface side of the illuminated substrate 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the back side portion of the illuminated substrate 6720 can be made to emit light by the illuminated substrate 6720 provided with the LED chip D1 that irradiates the front side with light (at least, the illuminated substrate 6720). Light can travel toward the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed from a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in the rear view (see FIG. 276). As a result, the light traveling along the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner up and down, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, the light effect can be performed by combining the light emitted from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 toward the glass unit 16 and the light traveling by the arrow L23d. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be alleviated. That is, when incident on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, but is indicated by the arrow L23. When the light reaches the inner extending portion 6732, it is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness because the energy loss of the transmitted light occurs when the light is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. In this way, the difference in the brightness of the light due to the irradiation direction can be alleviated, and the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 can be easily made uniform in the front-rear direction.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 arranged on the left side, most of the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the right side is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape (or similar shape), but left and right. As a special non-symmetrical part, the formation of the long rib 6734 (protrusion to the back) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. That is, it is intended that the effect of advancing the light to the fin 6735 is maintained on the left side, but on the other hand, it is desired to suppress the light advancing to the game area side due to the light advancing to the long rib 6734.

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the position where the launch ball enters the game area, which is the left side of the game area, the intensity of the light emitted from the lateral effect device 6700 to the inside (game area side) is reduced. Is aimed at. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the launch ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it becomes difficult to adjust the launch intensity and confirm the launch of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, the ball launched by right-handed (strongest firing intensity) flows down in most cases, and there is little need for the player to visually check the ball for adjusting the firing intensity. .. In addition, since a large number of game balls flow down continuously in a narrow place in a short time, by irradiating the place with light and reflecting it on the game ball, the effect of producing the effect using light is achieved. Can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, and the light can be easily emitted from the horizontal effect device 6700 to the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in the present embodiment. , It is possible to improve the effect of production.

The arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is emitted in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). It shows the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light, but the long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Since the light traveling along the arrow L23e is extremely low in intensity because it extends to the position, it can be configured as light that is difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, so that the effect of producing the light is reduced.

Returning to FIG. 280 (a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect in the vicinity of the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the recess 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, a part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both wall portions of the recess 6737a and reaches the left side surface of the fitting portion 6737, as described above with the arrows L23c and L23d.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6735 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6735. Therefore, the fastening screw is illuminated in the vicinity of the recess 6737a. Therefore, there is a risk that the effect of the light emission effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 are combined. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing misalignment, and it is possible to reduce the number of places where the effect of the light emitting effect is reduced.

In addition, the recess 6737a is arranged near the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the recess 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732 to form the fastening screw. It prevents the area from becoming too dark. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of deterioration of the effect of the light emitting effect.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the illumination substrate 6570 is arranged on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 has been described, but the pachinko machine 18010 in the 18th embodiment is on the right side of the operation device 10300. By disposing the effect device 18800 provided with the illumination substrate 18830 below, it is possible to execute the light emission effect even in the lower part of the front frame 18014. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with the effect device 18800 in comparison with the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, and the other configurations are the same. Only the device 18800 will be described, and the description of other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect device 18800 is a device for light emission effect in which the back side and the upper surface side are coupled to the lining base member 6410 on the front side of the lower plate unit 6400, and the effect device 10300 and the operation device 10300. It is arranged between the operation handle 51 and the operation handle 51.

The effect device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emitting effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect by structural ingenuity. Next, in order to explain the structural device, the internal structure of the effect device 18800 will be described.

FIG. 284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect device 18800 on the CCLXXXXVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 (b) is an illumination substrate 18830 of the effect device 18800 in the direction of the arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of. Note that FIG. 284 (b) schematically shows a support mode of the illuminated substrate 18830.

As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the effect device 18800 is arranged with a planar gap on the front side of the coupling base member 18810 coupled to the lower plate unit 6400 and the coupling foundation member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the coupling base member 18810, an illuminated substrate 18830 arranged in a gap between the coupling foundation member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the illuminated substrate 18830. The light receiving member 18840, which is formed so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the above can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the covering member 18850 which is attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840. And mainly prepare.

The coupling foundation member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface whose front wall surface, which is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 18830, is inclined downward toward the back surface side. The inclination angle of the inclined surface is the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of vibration of the vibrating device 10366 when the swinging device member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is arranged in the upward position and is in the posture before the operation. It is formed at an inclination angle that is parallel to the inclined surface.

The illuminated substrate 18830 is arranged parallel to the wall surface on the front side of the coupling base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibrating device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. The illuminated substrate 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, an elongated hole 18831 formed in a long shape in the vertical direction, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates an upward urging force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted to support the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the elongated hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as a length (allowable length) at which the illuminated substrate 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

The LED chip D1 is arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, the apex of the pentagon) on the front side of the illuminated substrate 18830, and irradiates light in the normal direction of the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives the light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light in the front-rear direction.

That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction is changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is downwardly inclined toward the front side (player's line of sight). It is possible to prevent the effect of the light effect from being reduced even in the direction away from the light effect.

The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and has a plate-shaped portion 18841 that can close the opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion 18841 from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 18841. It is mainly provided with a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 extending to.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape in which the front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmission, and is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the joining base member 18810 side, and is fastened and fixed to the joining base member 18810. It is mainly provided with 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 formed at a position and size capable of accepting an extension plate portion 18842 at the bottom portion on the back side.

In the present embodiment, since the resin die punching direction of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chip D1 is arranged at the apex of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged side by side at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate portion 18842. As a result, the extended plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate-shaped portions having different widths. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also bored at three upper and lower positions with different widths.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a gently curved curved plate shape, although it begins to be extended along the normal direction of the plate-shaped portion 18841. The radius of curvature of the curvature can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the curvature is such that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the illuminated substrate 18830 reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the light incident on the extended tip (rear end side end) of the extended plate portion 18842 to reach the plate-shaped portion 18841 while maintaining the intensity.

The lining member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage in a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where light production is not desired, and can be realized in various embodiments. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) formed so that it can be attached, or a member formed in a cup shape from a resin material.

In the present embodiment, the lining member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and the bottom of the cup arranged on the front side has a pentagon based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 are formed at the apex positions of the above holes for light passage.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chip D1, and it is possible to have similar shapes with slightly different sizes. Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the forming mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important when designing the arrangement of the through hole 18851 than the arrangement of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the base of the extension plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in the front view.

The operation of the effect device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illuminated substrate 18830 is movable in the first deviation direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is arranged with a permissible width of the elongated hole 18831, and the first deviation direction is an operation. It coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

That is, when the operation device 10300 produces a vibration effect, the illumination substrate 18830 is configured to be slidable due to the vibration. When the illumination board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extension plate portion 18842 shifts, so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is less likely to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the through hole 18851 is visually recognized dark because the light does not easily travel through the extending plate portion 18842. That is, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes in a direction different from the first deviation direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the illuminated substrate 18830 is suppressed, and the illuminated substrate 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the urging force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illuminated substrate 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear end of the extension plate portion 18842 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is incident on the extension plate portion 18842 and then totally reflected. Is formed so that it can proceed to the front side.

That is, even when the operating device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized in the dark) while the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in to operate. , The through hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

Therefore, when the through hole 18851 is darkly visually recognized in the case of performing the vibration effect, it is possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. Can be done. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled so as to emit light when a big hit occurs or when the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Therefore, the player's interest in the presence or absence of light emission of the LED chip D1 can be improved.

As a result, the player's motivation to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. Therefore, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's motivation to participate is increased and the player actually becomes a player. The swing operating member 10310 can be directed to operate.

In the present embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 is arranged outside the lining foundation member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 18830 may be arranged so as to penetrate the lining base member 6410 and enter the inside so as to be in contact with the operation device 10300.

In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides and moves not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the push-in instruction as the notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed (pushed) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to visually grasp the presence or absence of the LED chip D1 emitting light.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed (pushed) at a timing other than the notification, the notification that is advantageous to the player can be easily overlooked. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 other than the timing when the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 may break down early or the operating device may be operated unnecessarily to generate noise. It is possible to suppress annoying acts.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be split left and right has been described, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the 19th embodiment are formed so as to be split back and forth. There is. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 according to the 19th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in the present embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 19322 are arranged so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configurations of the covers 19321 and 19322 have substantially the same shape as the above-mentioned covers 10321 and 10322, and are mainly described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be divisible by a dividing surface corresponding to the reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted into the insertion hole 19321a formed in the upper cover 19321 in the direction orthogonal to the dividing surface and are on the lower side. It is formed so that it can be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction in which the swing operation member 10310 is parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before the operation in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw to be fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact of vibration.

Further, since the direction Y17a of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (pushing direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216 (a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Since the fastening directions of the lenses are orthogonal to each other in the side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screws from loosening due to the impact generated by the operation of the lens member 10317.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 286. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in a cross-sectional view and the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion has been described. The protruding shape portion 16413 and the concave shape portion 16414 in the form are formed so as to be slightly inclined in the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 16400 according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in the present embodiment, the inclinations of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are compared with those of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the 17th embodiment. Is set toward the vertical direction.

In addition, the lower end of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the 17th embodiment) and the upper end portion of the concave shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the concave shape portion 6414 of the 17th embodiment) (corresponding to the concave shape portion 6414 of the 17th embodiment). The base end of the recess) is arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

When the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is abutted against and supported by the base end portion (upper surface of the main body portion 6411) of the concave shape portion 16414, the main body portion is supported at the supporting position. Since the support thickness of the 6411 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) can be sufficiently secured, the deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load during the operation of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right end portions is changed as compared with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right outer surfaces of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the concave shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in a cross-sectional view) without any inclination. Even in this case, the supporting thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are deformed when an external force is applied by forming the protrusion shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 so as to be inclined in an inverted C shape in cross-sectional view. It can be easily directed to. As a result, the degree of fatigue given by the external force can be reduced as compared with the case where it can be deformed in both the left and right directions, and the plate portions forming the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are damaged at an early stage. Can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "the button that cannot be pushed" can be performed. it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and the effect can be produced in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is in the descending operation), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotary operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the end and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the accommodating member 5430. When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, when the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321 and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the convex leg By adopting a mode in which the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the accommodating member 5430 is switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 The amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player, the button (tilting device 310) can be pressed with the specified pressing method. The motivation of the player for the operation can be increased, and the operation of the button (tilting device 310) can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for transmitting the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the accommodating member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 310 is pushed to the end of movement. The 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the housing member 5430 may not be in contact with the housing member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 can be transmitted to the player in a state where the tilting device 310 is not operated to make the effect lively, the player can change the effect (expected) by stopping the vibration when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, which is less noticeable to the surroundings. Since it is possible to recognize the difference in degree), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. it can.

As a variation of the effect, the case where the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 cannot be brought into contact with each other by the player pushing the tilting device 310, and the case where the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 continue. It is desired to generate both a case where the arrangement is possible to abut the same, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. You may. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower board surface support device 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and the game board is in the process of fixing the board surface support device 600 from there. 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by using a path that bends back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 do not interfere with each other. It can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear side assembly 480 comes into contact with the inner side surface 461Hi of the front side assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connecting line 453 in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connecting wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connecting wire 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451 even when the load of the above is applied.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H is further projected. In the range of length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connecting wire 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, when the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body 461B and the tip end side main body 461T, the base end side main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the tip side main body 461T are jointly used. You may configure a large speaker room with.

Further, although the volume of the base end side main body portion 461B is larger than that of the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the volume may be the same. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction or the position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, of the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (base end side main body portion 461B and tip end side main body portion 461T). The connection direction, the direction in which the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 intersect with the opening direction of the opening) have been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491. By making it difficult to perform fraudulent acts that invade the game area and prolonging the time required for the fraudulent acts, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent acts. Here, as the suppression of fraudulent activity, the suppression of fraudulent activity itself and the suppression of obtaining the profit of fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity) are exemplified.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the free fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800, but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. Can be made to. As a result, the radial sliding operation of the petal 802 and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides and moves by the operation of the drive side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. You may. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the part of the game board 13 which is arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not the 600 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it is possible to restrict the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not come into contact with the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the possibility that the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin collides with the metal board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 is damaged can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced. Can be used for a long period of time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light applied to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and the other surface is arranged on the front side so as to be switchable (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate around a parallel axis), so that the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, the effect can be diversified by switching between the mode of the light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that projects inward of the center frame 86.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LED 512a at the vertical position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 is made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on one side on the front side and the other side. Consider switching between cases where it is placed on the front side. When the surface of the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face the portion corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member emits light. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching that changes the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is increased, the amount of light is increased, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (the brightness becomes low, the amount of light becomes small, and the light emission becomes faint). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory).

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-shaped (narrow state) light is emitted to the moving accessory and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to emit light at a position distant from the moving accessory or the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to fall, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss received by the game machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, the operating resistance can be improved by the inclined surface 2803T getting into the recessed portion.

In the 16th embodiment, when the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540 is changed, the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is the direction in which the light is inclined upward in all the CCVIb to CCVIe regions, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the aircraft to be played. It is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward. As a result, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, the downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe that emit light to the inner lens member 530, and the upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId that emit light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the upward tilting direction, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is directed downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010, it is possible to improve the interest of the player playing the game.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed near the center of the left and right sides has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

Further, both the one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and the one formed near the center of the left and right may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 for dealing with the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for dealing with the problems (ease of holding, durability, etc.) of the front frame 10014 alone. The 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is arranged above the projecting shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable) has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured to be impossible for the player to operate and produces a vibration effect, an illuminated board that performs a light emission effect, or a board box. It may be something that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by the player.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape formed in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount directed within the operating load of the operating device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. You may.

Further, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the same effect as when one wide groove is formed is obtained in terms of reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300. Can be done. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to be along the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially, for example, in a top view.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 is projected below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 and can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed longer in the vertical direction than the fingers of the worker carrying the front frame 10014. In this case, since it is possible to insert a finger into the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 (it can be used as a finger hook portion), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. ..

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is arranged below the operation device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that generates an elastic urging force may be used, or a device such as a damper for the purpose of damping vibration may be used.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 lack flexibility and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated in the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by the drive motor around the lever support shaft 10331d1 has been described, but various aspects of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, the load may be transmitted from the rotary gear rotated by the drive motor to the lever member 10340 by the load transmission of a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism (for example, a rotary cam) that does not approach the gear mechanism is interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that the load can rotate idle when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction orthogonal to the plane on which the operating device 10300 is loaded during operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when an operation portion that does not operate on the plane is arranged (for example, if there is an operation portion that pushes in the diagonally left and right directions), the balance (average) of the operation directions of each operation portion is set. The direction to be found (for example, the intermediate angular direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening is performed for the operation part where the operation instruction is frequent (ignoring the operation part where the operation instruction is rare). You may set the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are united by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive, or it may be combined by fitting by matching the shapes.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a high rigidity (direction along the top and bottom) and the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 are in line, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, since the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of vibration of the vibrating device 10366, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operating device 10300 when the vibration is generated. it can. Further, the mode of the vibrating device 10366 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a linear motion type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by configuring the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to be irradiated with the light emitted from the predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the right front cover change as the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 change. It can be produced so as to change the appearance of the light visually recognized through the cover 10322.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that the bending can be easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity in the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened in that direction. The difference can be large.

In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a to the direction along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position is increased with respect to the bending. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be made different.

On the contrary, the formation direction of the left and right streaks D24a may be the direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swinging operation member is opposed to the bending. It is possible to increase the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the 10310 is arranged in the upward position. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be made different.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled therein. In this case, when assembling to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the displacement suppressing effect due to the interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be exerted.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 comes into contact with the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening portion in which a fastening screw is screwed in in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw extends above the plate-shaped support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. It may be configured to be inserted into the insertion hole formed in the portion. In this case, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 not only at the time of the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 but also at the time of the downward displacement, and the load can be dispersed.

In the 17th embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 fits the size of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b with respect to the thickness dimension of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted. Although the case where it is formed with a possible thickness (dimension relation with almost no gap) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be shorter than the size of the gap (the gap may be formed at the time of assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (displacement of the operating device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, it is possible to prevent the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 from colliding with each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of powder (dust).

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in the shape of a flat plate has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 is formed in a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge, and the facing plate portion 6651 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with the shape so as to fit each other at the time of assembly. You can do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partition member 6560 from separating from the back support member 6580 toward the front side in a state where the partition member 6560 is positioned at the position in the assembled state.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in the cross-sectional view has been described, but the main point is that the distance increases toward the front side, and this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one side surface of both side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed from a curved shape.

In the 17th embodiment, the milky white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind the transparent lining member 6548 formed from the colorless and transparent resin material to the player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a. Although the case where the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily visible as a series of regions is described by making the color of the above visible, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a may be formed in a milky white color in advance by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with the fastening screw in the fastening direction that inclines downward toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that inclines downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set by selecting the placement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the side on which the displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the 17th embodiment, the configuration in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured so that its front-rear width can be changed to be driven, and the degree of compressive force that can be generated due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 may be changed.

That is, if the partition member 6560 is driven so as to shorten the front-rear width in a manner in which the back side edge of the partition member 6560 is displaced to the front side, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 will be connected even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed. A gap can still be generated between them, and a compressive force can be less likely to be generated. Since the degree of holding the illuminated substrate 6570 can be lowered because the compressive force is less likely to be generated, the degree of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the illuminated substrate 6570 in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 may be deformed can be changed, and similarly, to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570. The appearance of the illuminated light can be changed.

In addition, the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is shortened at normal times (a space is left between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580), and the front-rear width is widened by drive control to increase the front-rear width between the partition member 6560 and the back support. It may be configured so as to change the situation so that a compressive force can be generated between the member and the member 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that support the illuminated substrate 6570 by sandwiching them are laminated on the front side of the front frame 10014 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the illumination board 6570 may be arranged below the back support member 6580, the illumination board 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member away from the sound device 6610), or the illumination board 6570 may be fastened and fixed. The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 inserted through the partition member 6560. In any case, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illuminated substrate 6570.

Further, the back support member 6580 (and the sound device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the back side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You can do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other. Therefore, the front frame 10014 is sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 in the closed state. It is possible to easily replace the illuminated substrate 6570 and return the misalignment.

In the 17th embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged to face the head of the fastening screw so that vibration can be transmitted and abnormal noise can be generated when the fastening screw is loosened. Although the case where it is possible to grasp the above is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light travels near the head of the fastening screw and the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw may be visible from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of shadows, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws is found compared to the case of grasping with abnormal noise. It can be made easier.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the fastening screw is fastened in a direction in which the fastening screw is inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be inclined to the left or right with respect to the front-back direction, or the portions inclined to the top, bottom, left or right may be mixed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 are formed from a shape extending linearly in a front view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a curvedly extending shape, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a grid shape.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the side surface of the long rib 6734 is made a smooth surface to suppress the diffusion of light from the side surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light-shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the energy of the light traveling to the fin 6735. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light on the front side edge can be emphasized, and if a part of the side surface is covered (for example, using a light-shielding tape having polka-dotted holes), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape, it is possible to improve the effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 is not extended to the back side in the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, although the long rib 6734 is extended to the back surface side, it may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Even in this case, the intensity of light in the vicinity of the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the light traveling along the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735 to improve the effect of light in the front view of the fin 6735. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (cutout, etc.) may be formed so that at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 is emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in the present embodiment, the side surface is inclined in such a manner that the thickness of the fin 6735 gradually decreases toward the front side, so that the light of the fin 6735 is before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. By making it easy to reach the side surface repeatedly, the light may be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the fastening position of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is reduced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the claws may be fitted based on the shape relationship or fixed by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being reduced due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

In the 18th embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 slides due to the influence of the vibration of the operating device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810 so that the illuminated substrate 18830 can slide even by the vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (direction along the direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction) are different, the displacement mode of the illuminated substrate 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, the player can perform a silent effect that can generate slide movement of the illumination board 18830 while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, by configuring the illumination board 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300, the player who touches the operation device 10300 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, the interest in touching the operating device 10300 can be increased by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in the situation favorable to the player occurs.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 is supported so as to be floatable (sliding) in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 6570 of the upper effect device 6500 may be supported so as to be floatable. In this case, the rod member may be fixed to the front frame 10014 and floatably supported by a rod member extending from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or the rod member fixed to the wall portion of the acoustic device 6610. It may be supported so that it can float. Further, the slide direction is not limited to up and down, and may be left and right or diagonal.

In the 19th embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 follows the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be configured to be along any of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, intermediate). The reference line X19 may be formed along the direction of (angle).

Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions. Or, when the frequency of operations is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. ..

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Points where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operation device having an operation means for the player to push in, the operation device is arranged at a first state in a normal state and a position where the operation means projects from the first state with respect to the player. Two states can be configured, and the operating means is provided with an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A game machine A1 characterized in that the direction is directed toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the game machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, is configured to be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the game machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game is played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing a hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as a fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached can be provided. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new pushing operation method is, for example, placing the outer side surface of the left little finger near the shaft rod, and placing the hand near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and then turning the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is arranged so as to face the operating means. Will be done.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device includes a drive means for automatically operating the operation means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means for operating by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is provided via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the operation means to move. A game machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement of releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, the movement width in which the operating device moves can be changed by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the game machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. The gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided as a light emitting means which is arranged inside the operation device and irradiates light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's viewpoint as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means without aiming. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation by adopting the mode.

In the game machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Characteristic gaming machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Points that make it possible to respond to repeated hits while keeping the repulsive force during normal times small>
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing a player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state. A game in which a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from a second state to a first state is provided, and an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from a first state to a second state is provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means, but when it is desired to speed up the return of the operating means, the first is the first. By pushing back the operating means with the two driving means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the game machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single pushing operation or a long pressing). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the game machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determination means is provided with the position difference detecting means for detecting and the movement direction determination means for determining the movement direction of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a supporting means is provided, and the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight comes into contact with the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating the driving force separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the rotation of the drive motor to start or stop, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained while being maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction closer to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effecting device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the player emphasizes the ability to operate lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player, while if the player firmly supports the movement of the operation means itself. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the operation of the player increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. The voice coil motor is pushed out to an extended position, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the game machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the game machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The game machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means and the end portion on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operation means is operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the like. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A game machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for the production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. Then, a large load may be generated on the drive means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the production is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or reverse. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction means, for example, excluding the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means that urges the driving means and the transmitting means into a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. The engaging teeth are provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state in which they are meshed with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is formed in a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means applies a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, whereby the transmission of the driving force can be released.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored instead of being separated and completely eliminated. As a result, when the player releases the hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, when the button is driven "as an effect", if the player holds the button, one phase of the operation of the button has passed. Then, if the player releases his hand in the middle and moves from the end of the one phase, the period in which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started to move because the load is released" is reduced. It comes off.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane to transmit the releasing means. It is possible to prevent the movement from being stopped along the direction of approaching and separating from the means. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the opposite direction. A game machine D5 characterized by.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operation modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation mode of the operation means whether the drive means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operation means for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the elapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the game machine D6, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the operation mode of the drive means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like. Therefore, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the like. A first means that is configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position and suppresses the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. , An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a changeable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means, and the first means. The first means is provided with a release load means for applying a load for disengagement of one means from the operation means to the first means, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means causes an extension operation. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the terminal position of the operation means by the terminal means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. Therefore, the release is performed by detecting the operation amount of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. An example is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized in other phases.

In the game machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load given from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operably arranged by the operation of the release load means. A game machine E3 characterized in that it can be switched whether or not it operates synchronously.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member and characterized in that the rotation period of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operating means is moved toward the second position. , The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means having a vibrating portion that is movable between and vibrating, and a receiving means that is arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. When this is done, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can come into contact with the receiving means. A game machine F1 characterized in being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibrating means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. .. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). Depending on the mode), the start of vibration may not be in time before the player releases the hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time when the player operates the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the operation mode of the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the game machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contacting state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operating intensity of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means at the time of vibration can be suppressed.

In the game machine F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in the direction close to the receiving means.

In the game machine F3, the support means is characterized in that the deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means is lower than the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. ..

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means is deformed can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the support means. it can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the vibrating means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

In the game machine F3, the portion that the vibrating portion comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to prevent the driving means from being loaded. Thereby, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As a receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured so that the operating means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operating means can be moved. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force that drives the operating means, and a transmitting means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the player grips and fixes the operating means, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means and the transmitting means There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the driving means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member with a rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the deformed portion to move to the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deformed portion has a role as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means and a role as a portion for generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the game machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is projected in parallel with the rotation axis, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotation shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member intends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

In the game machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Therefore, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, and thus the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means can be reduced.

The game machine G6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines G3 to G5 includes a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Thread ball goto prevention structure. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the game balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 comprising a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, an illegal tool in which game balls are connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed by using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an illegal profit.

In the game machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends a flow path of the game ball.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the game machine H2, the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the load means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the load means and the game ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the load means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H3 or H4 is characterized in that the gaming machine H5 includes a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the load means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving plate, which is a plate on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving plate is a portion for discharging the game ball to be discharged from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball passes through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is the portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device, to the receiving dish, which is the dish that the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other game ball was performed by using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the game ball that is paid out can easily damage the thread.

<Structure of board retainer. Game machine I>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The game machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame so that the game board can rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured so that the state can be changed only after the game board is pushed into the position in which it is in use. Therefore, if the game board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the state changing means includes a proximity means that is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, so that the game board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force, so that the game board can be pushed to the position in use.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the game means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the game means unusable. ..

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to an unusable state, so that the game means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means when the game means is made unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the game means, the work efficiency of the removal work of the game means can be improved, and the game can be improved. Since this is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes a contact means that receives a load from the game means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the game machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the game means, the state changing means changes its state to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the game means against the state changing means, it can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, which is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means can be used to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the game means.

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is unusable so that the state changing means makes the game means unusable. The game machine I6 is provided with a blockage regulating portion that makes it impossible to block the opening on one side of the game means when maintaining the state.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the game means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the game means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and accepting the gaming means from the one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the invasion of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arrangement means is arranged in the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured so that the entry of the piano wire can be suppressed at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the arrangement means is different between the first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first place and the second means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the second place. A game machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by a method.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the arrangement means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that the invading member can be prevented from further invasion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes a support means for supporting the electric wiring, and the support means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the path from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry control part is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means includes a eliminating means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a eliminating region far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the game means by the arrangement means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a decorative plate with a five-sheet structure. Involved in fraud prevention. Game machine K>
It is arranged between the first means and the second means which are opposed to each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and between the first means and the second means along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, the connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to the second direction intersecting with the first direction. The game machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine including the third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional game machine described above, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is attached to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacement of the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the direction intersecting the third direction The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the game machine K3, the game machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the game machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates the light toward the first means or the second means side and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above and capable of introducing the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from each other by the light guide means.

The game machine K6 is characterized in that the game machine K6 is provided with a contact means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contact means. Can be done. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the opposite direction. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means is illegally attempted to be disassembled. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. As a point, not reached>
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means which is arranged to face the light guide means and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave surface facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex surface facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant. The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed depending on the unit.

In the game machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. Game machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex surface facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion that is arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion that is arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transmissivity is formed from substantially the same material, by injecting the same light into the light guide means, an effect mode of light visually recognized through the projected means and an effect mode of light visually recognized through the opposite projection means Can be different from.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Game machine M>
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). Then, in such a game machine, the vibration wave traveling to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center position of the game machine and sent to the outside of the game machine, so that it is easy to produce a bass sound. , There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. The regulation of the left-right width can be canceled and the vibration wave can travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the game machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the surface, and the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the protrusion tip of the protrusion portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The game machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A game machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the game machine M3, the game machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the game machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means in which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a directing means arranged below the support fastening means and producing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5, characterized in that the effecting means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without pressing the space used for the effect. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a follow-up state of the first displacement means being displaced in the displacement direction, and a follow-up state. In a gaming machine including a second displacement means that can be switched in a non-following state that displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in the following state. The gaming machine N1 is provided with a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means is set. , It can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The game machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the game machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the drive means for driving the first displacement means, so that the drive means is also used. be able to.

In the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the game machine N4.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a production device.

The game machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means. Game machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, not reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). (See Kai 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the game machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the game machine O1, the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2 to play.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

In the game machine O1 or O2, the accommodation means is provided with a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are composed of shapes based on the shapes of the solid objects in different directions, so that the second openings are formed. It is possible to easily remove the solid object through the portion.

In any of the game machines O1 to O4, the game machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object continues to remain can be reduced. ..

<Points related to devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine including a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means includes a protruding shaped portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is arranged can be removed from an outer frame on which a game board is arranged (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed from a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with a finger, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shape portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first supporting means functions as a portion on which the finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first supporting means slips off the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

The arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited in any way, and any projecting portion may be provided so as to project outward from the first support means. For example, it may be projected in the vertical direction or may be projected to the front side.

In the game machine P1, the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means is provided, and the projecting shape portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A game machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1, the projecting shape portion is projected downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is mainly applied as the support position. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to hold the first support means. This makes it possible to easily attach / detach the first support means to / from the second support means.

The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the position may be closer to the front side when the first supporting means is supported on the front side of the second supporting means, or the other when the first supporting means is pivotally supported by the second supporting means at one end. The position may be closer to the end, or may be the position opposite to the shaft support position with respect to the plate for storing the game ball.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first supporting means includes a recessed shape portion recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means has a gap between the recessed shape portion and the recessed shape portion. A game machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged to face the recessed shape portion.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first support means is made a gap by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means can be used. It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shavings, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first supporting means rub against each other due to the misalignment. That is, it is possible to prevent the powder from accumulating and clogging the movable portion to cause a malfunction, or the powder from accumulating at the detection location of the detection device and erroneously detecting the powder.

In this way, the recessed shape portion is not only when it is not operating (for example, when the glass frame is opened to clear an error, during maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also when it is operating (for example, when playing a game). It is also effective in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

In the game machine P3, the concave shape portion is arranged inside the range in which the protrusion shape portion is provided.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3, it is possible to prevent the portion where the concave shape portion is formed from becoming extremely thin as compared with other portions and falling into insufficient strength. it can. Further, since the concave shape portion is formed on the back surface of the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion shape portion can be bent and deformed in the inward and outward directions, so that even if a large load is applied to the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion shape portion is impacted. Cracking of the shape portion can be suppressed.

The load applied to the projecting shape portion includes, for example, the own weight of the first supporting means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first supporting means, and the first. An example is a load applied by a collision of something moved by a player or a clerk (such as a Senryo box) near a support means.

In the game machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means on the outside of the recessed shape portion, and is supported in a manner of contacting an overlapping portion that overlaps the protruding shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising a contacting means and an operating unit positioned on the contacting means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of the game machine P4, it is possible to secure a sufficient support thickness of the overlapping position for supporting the abutting means while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, so that the operation unit can be used. It is possible to prevent the first support means from being deformed during operation.

In the game machine P5, the contact means is provided with an impact damping means which is continuously formed between the contact means and the operation portion so as to be able to attenuate the impact, and the impact damping means is the recessed shape portion. A game machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width shorter than the width.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effect of the game machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operation unit to the abutting means can be attenuated by the impact damping means, and a distance is provided between the impact damping means and the overlapping portion. As a result, the impact can be damped by the deformation (deflection) of the abutting means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact damping means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the game machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion of the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of recession is formed to be larger than that of the second portion.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of denting is exemplified by, for example, the depth of dent (the greater the degree of dent, the deeper) and the width of dent (the greater the degree of dent, the wider).

If the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portion, the concave shape corresponding to the other portion. The degree of recessing of the portion may be formed to be large.

Further, the recessed shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the load generation frequency, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game store, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the game machine (a predetermined production state, a game state such as a specific game state). It may be based on the size of.

In any of the game machines P1 to P7, the projecting shape portion is formed below the bottom surface portion of the first support means along the front-rear direction, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. Game machine P8.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first support means is erected alone. 1 Even in the storage method in which the supporting means is placed on the floor alone, the first supporting means can be stored for a long period of time without the first supporting means falling down.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape portion is not limited to the own weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during the operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the game machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily self-supported by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the portion other than the projecting shape portion from becoming dirty.

<Points regarding deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
In a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by a player, a first supporting means that supports the operating means, and a second supporting means that supports the first supporting means or at least one of the operating means. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the first supporting means is deformably configured in a direction that narrows the gap between the operating means and the second supporting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means such as an effect button is supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load during the operation of the operating means is insufficient, and it is called the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

For example, when the weight of the player is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second supporting means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second supporting means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, there is a possibility that a gap may be formed between the operating means and the second supporting means on the front side portion due to the difference in the descending distance.

On the other hand, according to the game machine Q1, even if the second supporting means is lowered excessively, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the second supporting means due to the deformation of the first supporting means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend (subduction) excessively, the supporting mode of the operating means can be simplified.

The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a descending direction, in an ascending direction, in a pushing direction along the front-rear direction, in a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

Further, as the mode of contact from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified in addition to the case where the normal extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and the reaction force increases as the direction of operation increases toward the center of the bottom, so that the support of the operation means is effective. Can be done

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the game machine Q1, the first supporting means is made of a flexible material, has a support portion that supports the operating means, and is configured to be able to hold a game ball, and the operating means is configured via the first supporting means. A game machine Q2 characterized by having a game ball holding portion connected to the player.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the game ball holding portion.

Further, when the first supporting means is composed of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding portion by a floating structure, the vibration when the operating means is operated is held as it is. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball from being transmitted to the unit, it is possible to prevent the game ball held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced and generating an abnormal noise each time the operating means is operated.

Various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the vibration transmission may be prevented in the first direction while the vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to execute the effect by the sound.

In the game machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by the player, and the first supporting means fronts as the connection position with the game ball holding portion becomes farther from the operating unit. A game machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position where the position shift is likely to occur due to the operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of the position shift. While suppressing the generation of a gap between the ball holding portion and the first supporting means, by arranging the connecting position on the front side (closer to the player) in the distant position of the operating portion, which is a position where the position does not easily shift due to the operation. , It is possible to improve the design.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by the player, a main body portion supported by the first supporting means, and the operating unit and the main body portion. The operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first supporting means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. Even the gaming machine Q4, which is configured to surround the connecting portion.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while ensuring a sufficient size of the operation unit.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the method of fixing the 1st support means formed from a split body. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, respectively, or include one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body. You may let me.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, it may be fitted or fastened.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, the impact generated when the operation unit is operated can be distributed and received at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, orthogonally) with the operating direction of the operating unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating unit and the tightening direction of the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to an impact during operation.

In the game machine Q4, the game machine Q5 is characterized in that the fastening directions of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersect with the operation direction of the operation unit.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the fastening direction during the operation of the operation unit, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation and the split body is fixed. Can be prevented from being released.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the direction which intersects with the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation direction). Direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is along a predetermined straight line (pushing operation or pulling operation), the direction intersecting the operating direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is illustrated.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in the operation) are assumed during the game, at least among the plurality of planes intersecting each straight line. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a direction intersecting any of a plurality of plane intersections, that is, a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the game machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening points of the divided body are configured at a plurality of points, and the first plane including one fastening point and the second plane including the other fastening points are configured as different planes. A game machine Q6 characterized by.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the split body from being hung, it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being displaced at the same time or the fastening being loosened at both fastening points.

The fastening portion of the divided body may be arranged at a location where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Even in this case, since the other fastening points are arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, it is possible that the split body will be displaced or the fastening will be loosened due to the load during operation. Can be prevented.

In any of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating unit, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the split position of the split body. A game machine Q7 characterized by being installed.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the divided position, and the operation unit is moved when the operation unit is operated at the divided position. And the divided body may rub against each other and dust (dust, etc.) may be generated. Since the detecting means is separated from the divided position, it is possible to prevent the detecting means from detecting the powder (dust, etc.). can do. As a result, the occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines Q4 to Q7, when the game is possible, the operating means interferes with the divided body in the splitting direction on the side that separates in the splitting direction (proximity separation direction) of the divided body. A game machine Q8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the split body in the split direction.

The interfering means may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but before the assembled state, for example, during the assembling work. For example, when the split body is formed of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during the assembling operation, so that interference with the interfering means can be easily avoided and the ease of assembly is maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere in the assembly direction view (for example, the direction view in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the game machine Q9 is characterized in that the second support means includes a receiving recessed portion that is recessed so as to accept the first support means.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, since the first support means is received in the receiving recess, the first support means is affected by the displacement of the operation means. Even if the position is displaced, the operating means and the first supporting means can be returned to their original positions at an early stage by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first supporting means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the game machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, a large area where the operation unit can be arranged can be secured, and in addition, when the player grips the operation unit, it is cramped. It is possible to prevent feeling. As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and improve the operability of the operation unit.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extension direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A game machine Q11 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaky portion is different for each region, so that the first support means having anisotropy in rigidity. Can be configured.

The design criteria for the extension direction of the streaks are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield, or when the load generated during the operation of the operating means acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best response to the load. The extension direction of the streak portion may be designed as the direction.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
In a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light, the light emitting means is characterized by having a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means. Game machine R1 to do.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission production.

More specifically, in the conventional game machine described above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. It becomes dark because it is not possible to produce light emission at the place where it is used. In this case, in the front area where the game machine is easily visible, the area where the game can be produced brilliantly becomes narrow. In the first place, since the size of a game machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like is roughly determined from the standard, it is recognized that securing a light emitting production area is an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can pass the vibration of the vibrating device, and the light emitting means is arranged at the vibration generation location of the vibrating means. Can be approached to. As a result, the front region can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibration generation location of the vibrating means, which can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

The mode of the vibrating means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and may be a means configured to be vibrable (passively vibrable) with respect to a load of an external force.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, a vibrating membrane provided in the speaker, an outlet from which the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker seen in a bass reflex type speaker is discharged, a path connected from the vibrating portion to the exhaust port, and the like are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a vibrating device by rotational drive (for example, a vibrator) or a vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving.

The aspect of the proximity arrangement is not limited at all, and any aspect may be used as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be laminated on the vibrating means, and in that case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, the direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, and the left-right end to the left-right inside. It may be inclined in the direction.

The game machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, includes a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the light emitting substrate is laminated and arranged on the plurality of the vibrating means. ..

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, misalignment, etc.) due to the influence of vibration generated when the vibrating means outputs sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by different the vibrating means for outputting the sound. Therefore, the type of change (variation) of the effect mode of the light emitting means. ) Can be increased.

The light emitting substrate may be one or a plurality of substrates. When there are a plurality of sheets, at least one light emitting substrate may be laminated and arranged on the plurality of vibrating means. In this case, since a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibrating means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided, the types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means can be further increased.

In the game machine R2, the holding means for holding the vibration means is provided, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means emits light along the stacking direction. The gaming machine R3 is configured so as to generate a load in a direction of suppressing displacement of the substrate.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effect of the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means.

The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply to prevent them from coming off), it can be said that they are not fixed.

Moreover, the expression "non-fixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate is specified (the front-rear position is stable and small vibration is allowed), and the shape of the light-emitting substrate is determined. By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front and rear with a frame member having a slightly larger frame shape, it is possible to suppress displacement in a direction different from the front and rear direction (up, down, left, and right).

As a result, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the case of the vibrating means, so that the position stability of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. Can be enhanced.

In the game machine R2 or R3, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, the fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and the said A regulating means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction is provided, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A game machine R4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are laminated does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), the displacement of the fixing means is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which progresses. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the game machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared with the first displacement region. A game machine R5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced due to the influence of the vibration of the vibrating means is changed for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made to.

As a result, an excellent effect can be obtained by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement region in different modes. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement region, a surface emitting means for producing a uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means for showing the player high-luminance light by completely reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge) is arranged. As a result, it is possible to perform a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) is different for each region.

The mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a mode of suppression defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibrating means, or a mode defined by a mode of holding the light emitting substrate.

For example, as for the positional relationship between the plurality of vibrating means and the light emitting substrate, the regions that are equidistant from each vibrating means are such that the influence from one vibrating means is canceled by the influence from the other vibrating means. , Displacement may be suppressed.

In any of the game machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw is provided. The gaming machine R6, characterized in that the portions and the facing portions are arranged so as to be in contact with each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R1 to R5, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw is loosened by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion. It can be prevented from doing so.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the correspondence after the fastening screw becomes loose. For example, when the fastening screw is loosened, the loosening may be detected electrically, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibrating device. If it is vibrated, an abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or the loosened part may be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any of the game machines R1 to R6, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate and the connecting means to be fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member are provided. The connecting means is characterized in that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction is more easily caused than the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. The game machine R7.

Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the connecting means can be easily deformed in the connecting direction, the interval between the connecting positions is changed in both directions such as extension and contraction, and the favorable influence and the disadvantageous influence are cycles. It becomes unfavorable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the connection position is changed only to the side that shortens the interval. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other.

As a result, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member can be increased only in the situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, the situation where the connecting means is loaded). While setting the load in the opposite direction of the member and the second member low, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is likely to shake due to the vibration by the vibrating means, and the light is emitted. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the substrate.

The mode in which deformation easily occurs in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs in each direction, or the magnitude of the load generated in the connecting means may change in each direction.

Further, the mode of switching the loads in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member can be changed at an arbitrary timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of the game machines R1 to R7, the vibrating means is configured so that the direction of vibration can be changed between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. The featured game machine R8.

According to the game machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of actions of the vibration of the vibrating means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical concept of light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
A first aspect comprising a light emitting means configured to emit light and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine S1 includes a light guide means and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that LED light is incident from an end portion of a plate-shaped member and emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See publication). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional game machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and in order to eliminate this, the light emitting mode is weak. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, since the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different. It can suppress (changing). Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the mode of the light guide means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as frosted glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made of frosted glass, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. A member of the above aspect may be used.

In the game machine S1, the light guide means is configured so as to change the way of shining in a stepwise manner in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effect of the game machine S1, the light guide means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface even when the substrate on which the light guide means is arranged is formed of a flat plate. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

In the game machine S1 or S2, the accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and the light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged are provided, and the accommodating means supports the light emitting substrate and the light guide means. The support means is fixed at least in the first position, and the shielding means is configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A game machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in a direction.

In the game machine S3, in addition to the effect of the game machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still attached, so that the position of the light guide means with respect to the support means can be easily positioned. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the player can see it while shielding it from touching the light guide means, or it may be configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You may.

When the first position is formed at a plurality of places, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the game machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A game machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in a long direction.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effect of the game machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape and the first position is arranged at the end in the long direction, so that the fixing of the first position is loosened. By applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means, the misalignment of the light guide means can be easily corrected.

More specifically, the correction of the misalignment of the light guide means is compensated by the deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction or by the slippage due to applying a strong load, so that one of the long directions is compensated. Even when the fixation is loosened only at one end and the fixation is maintained at the other end, the misalignment of the light guide means can be easily repaired.

Further, in the case of the support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light guide means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened as the light guide means bends and deforms. Therefore, even if the light emitting means is not removed from the supporting means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light emitting means, and the light emitting substrate is loaded in that state. Can be used to correct the misalignment of the light emitting substrate.

The adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the basis of the design is that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means is mechanically regulated so as not to be completely displaced from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate in the irradiation direction view. The adjustment width may be sufficient to correct the misalignment in (the adjustment width is small), and the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means is the irradiation direction based on the design that secures a large adjustment width in advance. The position of the light guide means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same time can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with different playability (for example, when a gaming machine having different specifications is configured), the mechanical configuration of each part is not significantly changed. Since the mode of the light emitting effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means, the burden (for example, cost) related to the manufacture of the game machine can be reduced.

The non-fixed mode is not limited in any way. For example, a mode other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixing. Further, the end portion is an expression of intention to avoid being limited to the end portion. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the long direction end.

In the game machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guiding means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. The game machine S5 is provided with a portion, and the misalignment prevention portion is provided with a fixing portion with the support means.

Here, where it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means, so for the purpose of preventing it, it is also for light emitting. It is preferable to configure the board so that the displacement between the substrate and the supporting means does not easily occur.

Considering the effect of the effect, it is preferable that the light guide means is easy to align when the misalignment occurs on the premise that the misalignment with the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. , It is considered good to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if the position shift occurs between the light guide means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated, and it is considered good to hold the light guiding means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a place that the player can touch, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of the strength. As described above, the support modes expected for each means were various.

According to the game machine S5, in addition to the effect of the game machine S3 or S4, the action of the misalignment prevention unit facilitates mutual alignment at the time of assembly without directly fixing the light guide means and the shielding means. Not only that, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guide means and the shielding means during the game.

The mode of the misalignment prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, the unevenness that has the same shape and can be fitted may be used, or the unevenness that can be fitted may be such that the shape along the assembling direction is invariant, or the side closer to the mating member is tapered. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any of the game machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to the main body portion, the separation extension portion extending from the main body portion to the side away from the light emitting means, and the outer shape of the extension portion. The light emitting means is provided with a facing extension portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, and the light emitting means is arranged in such a manner that light incident on the facing extending portion is totally reflected. A game machine S6 characterized by having a part.

According to the game machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting portion from entering the portion other than the facing extension portion, the separation extension portion, the facing extension portion, and the other portion The boundary between the light and the light can be clarified, and the effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be performed at the boundary of a short width.

The mode of total reflection is not limited to any one. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guide means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guide means, a combination thereof, and the like.

In the game machine S6, the light guide means forms a covering portion to be covered on the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed from a frame shape having the same shape as the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A game machine S7 comprising a frame portion to be formed, and the facing extending portion extending from the lining portion and being coupled to the frame portion.

According to the game machine S7, in addition to the effect of the game machine S6, light can be incident on the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of the light emitting effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the facing extension portion can be formed. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of shining the opposite side of the light emitting direction.

In the game machine S7, the opposed extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is connected to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame portion at the other end from the frame portion. A game machine S8 characterized by being separated.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effect of the game machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension portion, the end portion where light can be incident on the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and the end portion where the incident is restricted are provided. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the light emission effect using the frame portion.

In any of the game machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projection position of the facing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separation extension portion with respect to the light irradiation direction is set. The game machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the opposed extension portion and the separation extension portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the detached extension portion is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emitting intensity of the light emitting means is emitted. It is possible to produce light emission without giving a sense of discomfort to the player while keeping the same value. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the detached extension portion can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top light emitting means. Point to change the way of shining depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light emitting means configured to emit light and a light receiving means capable of receiving light are provided, and the light receiving means includes a first light receiving means for receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine T1 is provided with a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to incident LED light from the edge of the planar member and emit it from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional game machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and in order to eliminate this, the light emitting mode is weak. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine T1, since the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect is reduced (change) even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light receiving means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as frosted glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made of frosted glass, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. A member of the above aspect may be used.

The game machine T1 is characterized in that the light receiving means is configured so that the way of shining is changed stepwise in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The game machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodating means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. The gaming machine T3 is provided with a partitioning means for partitioning a region, and the light receiving means is configured so that the lighting method changes for each region partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partition means is arranged at the boundary where the way of shining the light receiving means changes, so that the way of shining the light receiving means changes abruptly. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the player is allowed to do so. As a result, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates.

The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the light emitting substrate is aligned by being supported by the partitioning means from a direction that opposes the urging force applied to the light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effect of the game machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment between the light emitting substrate and the partition means, and in addition, the light emitting substrate at the time of use. And the partitioning means can be prevented from being displaced.

In the game machine T3 or T4, the partition means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of a light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A game machine T5 characterized by having a part.

According to the game machine T5, in addition to the effect of the game machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting portion and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the size of the partition means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. It becomes easy to totally reflect the light, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the game machine T5, the partition means is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, includes a non-insertion through hole that does not accept the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through hole is provided. The gaming machine T6 is formed in such a manner that the opening expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effect of the game machine T5, a through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, a light receiving means. Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any of the game machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is characterized in that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is formed larger on the side far from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines T1 to T6, the area where the player sees the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be done.

In the game machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conductive portion extending from the light emitting means side and a punched boundary surface portion intersecting the light conductive portion, and the punched boundary surface is a light conductive portion of the light conductive portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extension direction is arranged at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the game machine T8, in addition to the effect of the game machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, it is possible to easily make the wall thickness of the light conductive portion uniform. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain total reflection in the extending direction of the light conductive portion.

In the game machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. The featured game machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effect of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from a point light source). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of a point light source without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Points consisting of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction and the first fixing means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to a direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is formed by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is lowered.

For example, when a fastening screw to be inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be arranged at a position where it interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than that of the light emitting substrate by the amount of the fixing means, so that the size of the area where the support plate can be arranged is large. The size of the light emitting substrate will be limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction which are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are along the front-rear direction. Compared with the case of being inserted, it is possible to secure a wider production area on the side to be visually recognized by the player.

In the game machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction are provided on the outer surface. Game machine U2.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect of the game machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is obtained. A force can be generated and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

The game machine U3 is characterized in that, in the game machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing points of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in the fixing force.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are made of a resin molded product and the drawing direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclining each other and the drawing direction are Since it is inclined, the fixing force may be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1 or U2, a decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is used as a common part. can do.

The configuration of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening preventing means for preventing the loosening of the fixing, or a loosening regulating means for restricting further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

In the game machine U3, the suppressing means is provided with a notification means capable of notifying a fixing defect of the fixing means.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effect of the game machine U3, the notification means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that it is possible to quickly detect that the fastening screw has loosened.

The configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying, such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance. Structural means include, for example, a transmission changing means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light effect changing means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen from the outside. An example is a vibration notification means that makes the player notice by contacting the vibrating part of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal noise or strengthen the vibration.

In any of the game machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means comprises the first surface and the second surface. A game machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between them.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines U2 to U4, a plurality of directions in which the first means and the second means can generate a resistance force as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means are set. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured such that the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is narrowed is the second means side. The area occupied by the composition can be narrowed.

The game machine U5 includes a fourth means arranged on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, and the first surface is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. The game machine U6.

According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effect of the game machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in front view can interfere with each other, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area in which the device can be arranged.

In any of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, respectively.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, so that the one fixing means is used. It is possible to prevent deformation along the generation direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, and U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Characterized game machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. The game machine is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, and U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A game machine Z2 characterized by. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, and U1 to U7, the gaming machines are pachinko gaming machines and slot machines. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being a fusion of. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13 Game board (game means)
14 Front frame (closing means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of the receiving plate, part of the game ball holding part)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,915,10145 Foul ball passage (Fal ball passage)
159 Open / close regulation part (blockage regulation part)
173 Long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Reverse cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operating devices 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311 gL, 3311 gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 shaft part (shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (urging means)
324L left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343d Coil spring (urging means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disk cams (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (convex part)
345 arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (audio means)
453 Speaker connection line (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, protruding part)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of opening)
487 Passage forming ribs (bending means, protruding parts)
500 Right panel unit (directing means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (means to be connected)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 513c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib part (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Board surface support device (state change means)
620 Rotating front claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotating rear claw member (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (driving means)
830 rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Fal ball passage (Far ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance)
5412 Weight member (vibrating part, part of repulsive means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disk member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 engaging member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a 1st through hole (part of 2nd opening)
8326b 2nd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326c 3rd through hole (part of 2nd opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate (regulatory means)
10310 Swing operation member (part of operation means, part of operation part)
10321 Left front cover (part of the first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of the first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of the game ball holding part)
6413 Protruding shape part 6414 Concave shape part 6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right side reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left side reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Top lid member (part of connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protrusion (part of the first light receiving means, part of the insertion part)
6521d Light-transmitting hole (part of the second light receiving means)
6521e Main body cylinder (part of optical conduction part)
6522 Flange part (extracted boundary surface part)
6540 compartment unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Fastening after guidance (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c protruding rib (part of restraining means)
6548 Transparent lining member (part of restraining means)
6550 Board guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate (part of the outer surface)
6554a Screw-in part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 partition member (first member, part of first means, part of accommodating means, part of partition means)
6562a Expansion hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large diameter cylindrical part (part of regulatory measures)
6570 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodating means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of facing part, part of suppressing means, part of notifying means)
6622 Contact avoidance recess (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illuminations substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guide means)
6731 Light receiving surface part (part of the second light guide means, part of the main body part, concealed part)
6732 Inner extension (part of frame)
6733 Outer extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of the first light guide means, facing extension)
6735 fin (part of the first light guide means, detached extension part)
6736 Insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (part of misalignment prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R Insertion hole (part of support)
18830 Illuminations board (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting part (part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 Streak part D24 End streak part (part of streak part)
E1 notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bent part)
V13, V14 gap

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a speaker and an LED (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-16588

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 for achieving this object is a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light. The means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine on the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the direction view of arrow VIII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in line XIVc. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front view exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device in the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. (A) is a side view of the slide claw member according to the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member. It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in the line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device in the direction view of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68A. Is. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the disk member, the ring member and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXXVa-LXXVa line of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame open with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which the components arranged below the window portion of the front frame are disassembled and shown. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a movable bundling member and a harness, (b) is a schematic upper view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a movable bundling member and a harness. It is a schematic back view schematically shown, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 96 (c). (A) and (b) are top surface schematic views of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member and a harness which schematically show a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 124 (a). It is the top view of the speaker assembly in the direction view of arrow CXXXIVc, and (d) is the partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in view of arrow CXXIVd of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXXV line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa of FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board which schematically show the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing the feeding state of the ball by the ball feeding device in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation device in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotating device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotating device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate, the side base material, and the second effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in tenth embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in 11th Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in 12th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member and the slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 203 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). (D) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member which schematically represents the upward concave part which is recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front view of the front frame. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib. (A) is a top view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right side view of the lower plate unit in the arrow L direction, and (b) is a left side view of the lower plate unit in the arrow R direction. It is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa of FIG. 229 (a), and (b) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit in the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. 229 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above effect device. (A) is a front view of the rear unit, and (b) is a front view of the illuminated substrate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination board, a back support member and an audio device in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241 and (b) is a partition member and an electric device in the CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination board, a back support member and an audio device in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 241 and (b) is a partition member and an electric device in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination board, a back support member and an audio device in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241 and (b) is a partition member and an electric device in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio apparatus. It is a side schematic view of the above effect device. It is sectional drawing of the rear side unit in the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line of FIG. 241 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the front side unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front side unit. (A) is a front view of the compartment unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit and the guided unit. (A) is a front view of the compartment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit. (A) is a front view of the board guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the board guide unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a section unit and a guided unit on the CCLIVa-CCLIVA line of FIG. 251 (b), and (b) is a section unit and a guided unit on the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. 251 (b). (C) is a cross-sectional view of a section unit and a guided unit in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of the transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member. It is a right side view of a transparent tubular member in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. It is a right side view in the L direction view of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of an optical transmission unit. FIG. 241 is a partial cross-sectional view of a rear unit, an audio device, and an optical transmission unit on the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first lighting unit, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit. .. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device. (A) is a front view of the base member and the illuminated substrate, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a right side view of the base member. It is a top view of the base member, (e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illuminated substrate in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line of FIG. 269 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the lining unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lining unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device in the CCLXVa-CCLXXV line of FIG. 274 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a light receiving member in the CCLXVb-CCLXXVb line of FIG. 274 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination substrate and the light receiving member in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line of FIG. 272 (b), and (b) is the base member in the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line of FIG. 272 (b). It is sectional drawing of the illuminated substrate and a light receiving member, (c) is the sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate and the light receiving member in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line of FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 5 is a schematic view of a base member, an illumination substrate, and a light receiving member schematically showing a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect device in the CCLXXXXVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic view of an illuminated substrate of the effect device in the direction view of the arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. 284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in 19th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in 20th Embodiment in the line corresponding to CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) formed in front of the game board 13 by being partitioned by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a manner in which the fingertip is arranged on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's viewpoint will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow IX of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it is invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341f arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly (FIG. FIG. Since the amount of light in (see 12) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of brightness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state Can greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist as an axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect a pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, and the like on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the region inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used and tilted. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 provided with ring members BR1 arranged at the left and right ends at the rear end (back end of the paper in FIG. 12) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and determining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged opposite to the lower frame member 320 and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member that is configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 that is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the above, and a semicircular receiving portion open upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, which is a tilting device 310. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 defines the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings so that the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311 gL and 311 gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311 gL and 311 gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is sized so that the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted, and the arm member is formed when the drive device 340 is operated. Through holes are formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape having an open portion on the front side and extending upward from the upper surface thereof. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move rearward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right sides.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the drive device 341f passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 has a vertical width as compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower bearing portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 includes a main body cover 351 that is vertically divisible and covers three directions except the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the lower end of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and whose vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, a left side detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351 and a right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged in such a manner that they are arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether or not the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14A. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having side fan-shaped openings at the top and bottom, and a lid on the upper opening of the case body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314 arranged in the above, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the shaft, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 15), and a stretch extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate 311h, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate. Mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j which is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 on a surface when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To be equipped.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push-in end (FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates to (see 23).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position where it is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 14 (a)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 14 (c)), the player can use it. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, and the player pushes the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b attached to the top plate member 312a. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical due to its positional relationship. While staying inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is formed in a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portion and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 forming a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 and the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is coaxially supported by the release member 346 and that operates relative to the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of causing the rotation, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of separating the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is bored at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right to form a U-shape in the top view and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged to face each other, and is a disk. A shaft support hole 341b that pivotally supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that is convex in the left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in a manner having a shaft parallel to the shaft of the shaft support hole 341b. , An extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor housing portion 341a, and a lighting support portion 341e thereof. It mainly includes an LED device 341f which is arranged at the upper end and has an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). As a result, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored at one end in a perfect circular shape, and at the shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b, and the like. Mainly prepared.

The cylindrical member 343a includes fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the fixing portion 343a2 on the right side is formed longer toward the center side than the fixing portion 343a1 on the left side. To. Here, the fixing portion 343a2 is specifically formed with a length capable of moving to a position where the movable clutch 343c does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b is a clutch in which a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which a cylindrical member 343a is inserted and an unevenness along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axial center from a surface arranged opposite to the movable clutch 343c. A unit 343b2 is provided.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and an unevenness along the axial direction at the circumferential position of the axial center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. It also includes a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having a top angle of about 100 °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is usually arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. As for the disc cam 344, the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are roughly mirrored, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR, so only the left disc cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. is there. In addition, in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, the state in which the drive device 340 is set to the first initial state is shown as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. The engaging rib 344c, which is projected inward as a rib having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding outward in the radial direction at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d which is projected in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer circumference is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in this embodiment), a second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and an angle θ3 (angle in this embodiment) from the second overhanging portion 344c3. θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. It should be noted that FIG. 21A shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and is pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) with a shaft support hole 346a. From the convex pin 346b which is formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c into which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d formed as a portion overhanging with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, since the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the convex pin 346b inside) and the end of the second spring SP2 are bored along the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 so as to be guideable. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21 (a)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while the engaging portion is in the large angle state. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 21B.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in which the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 24 Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is shown. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand that repeatedly strikes the tilting device 310 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The return of the spring is not in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, it was possible to deal with this by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and space saving cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310. To.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 310 can be quickly returned without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state is calculated in a predetermined period, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is used. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. As a result, the player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A.

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows that the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25, and the rotary claw member 347 rotates. The state in which the posture has changed is shown, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. 29. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is brought into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is moved forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, so that the releasing member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retractable portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises due to the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retractable portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 27). Return to the state shown in 25). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be seen from the player's point of view increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28). By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 28).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 is changed. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 28, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the rising direction, the shaft portion 311c Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 29) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 28. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs an oscillating operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is attached to the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation buttons simply vibrate, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 to determine whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Can only be grasped.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means. As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29) until the second overhanging portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346. By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state of FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, it rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. it can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a motion of reciprocating up and down (fanning motion) through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). In FIG. 32, the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and in FIG. 33, the state shown in FIG. 32 is shown. A state in which the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates is shown, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the disc cam 344 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The posture in which the 310 can be arranged in the second state (the posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state) can be set. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 is changed. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. 33, are tilted by the rotating claw member 347. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to create two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of the jackpot) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is operating up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 33, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion The 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state after the player pushes in the disc cam 344 without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 will be described. To do. According to this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In FIG. 35, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 34 is shown. In FIG. 36, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35, the forward rotation direction is reached until the disc cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The state of rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown, and in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retractable portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c becomes the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. It comes into contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotating claw member 347 stays and is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 35.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to disengage the engaging rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the disk cam 344 passes through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2 as described above.

Here, the player who pushes in the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of leaving his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. is there.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for causing the tilting device 310 to move up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 (See FIG. 14) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the states shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not rise due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. 37 The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate the plate cam 344 to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing the destruction of the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. In FIG. 38, the player's hand that grips and fixes the tilting device 310 in the second state is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is shown. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idle with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disc cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are used. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the third symbol display device 81 is notified so as to stop the gripping operation. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage to prevent a failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. Control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are realigned.

As a result, when the effect is produced by operating the tilting device 310, there is a gap between the operation of the tilting device 310 due to the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to produce an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 40. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in a manner of separating from the release member 346 as the state shown in FIG. 42 shifts to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c abuts on the releasing member 346 from below, but in this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, both of the first states shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42 appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movements after the first state is reached. Is a different operation of either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive noise due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be executed in the future, which may discourage the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves toward the first state from the state shown in FIG. 38 and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is changed. Since the directions are different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342 for the player. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In addition, in FIG. 44, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) as the posture of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 is in the manner shown in FIG. When the player moves up and down, even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. When the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310, it is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward from the position where the ascending is restricted) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether it was moving up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

FIG. 46 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 rotates with respect to the release member 2346 to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 46 (b) shows the release member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and their rotation as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). With the slide claw member 2348, which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , Is mainly provided. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape in which the slide claw member 2348 is slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. The hook-shaped portion 2348b is projected in a hook shape toward the left side of FIG. 45, and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 47 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted into the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower side surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed in the main body plate portion 2348e. As the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d is pushed to the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. The support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted is provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotating on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on a shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in a state of being arranged at an end position (46 counterclockwise).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the convex pin 2348d inserted through the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also decreases.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide and move due to the rotational operation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled when the angle is large. It doesn't move. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 47 shows a state in which the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 47. Is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the release member 2346 is rotated clockwise) and returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 disengages the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b due to the posture change of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will not be done.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a pre-reading means by associating the operation mode with the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, the operation device 2300 for the player The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 is raised by the magnetic force attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 by securing a large magnetic force. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from being raised by the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, lift the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in an embodiment.

As a result, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the ascending direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be determined. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311 gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilt device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311 gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and located at a position opposite to the right side detection piece 311 gR with respect to the surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR, and its extension length is shorter than that of the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. None (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side is inserted. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the pushing end to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is between the first state and the state arranged at the push-in end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324 L. The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. It is possible to effectively give a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is operating ascending rather than colliding.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52B, the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 is raised only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 showing the pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54 (a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54 (b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. The state in which the sensor 4321e is passed downward is shown. Further, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. It passes through 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the end of pushing, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle pushing operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e drive the voice coil motor 352 by the interval of the timing of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end is used as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. It is controlled in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is extruded in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310.

As a result, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so that the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310 after pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of producing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes and operates the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is attached to the lower frame member 5320. The drive motor 5411 for rotating the weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is eccentric is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibrating device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibrating device 5400 includes a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is composed of a flexible material. The flexible member 5420 and the flexible member 5420 are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately accommodated and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. Mainly includes 5430.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and pivotally supporting a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan on the rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 includes a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft projects.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side of the insertion side, and the main body 5421 in the assembled state. In addition to connecting between a pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 that are convexly provided on the left and right and downward sides in the radial direction, and rib-shaped leg portions 5422 that are projected left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a convex leg portion 5424 projecting in a pair of columns upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth formed at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger because the posture maintenance portions 5423 are arranged on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower ribbed leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is projected in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load at one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 is provided adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and the second accommodating portion 5412 in which the weight member 5412 is accommodated. It mainly includes a 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is adjusted from the upper surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 touches the bottom and the load applied during the insertion is released (assembly load release state). The depth is such that the convex leg portion 5424 projects.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to provide a flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension that is slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension that extends slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 under the assembled load state. To.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first region S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310, and the first region are pushed into the player by three degrees. The end area S52, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of the push-in, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be secured to the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (tilting to the left or right on the paper surface in FIG. 59 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the convex leg portion 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows an assembly load release state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the convex leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, when a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load release state and the assembly load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic restoring force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is pushed back. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is ascended only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the accommodating member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60B, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 under the assembly load state. Consists of acceptable aspects.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly cured. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and at uniform intervals to the left and right from the central axis. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the radial outer ends of the rib-shaped leg 5422 move outward on the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-leg 5422) as the flexible members 5420 move downward. It deforms in a manner of moving to the one with the smaller resistance) (see FIG. 60 (b)). In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially applied by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis. In b), a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal region S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61B) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move close to each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). The force to push back in the direction) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. The force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted by configuring the combination of the generated forces.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the start of contact with the convex leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is applied to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be lightened and the impact during the pushing operation can be mitigated satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is different due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 in order to alleviate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where its rotation axis is raised by a radius Ra upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located above the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be widened. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. The vibration can be transmitted to the player through. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembled load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the motor.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and immediately releases the hand (pulse pushing), the tilting device 310 is detected to be pushed and then vibration is generated. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration starts not in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and the preparation for vibration generation is completed, the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, the state in which the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in a central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L are formed in a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R has a support cylinder portion P1 extending in a tubular shape from the disc portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged at the center position thereof, and the support cylinder portion P1 in the axial direction. Along the shaft of a long hole recess C1 recessed from a disk portion in an axisymmetric long hole shape up to a position of about half of the extension distance, and a support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion in the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged so as to sandwich the elongated hole recess C1, and elastically deforms when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated hole recess C1 is formed so that the shape of the recessed cross section is slightly longer than the width dimension of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1.

Further, the facing surface of the elongated hole recess C1 is formed to engage with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

The holding arm portion A1 includes an engaging convex portion A1a that projects from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm toward the opposite side of the arm. .. The engaging convex portion A1a engages with the tip end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction when the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured for a long time.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis near the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side of FIG. 63B) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65B). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set to be longer than that in the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. Can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the fitting groove 5343a3 sandwiched from the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in the front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 that is a groove for fitting an e-ring and positioning the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and a fitting groove thereof. When the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, the engaging groove 5343a4, which is the groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages, is mainly used. Be prepared. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates into which the shaft support holes 341b are bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 afterwards to form a part where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, so that the e-ring is formed in the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent misalignment of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is located on the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4 to the position where the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them can be expanded. After that, when the tip end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically restored, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. Since they come into contact with each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted when a load for regulating the above is applied).

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in a direction in which the resistance is small, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On a surface parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65 (a).

FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67A. It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67A, in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to collapse. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is enlarged and shown. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 67A, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player is restricted from the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67A, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is shown by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67A, when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 67A due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. Since this misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disk cam 5344R, the drive motor can be driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (direction of arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the second spring is in a direction repulsive to it. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disk cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or the disc cam 5344 is operated regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344. Of any of the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased by the disc cam 5344. It can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of.

In the present embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed from a shape that is axisymmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole recess C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 68A, in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied and the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

FIG. 68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and tilted down by an angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting of the arm member 345, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disc cam 5344R also applies to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor. Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, since it is necessary to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle before the occurrence of the overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engaging rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65B), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 66 (b)). As a result, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is configured as a mirror image of the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the first embodiment, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL arranged in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and the disk member 6344L1. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially pivotally supported and rotates relative to a disk member 6344L1 is provided.

In the disk member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disk portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape in the axial direction. The annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convex along the ring rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and a ring shape having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. A lid plate portion 6344h that is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion thereof and is arranged on the outer side in the radial direction.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the central shaft portion 344a is formed by fitting the annular main body 6344g to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the annular body 6344g on the axial disc member 6344L1 side comes into contact with the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface is in contact with the disk member 6344L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations, the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation. , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a and its auxiliary pillar. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a deceleration transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. Mainly includes 6348c.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is composed of a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backflip direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (correctly). (1) A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) by 1/3 in a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 of the first embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c The relative relationship between the two can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disk cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 by the rotary claw member 347 and from the state shown in FIG. 72 by the rotary claw member 347. It can rise to (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and change the position to reach.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and configures the game machine in a manner in which the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height reached, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expected degree is maximized, the expected degree is reached. The magnitude of the above can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement that the player pushes in and operates the tilting device 310, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 is raised, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner can be suppressed.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members can form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. 74. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the LXXVa-LXXVa line, and FIG. 75 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R includes a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. The ring member 7344R2 inserted from the opening side of the ring member 7344R2 in the axial direction and the engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. Mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having the above.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR at a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape and an engaging rib. It is a member having a shape in which 344c is partially omitted (between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. 1 In the radial direction between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled and a fixing that is projected radially outward from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. It mainly includes a protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular elongated hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position deviated from the intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The second elongated hole 7432, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the elongated hole 7431 and the disc member 7344R1 from the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431. A return portion 7433 formed by projecting toward the second elongated hole 7432 side with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

The width direction (short direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outward of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is convexly provided, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. A thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the central portion is mainly provided.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. Thereby, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. As a result, in the assembled state, the engaging member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A), and the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). An arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77B) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and an extension thereof. It is arranged on the side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630 and the engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77B) from the extending tip of the portion 7620. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 is provided with a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof becomes. It is composed of an extension length that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The width direction of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a). c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 78 (e) is a side view. It is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 78 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. 78 (e) ) And FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f).

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an assembly error.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 until the position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d). Moving.

At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the engagement member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 are released from the vertical contact, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (Refer to FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. To do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned steps, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and others. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 80A, the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is obliquely scraped in order to minimize the interference with the engaging rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

79 (a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 starts to rotate. FIG. 79 (b) shows FIG. 79 (a). The state in which the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in) is shown, and FIG. 80 (a) shows the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end. In (b), the state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 81, the right disk cam is shown in the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a) and FIG. 80 (b), the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347 ( (Small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of projecting outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the side surface of the outermost diameter of the engaging member 7344R3, the angle between the releasing member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is small. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. The disk cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. It is arranged (see FIG. 80 (a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member A load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 by pushing the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344 from the 7346.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, and therefore, based on the rotation of the disk cam 7344. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged one equally divided recess 7522 to another different equally divided recess 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase with and is rotated relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. The engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is housed is displaced by one.

That is, by passing through the process shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the other unnecessary parts are not shown.

In FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other is shown, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is above the release member 7346. A state in which the descent is started by being abutted from the above is shown, and in FIG. 83A, a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82B is shown. In (b), the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (clock 82 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Will only be.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction is not generated, and the engaging member 7344R3 is radially outward from the time when the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 until it is separated. Keep overhanging. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state that is not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that is not visible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is moved up from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disk cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is shown. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 84 through the process described in FIG. 79. , A state in which the disc member 7344R1 is rotated relative to the equally divided recessed portion 7522 by one portion is shown. In both FIGS. 84 and 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 hits the engaging portion 346d. The state of contact is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. 2 Move to a state where it sinks below the state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 immediately reaches (without rotating the disk cam 7344) by the ascending operation can be changed from the first state. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 open with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of. In FIG. 90, for convenience, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The members may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side in front view. It can be rotated forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is rotated when viewed from the front. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 so that they cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided so as to be exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the inner frame 12 with the metal plate having holes), the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column is larger). Is pivotally supported by being fitted onto the support pin 19a (which has a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed by a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is formed by fastening and fixing various members (illumination portions 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 is a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than that of the window portion 14c and having transparency, and these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin in an annular shape slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the double glazing. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. The illumination units 8029 to 8033 are lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls is insufficient, and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members formed of punching metal) are provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged vertically.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

It is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area for the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17, or may be provided in a plurality of places, and is a push button type switch as an operation method. However, information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 92) and.

At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving port portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 joins the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed as follows.

On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the upper left and right corners and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic substrate to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is arranged is arranged, and the electronic substrate and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h that communicates with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal boards of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 600 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126), the positional relationship is such that the device faces the upper side in the front-rear direction, and can be brought into contact with each other depending on the situation.

The back side of the front frame 14 is a container-shaped member formed of a resin material with the front side open, and is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross-sectional area decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a forming the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. It is composed of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 like the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173a on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. , A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the position change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is an upward extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), and a part of the main body frame 14a, which is the front frame. On the rotation base end side of 14, an inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion formed of a resin material and opens downward, is arranged between the vertically long plate portions.

The reverse cup portion 178 is a portion for taking measures against fraudulent acts performed by, for example, illegally expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heat and the long cover member can pass through the reverse cup portion 178. It also melts 173. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact (close) with each other on the surface. Further, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the gaming area.

Further, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits the cheating through the piano wire from becoming large. Therefore, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the intrusion of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the cheating before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is assumed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window 14c), the operation of inserting the piano wire deeper is naturally performed by a person who cheats (piano wire). Can be done (without suspicion that the insertion is not working). Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and attempts to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is provided with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one on the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a substrate 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is installed. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side are opened toward the back side so that one end thereof can communicate with the through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. To.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the plate passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened with the game balls stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls spill out is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different, so the board is separated. This is due to the intention of preventing malfunctions in advance.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the constituent members arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and shown, and FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below 14c.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, it is the front side of the upper plate 17, and diagonally upward to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width that is about the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 has a main body bending portion 371 formed into a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side while being fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right end portions, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left and right central portion and the left and right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to be viewed from the front. A plate-shaped member that closes the opening surrounded by the hanging portion 372 formed in a shape, the main body bending portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the main body bending portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. A translucent portion 373 that is fastened and fixed to at least one of the two, a left flat support portion 374 that is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface that is formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. Mainly a right-side plane support portion 375 and a support groove 376 which is a groove recessed from the back surface side in the right-side plane support portion 375 and whose recess width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side. Prepare for.

The front side edge of the main body curved portion 371 has a rounded curved shape, and the back side edge portion has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate is in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 17 in the front-rear direction and the rear left edge portion 371a that are connected to the rear left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 and are above in the assembled state. The back middle edge portion 371b that comes into contact with the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction and the back middle edge portion 371b are continuously provided on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball lending operation portion 40. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball lending operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body and supports the operation handle 51, and is between the hanging portion 372 and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The recessed portion 372 is formed by screwing a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operating device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs that irradiate light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) and 2 LEDs that irradiate light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Each placed.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. To do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then transmits light. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed according to the change from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 comes into contact with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illumination unit 8031 can be suppressed.

The right flat surface support portion 375 comes into contact with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illumination unit 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 8031, 8032 is used. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illumination portion 8031, the illumination portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illuminated portion 8032 is in a state of entering the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front end of the right flat support portion 375. The position with and matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing portion for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The main body frame 14a is sandwiched and fixed to the main body frame 14a), and the passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is sandwiched and fixed to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like), and the metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

The sheet metal member 150 has a front frame even if a passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a wire or a piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted). It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the 145, but also when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. Can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to make a through hole. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear is reduced (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the vertical position of the position where it is to be.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left and right long plate members. There are through holes 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member, and screws are formed above and below the through holes 156, and screws for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 are inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored vertically in a portion (left end) overlapped on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end rather than the through hole 156. Mainly includes an opening / closing restricting portion 159 projecting to the back side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is projected to the back side in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. A protruding portion 148a and a screwing portion 148b formed as a screwable hole for a screw to be inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Mainly prepare.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operating portion back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is bored and the lower edge at a right angle. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that can come into contact with the wall portion 158a vertically and horizontally.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening / closing restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and details will be described later. Under a predetermined condition, it has an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by coming into contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. The strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability by forming the plate thickness).

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting unit 159 is not a part of the operation unit back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a from another member to the back side. It may be composed of a metal part extending to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is formed of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is arranged further on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are erroneously locked when the opening / closing restricting unit 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

As a path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 which is configured in a substantially case shape. Since this is difficult, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels unwell about the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to be sprinkled with drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) fail. There is a risk of

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since the components are separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion. It is not a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps), pass through the inside of the operation device 300, and go below the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), a liquid such as drinking water is sent to the drive motor 342. It can be hung directly and can be prevented from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that a liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other parts are covered by the bottom plate portion 321, the drinking water or the like may be exposed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows down to the front side and downward due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from overwhelming the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

FIG. 93A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93B, the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and are extended to the left from the upper end of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are up to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to the respective lighting units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) are once arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed to the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 that is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the side surface on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side to be arranged facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184 that are arranged on the side surface) and can lock the binding arm portion 183 and a pair of binding arm portions 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing portion 185 that extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and has an opening.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (with high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole through which a screw is passed in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and having the extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96A), and a portion arranged above the support plate portion 181d. A cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened is mainly provided.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of detent convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and it is possible to determine the posture of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing with respect to the plate member 14d.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from sliding downward by narrowing the distance between the extending end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area of the region accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) is secured while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is fitted in the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to fit the movable arm portion 182. Axial support (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the plane OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape, which are connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a, are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting to the shaft is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls gradually becomes shorter as the distance from each other approaches the plane OS1, and when the plane OS1 is reached, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that is not intended for elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) intended for elastic deformation depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portion 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and a wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately arranged at equal intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 184a, and has an opening width wider than that of the large opening 184a. It mainly comprises a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is desired to be locked with respect to the locking portion 184, the size (tightening condition) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the small opening 184b side. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of 14.

In addition, in FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), the state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range) is shown, and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show. In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing in the vertical direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 at the time of opening and closing.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it is extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. The shape of ~ HN3 can be adapted to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96B and 96D, the shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97A and 97B, a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematic. As an imaginary line, a member fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically illustrated by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also centered on the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since the frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 (FIG. 96). b), also see FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed through the vicinity of a vertically long metal portion (a portion in FIG. 96 (d) with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by arranging the harnesses HN1 to HN3 so as to forcibly bypass them, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from approaching the rotation tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are fitted when the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to improve the fit (which is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, in the case where the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire advances toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraud from gaining the profit of fraud.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to facilitate illegal winning), the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. It is possible to prevent the ball from being fired against a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, so that it is possible to prevent the illegal benefit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that a person who commits fraudulent acts will not be able to collect the bills and the remaining amount of balls inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to exert a deterrent against cheating.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity is performed without leaving the seat, so that the game machine store side can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the game machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed. As a result, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end of the ball guide opening 53 is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) on the right side of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50, respectively. The S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 are provided so that the extension direction faces (switches) at least once on both the left and right sides.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), so that the vertical dimensions of the game area and the effect area can be increased. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (when the 50-minute lower plate runs out of balls, remove the balls from the Senryo box). A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress) can be configured by being required to replenish.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension directions are bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and they are common. It has features. That is, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and the second bending on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 are arranged with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. , Equipped with. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, among the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. The proximity walls Nc and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc are mainly provided, and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The approach wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small-diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the distance between the gap Nin and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach route for the wire HM that is illegally inserted, a route that proceeds to the upstream side of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side with the ball guide opening 53 as the entrance can be considered. A person who commits a fraudulent act will proceed while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 upside down, the wire HM can be made to enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent further progress of the wire HM, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. it can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further advances, if the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM projects in a downward position, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the gaming area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device such as the above to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit by obtaining an illegal payout ball.

It will be described back to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the spheres flowing down the ball removing passage 147 are arranged in the merging area CE, the spheres flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the merging flow path CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 in the vertical direction. The left-right width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 projects downward toward the front side.

In the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage portion 145a is positioned with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the aisle portion 145a is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set larger in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when the spheres stay in the foul ball passage portion 145, the number of spheres that can be retained can be increased because a plurality of spheres can be arranged in different positions in the front-rear direction upstream of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the merging region CE at the same time, so that the spheres can reach the merging region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and engaging.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. From the inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c which is extended in a plate shape toward the back surface side and is curved so as to extend upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the foul ball receiving portion 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

As a result, the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

Since the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a), the outer shape of the foul ball passage portion 145 is larger than that. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIGS. 100 and 101, a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is shown.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long on the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illumination portion 8031 and the illumination portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 do not need to be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, respectively. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400 after fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. It is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other to the left and right by the configuration in which the portions are sandwiched and fitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frames. The state decomposed from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is formed in a recessed portion 462,482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole formed in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, which is FIG. 108 and FIG. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction are fastened and fixed, and the main body frame is formed. It mainly includes vertically long plate-shaped support plate portions 510 that are fastened and fixed to 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted into the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. (See FIG. 86), a fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the substrate member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of facing the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115B), the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are oriented in the left-right direction. Can be suppressed from collapsing. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extension portion 511a is displaced to the right side by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extension portion 511a is displaced. The outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the back side end portion as a surface substantially located on the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end of the support plate 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate 510. It comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide member 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 107 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It enters the 540 and exits from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the inflow and outflow of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting the screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screws to the back fastening portion 527.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screws to the back fastening portion 556.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate portion 510 from the front side in the fastening preparation state, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, after the protrusion 566 is inserted through the pin support hole 515, the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down by the amount of the misalignment with respect to the support plate 510 to eliminate the misalignment and easily fasten. Can be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), and has an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that is opaque to light and a resin material thereof. It includes an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R comes into contact with the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L and the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, and the front side end portions are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction and light. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a non-transmissive resin material. It mainly includes an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In addition, FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. , Inserted into the lower fastening portion 523, which is arranged at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, the plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and the inner lens member 530 is formed longer than the short fastening portion 525. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 which are inserted into the main body plate portion 521 and are projected from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wavy shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. To be equipped.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that contacts (matches the shape) the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged in a posture of inclining to the left toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect of light can be made different for each opening 524.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface with a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. It includes a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four locations above and below, and function as a window for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right in the design shape between the above-mentioned boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a wave shape in which the front end portion 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in the shape of a vertically long plate substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. Will be done.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is bored in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. It also has support holes 531b and 531c through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screws are fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied in the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned with each other.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and has a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending to the right from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (front end portion in top view). (Triangular shape with the tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is turned to the left and right via the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. To. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing the light from the so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to be emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are dispersed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against a resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Examples thereof include resins, polystyrene-based resins, and AS resins (acrylic nitriles, styrene copolymer compounds). Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain a light guide member 540 having a high average brightness and a small decrease in the brightness distribution.

In the present embodiment, the light guide member 540 is set to have a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front end portion is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 and is formed to the left and right. Is also formed from a wavy wavy shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. The degree of wavy shape is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design in which distortion after thermal bending is small, practical mechanical characteristics are maintained well, and three-dimensional degrees of freedom can be imparted. ..

The details of the wavy shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but it is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. It has a wavy shape that is located to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot-bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C. It is made by pressing the base material against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not deformed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 is inserted with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560. Mainly includes a fastening portion 542 to be formed.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The back side end portion of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the back side end portion of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An outer cover that projects to the right in a region surrounded by an inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and the plurality of insertion holes 553. An overhanging portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a protrusion from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced from the front side end portion of the light guide member 540 to the front side. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is projected toward the front side at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protrusions fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The installation portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 on the side opposite to the light guide member 540, a bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) that bulges in a semicircular shape in a side view toward the front side is vertically arranged. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be in a strip-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged on the outer lens member 550, but not on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws. it can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved according to the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The 540 and the main body plate portion 551 come into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 114 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction of being arranged so as to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 from being displaced from each other, and the light is accurately incident from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be made to.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 are receiving surfaces capable of accepting the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastened portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a formed with a slightly larger vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. At the front end of the inner cover member 520, it is a receiving surface that can accept the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a vertical width thereof. It is formed in a long hole shape with a long width and a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the main body plate portion 561 to the back surface side.

The upper fastening portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 comes into vertical contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stablely supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted inside (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

A method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 112 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a).

It should be noted that FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the convex portion. The state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112 (b)). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front side end portion of the right panel unit (front side of the light guide member 540 from the front side surface). Since the number of screws for fastening and fixing the light can be reduced, and thus the area where the light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It can be easily made visible in a strip shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. By applying a load to the optical member 540, the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L are inserted. The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R constitutes a surface that is parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that allows contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are respectively fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and at least two procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure. ..

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing to the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, assembling and disassembling can be performed in two procedures, so that the operator performing maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 in either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the work time can be shortened.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid together in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid with each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is disassembled. It is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that travel inside the 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are fastened to the front surface. By making it difficult to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel inside the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. Note that in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the plane of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 toward the opening 524 can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at a position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for directing by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as the boundary. It can be provided, and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top, corresponding to the increase in the vertical width as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is smaller. , It is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be produced can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of light that can be visually recognized as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equivalent to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower opening 524 can be strengthened, the light production can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be seen by the player. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 that faces the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, and the width of the opening 524 that faces the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, among the 524 openings, the lower opening 524 is formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, in a place where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is collected. In a place where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emitting mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114B are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the area KE is defined as a band-shaped area extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE is adjacent to the lower end of the opening 524 below it. Matches the top edge of. Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 512a in the front-rear direction to the region KE travels in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114 (c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light condensing action is reduced, the light is visually recognized by the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by forming the light guide member 540 into a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface in the region KE, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. Durability can be improved.

Further, by forming the convex shape to the left side in the region KE, the concave shape can be formed on the right side, and the portion where the light is diffused and the portion where the light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding part (the part corresponding to the area KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, an effect of light that cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the jackpot expectation of the effect to be high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of eye fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the player can play for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the player who is cheating is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the player who is cheating can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and has the same gradient in the horizontal direction over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes long, the taper is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the portion near the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is larger than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives the light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531b is increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. As a result, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the foremost surface (small difference in strength). )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LED 512a that generates the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, the player can visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not right beside but on the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (See the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b). The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) are arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. A unit fitted to (see) and supported from below, which is located at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 100) and the front surface of the upper frame member 410. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , Is mainly provided. Note that in FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The contained LED emits light to produce a light effect.

The lighting unit 401 is a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back surface side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back surface side in a tubular shape and is inside the tubular shape. A tubular portion 405 whose shape is formed so as to penetrate the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Is mainly provided.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. This is the part that improves sex.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical displacement of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 vertically is formed in a recess on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed with the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and is formed of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 that is fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where it projects from the opening 414 to the front side. It is mainly provided with a lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back surface side to prevent the lens member from falling off to the back surface side and constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that is arranged to face the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 formed through a slightly large inner shape and an opening 414 formed through the upper right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in a wavy shape substantially the same as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted with the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring extending through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. As a result, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible when viewed from the front. The LED 14e2 is arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side on the lower right corner surface, and a concave portion from the back side on the lower left corner surface. The supported groove 418 to be supported, the fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that the screw can be screwed in, and the second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in the upper and lower positions. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state thereof (see FIG. 86). ), The load (weight, etc.) given by the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight, etc.) given by the lamp can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. The expansion rib 419a is provided.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a part sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with ribs having the same shape at three positions at 120 ° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is a fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and a recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at a lower position of the main body member 411. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape on the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and a wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward from the extending end portion and forming an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421. It is mainly provided with an opening 424 composed of a plurality of small-diameter through holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left and right center positions (upper end positions of the curved shape) and penetrate in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside) in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings in the speaker assembly 450 for passing vibrations generated toward the front side.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is visible to the player through the opening 414.

FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. At the lower end, it is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an audio device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 to form a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. After forming a space between the front assembly 460, which is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front assembly 460, which is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in front view, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). Mainly includes a side assembly 480.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits a directing sound in connection with the game. One end of the speaker 451 is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the terminal of the speaker connecting wire 453. By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the speaker lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. It is possible to reproduce and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body portion 461 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and has an open back side, and a plurality of recesses formed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width. 462 and the extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside in the vertical width. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end portion of the main body portion 461 to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and the main body portion 461. A through hole 466 that is circularly penetrated through the speaker 451 on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and rear. A connection hole 469 through which a plurality of fastening portions 468 for fastening and fixing the screws inserted in the side assembly 480 and screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. And a front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 has a base end side main body portion 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed as a region divided in the left-right direction, and the base end side main body portion 461B on the left-right central side (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body 461T connected to the center side of the intermediate main body 461M in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 121). The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between them and the rear side assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion (an edge portion on which a flange or the like is not formed on the inside) without a barb on the inside.

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screws inserted through the through holes 463a are inserted into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a, and the through holes 483a and the through holes 483a of the rear assembly 480. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened as the screw is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between them (the resin material is sandwiched and fastened and fixed to the hard material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in the front and rear, and is bent a plurality of times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). It is a rib that forms. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is provided with a main body 481 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and the front side is open, and a semicircular tip from the upper and lower edges of the main body 481 toward the center of the vertical width. A plate-like extension plate extending from the back side edge of the plurality of recessed portions 482 and the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 from the vertical width outward. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side, and a through hole through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction are formed. A plurality of through holes 488 and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction are mainly provided.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape to the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. The front side wall portion 481H is formed from a shape that is internally fitted to the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position that sandwiches the wiring pressing convex portion 484 on the left and right at intervals that allow the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and penetrates the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width of being fitted in the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connecting wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, by passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connecting line 453. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the speaker connection line 453.

The light passing through hole 485 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same positions as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 123) that bends by rotation. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and it may bend to the left or right, the compressive force does not work well and there is a possibility that the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, the back surface is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). It can be reinforced with the strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424 It is placed at a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), for ease of understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 arranged to face each other face each other. Is shown in the unfolded state toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the center of the left and right sides of the paper, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the acoustic chamber is inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the base end side main body 461B of the front assembly 460. It is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately vertically arranged toward the left side. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are provided at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed during assembly. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e. Can be done.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear side assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly, but in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws avoids the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is left (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side) and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U directions).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) closest to the left and right direction. , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent in the vertical direction. It is possible to secure a longer traveling path length of the oscillating wave Ws as compared with the left-right width of the space.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the oscillating wave Ws passes through the openings formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and the generation of the standing wave by the oscillating wave Ws is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be caused by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 472 and located on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the (arrow L, U direction).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b also have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are formed at a plurality of locations (this) alternately up and down toward the left side. In the embodiment, the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are arranged at five locations).

Since the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity of the main body portion 481 is strengthened by the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e. Can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See), they are arranged facing each other in the front-back direction.

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be caused by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b located above the recessed portion 482 and located on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrows L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482, 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output is output from the back side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) travels to the tip side main body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially opens an opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, and an opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420. As you can see, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back portion of the speaker 451 is an opening and an opening 424 formed by the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portions 471 and 491. Since it is in direct contact with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 via (see FIG. 120), the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 should be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being disturbed. Can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471,491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect, and can raise the player's interest in and excitement for the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws as a path for avoiding the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is stipulated. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (sound). ) Sound can be tuned.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purposes. It is arranged in a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced, and the fastening portion 468 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

Further, the extension plates 461 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the expansion rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and the rib portions 467c and 487c, respectively. The 467d and 487d are arranged on the extension plate 433 and 483 side of the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the fastening portion 419 is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 436 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other to bring the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 and the rear. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing with 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from the plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is a front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passing recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451 so that the wire or piano wire It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the locations where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such fraudulent activity is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent activity can be lowered, and it is easy to prevent the profit of the fraudulent activity.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). is there. In addition, in FIG. 124 (a) and FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is shown. Is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. The outer surface 481Ho (upper surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and is fitted to the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that. As a result, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so that the rib portions in contact with each other have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed) in the intermediate main body 461M as compared with the tip side main body 461T. As a result, the acoustic effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the front end side main body 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body 461M. It is largely secured in a mode that bulges in the front-rear direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip-side main body 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip-side main body 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear the deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 124 (a).

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fixed to the fastening portion 419 by the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a, so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the rear assembly 480 are fixed. This is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), whereby the front assembly 460 and the rear are assembled. It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back surface side is arranged inside). Then, at the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the playback output is output from the speakers 451 arranged in the other speaker assembly 450R and 450L. It is possible to avoid conflict with the sound to be played, and to reproduce the reproduced sound with high quality as a transparent sound without disturbing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 125 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e on the entire surface, but is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and in contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin), but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that is done.

For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be arranged, or a glass member may be arranged. A member made of concrete may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, the sound can be thickened.

Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like are applicable. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of spikes, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450.

For example, when arranging it on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, is arranged between the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the tightening of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the members (loads applied to each other) and adjust the sound effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) and the connecting hole 469 thereof. The upper side is provided by a through hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in shape and a screw inserted into the through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right positions where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be screwed is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to fasten and fix the screw. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to the relationship between the main body frame 14a which is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. In FIG. 127 (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated from each other in the front-rear direction for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13 and a cup shape in which the central portion is open. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a form a tapered shape that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa of FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) are board surface support devices 600. It is a side view of the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 which schematically showed the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, some configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 is first temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is adjusted. The portion is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128A, the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated about an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). Rotate it so that it approaches the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is mounted in an assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the leading edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (a portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to evacuate from the route, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotating claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by changing to a fixed state. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum. Therefore, according to the principle of leverage, the rear claw member 640 is rotated via the game board 13. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened due to the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). When the right end of 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed in to close the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. Is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end portion on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower surfaces are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, one board support device 600 will be described and the other board support 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 130 (a) and FIG. 130 (b), the fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board surface support device 600 is used. The release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is shown. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 can rotate to a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A regulated front claw member rotatably supported by a rotating front claw member 620 that is pivotally supported and a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the rotating front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620. It mainly includes a 630 and a rear rotation claw member 640 that is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is arranged on the back surface side of the front rotation claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620.

The frame member 610 consists of a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. On the back side of the support hole 612, the arc recess 614 is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along the arc centered on the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615 and a pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615, which extend from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and are fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). Mainly includes a fixing plate 616 of the above.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed. , Fixed in the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged to face each other on the left and right sides and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and the plate portions 621a that penetrate the plate portions 621a in a straight line. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports that are formed through a straight line on the back side of the plate portion 621a and the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. Mainly provided with a hole 624.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the regulated front claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation claw member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides, and is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction and an extension portion 621a2 that extends in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. The back-side extension plate 621c is extended by tilting downward by about 45 degrees with respect to the plate portion 621a, and extends vertically from the back-side end of the extension portion 621a2 toward the plate portion 621a on the opposite side. The front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d and the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. And mainly prepare.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The back surface extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)), while the torsion spring is in the process of changing the state to the fixed state. By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb begins to come into contact with the main body plate portion 611.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the claw member 640 after rotation is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined from the lower end to the front side. 633, and a curved surface 634 formed to be curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a are mainly provided.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion that is arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby restricting the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. Mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the tilt angle is such that the back surface of the game board 13 is in contact with the surface. It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), the cover members 171 and the board support device 600 are fixed to the multi-function cover member 171 and the board support device 600 which are arranged close to the board support device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, FIG. 134 (a) shows the released state of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) shows the fixed state of the board surface support device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by simply pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the fixed position after rotation.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulation front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is regulated by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 620 The front side on which the extension portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the front claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, while the regulation rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a, which is the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIG. 134 (a)). (Up to 135 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

In the angle range (the range between FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a)) in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates, the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630 is relative to the regulated front claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the attitude change of the regulated front claw member 630 when operating due to the downward load changes the attitude toward the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). Since it becomes a posture change), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, so that the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 without the game board 13 being pushed inward.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from rotating due to the downward load being applied to the regulated front claw member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extension plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Here, in the case where the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the rotation front claw member 620 is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it may occur.

Assuming that the board support device 600 stabilizes at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the distance between the two will be shortened and the game will be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 by the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the rotating front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 and the regulated front claw Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135A, the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotating front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotating front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the clerk to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, the game board 13 is 90% stable. In this case, the case where the front frame 14 is not closed is solved, and in this case, a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14. The board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so as to abut the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 on the board surface support device 600 in the released state (FIG. 134 (a). ), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640 after rotation, and the front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135A, the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d. Therefore, the rotating front claw member 620 via the rotating rear claw member 640. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb given to the player is given as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resistive portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is located from the portion that contacts the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) toward the portion that contacts the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius of the biaxial member P62 is gradually increased.

As a result, when the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the rotating front claw member 620 is rotated to displace the second shaft member P62, The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 135 The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship of being separated from the regulation front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 in the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not come into contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is the multifunction cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward on the front surface to rotate the regulation front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the regulation front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-rear position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back surface extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are released.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other in the vertical direction. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the operation of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630. The amount of displacement of 640 is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and the rotation front claw member 620. It is possible to displace in the direction of widening the angle between the rotation and the claw member 640.

Therefore, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the displacement amount of the front claw member 620, so that the game board is supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. The displacement of the front-rear position of 13 can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 on the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 136, the release state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board surface support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but when the game board 13 is arranged, the front frame 14 is closed. Is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is released, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulation rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 138 counterclockwise direction) are opposite, so that the reaction force becomes excessive, so it is difficult to do with a normal load. As described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing restricting unit 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated by the action of the regulation rod 615. The direction (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (FIG. 138 counterclockwise direction) are not opposite, and can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above. Yes (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 can be pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159, and the board surface support device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. In addition, in FIGS. 140 and 141, a state in which the cover member for closing the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12 is shown.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then inverted back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 143 (b), the back side of only the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The shaft is rotatably supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) that partially covers the front surface of the 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. It mainly includes a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the posture of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. 718 and a plurality of positioning convex portions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted in the right corner portion, and a locking portion 713 in which the hook portion 723 can be locked on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. The convex portion 714, which is projected to the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 in the closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) of the cover member 721 are arranged to face each other. It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. It mainly includes a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, the ball launching unit 112a can be repaired (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) before the failure occurs.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the base member 711, a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). It mainly includes a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state with an allowable state that allows the flow to the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722. A ball-passing opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 arranged in a positional relationship slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball-passing opening 724. Mainly includes a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not it is present, a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generating solenoid 741, and a ball. A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward as the distance from the ball passing opening 724 is increased, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. It is mainly provided with a regulated overhanging portion 745 which is extended by a sufficient interval and whose extending end projects toward the sphere passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and includes a flow plate portion 724a that inclines downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction. The rib portion 724b, which is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like shape and is inclined downward as the extending tip surface toward the back side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c which is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the sphere P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in a manner separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged so as to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. It is possible to prevent the member 725 from colliding with the member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. It is formed as a long hole along the direction and has a straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the through hole 731a for passing the fastening screw and the bulging portion 716a. The regulation groove 731b is formed in a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731 when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716. It can be slid along the straight line to be output, whereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P81 (the firing intensity when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and is a base with screws inserted into mounting holes 732 formed in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. It is attached to the member 710.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and comes into contact with two front and rear positions on the peripheral surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the sphere P8 upward. It is configured to guide you.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the ball by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c), the cover member 721 is not shown in order to facilitate understanding.

In the ball feed device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats above the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts on the front side wall of the foundation member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the foundation member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclination portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with an acute-angled tip is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Mainly includes an upper blade portion 725c extending from the above.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and allowed to enter will be described.

146 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a), and FIG. 147 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after launching the ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of some constituent members of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge portion of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current is passed through the launching solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs, so that the sphere P8 is given a launching force and the sphere P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a)). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. , It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by utilizing the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture that is closer to the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the thread Y8 moves while being pulled by the ball P8 that rolls on the launch rail 730 through the lower side of the flow plate portion 724a, and the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 is the flow plate portion 724a. Since it moves along the upper surface, the thread Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c that overhangs the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. ..

When the player holds the front end (other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is loaded by applying a load due to the firing of the ball P8 to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, it is possible that the thread Y8 is not sufficiently pulled and the thread Y8 is not cut. However, in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and that of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The composition of is almost the same.

The effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (an operation including at least one of an operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The drive side arm member 910 that rotates by being pivotally supported by the back plate 1100 and the driving force of the drive motor 921 is transmitted via the arm gear 924, and the drive side arm member 910 are driven. The drive motor 921 that generates the driving force, the transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910 are interlocked with each other. On the left and right opposite sides of the thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction, the thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal operation device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the central main body of the support base material 801 to the right of the upper end portion, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 801P is bored at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801 and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P, extending rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes and inside. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which the detection arc plate 880d of the free fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion that constitutes an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion that constitutes an region below the upper portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly vertically as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later, the support base material 801 is arranged so as to be movable up and down. The operating space can be reduced when the 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P, respectively, as described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer circumference of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, it can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. It is arranged to the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the support base material 801 from being separated from the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 via the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. The plate-shaped flat plate member 803 is provided on the back surface side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the peripheral edge also has an irregular shape in front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and are molded into substantially the same shape, although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, so that the specific color (red) becomes darker on the outer peripheral edge without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, a vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and a radial center portion, respectively. There is.

The petals 802 are from the rear side portion 802a rather than the rear side portion 802a arranged on the tip rounded side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, the right side of the paper surface in FIG. The front side portion 802b arranged on the pointed tip side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side 802a is stacked on the back side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to the five petals 802 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge portion extends forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending rearwardly in a cylindrical shape and having a screw hole inside are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 (in the lateral direction).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls of each flat plate member 803 in the circumferential direction (short direction), and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screwed portions 802S of the petal 802, and the petal 802 is provided on the front side. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 from the front, and the screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby the flat plate member 803 is brought into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 156. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction at two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding the two locations. The positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five locations where the screwing portion 813S having the screw hole is integrally formed. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 814 has only an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this way, a set consisting of three slits, the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). Each end of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in the front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are the slits on both sides. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose centers coincide with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the pair consisting of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed more closely so as to be close to each other inward, which also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. However, as described above, when the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged so as to extend along the inclined direction D12, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the slit member 810 can be arranged accordingly. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is small at both ends of the slide member 820 so that the tip portion has a semicircular shape in front view. The center of the extending portion to be molded, the central portion where the thickness is larger than that of the effecting portion at the position between the extending portions, the screw insertion hole 821 bored in the extending portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that is projected from the front side to the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. To be equipped.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is in a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles with the central slit 814. And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In the fully fitted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, respectively, and are screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are almost along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is in a position facing a certain outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so that it slides in.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 of the rotating plate 830, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side of the rotating plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and is formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a shape in which a peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to be closed in a loop shape elongated in front view. It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to drop.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the clockwise direction in the front view along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and thereafter. The rotating plate 830 extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape in the clockwise direction of the front view from the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

On the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward in a peripheral wall shape from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and having teeth on the outer peripheral surface is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably pivotally supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161A, the third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the second gear 830G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , It is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, there are three locations on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screwing portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is provided at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and has a positioning boss with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. Positioning is performed by inserting 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and fixing is performed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to separate.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the central axis rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the supporting base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a lumen portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth is formed. Around the inner cavity portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two screw holes on the left and right sides of the inner cavity portion 856, and a front screw-in portion 857 having screw holes inside, and the front screw-in portion 857 to the inner cavity portion 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, and extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 to the inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at a position equidistant from both rear screwed portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to project rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

The LED substrate 861 is formed with screw insertion holes 862 and positioning holes 863 at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and screwing the screw into the front screwing portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location in the center and a large number of locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around the one location. Each of the LEDs 865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

Lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decorative member 868 is made of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, extending from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a columnar shape, and a screw can be screwed into the central portion. A pair of screw-in portions 869 in which a screw hole is formed are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. The screwing portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is brought into contact with the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED substrate 861 sandwiched from the front side, and the screw is screwed into the screwing portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. A cylindrical member having a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and having a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 and a main body cylindrical member 883 rotatably and freely fitted to each other are mainly provided.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion formed and in which the screwing portion 883S is not formed among the above four locations.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in the outer diameter direction in a rib shape with the same protrusion length as the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at the intermediate position in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and is also axially projected. A sliding rib 883b extending over is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened portion, forms a cup shape with a bottom, and abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side, and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by irradiating light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion having a size capable of inserting the central decorative member 868.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161A, a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G. It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and screw insertion holes are formed around the pivot opening 880a at positions corresponding to two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a in the 880b.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880. Positioning is performed by inserting 883a (see FIG. 163) into the positioning hole 880c, and fixing is performed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and the photo is arranged so that the member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D can be detected. It is detected by the coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d can be detected regardless of the posture in which the fourth gear 880G starts rotating (minimum angle). 72 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and also from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear side screwing portion 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 so as to project forward, and as shown in FIG. 154, the slit member 810 is attached to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged by the screwing portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b at eight points along the circumferential direction, so that the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 is formed. The slit member 810 is in linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the 813, so that the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is formed. It is supported smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by applying a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the innermost deepest part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the above, and the supporting elongated hole 1140 formed as an elongated hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 in between. Mainly prepared.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910, and is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right near the outer periphery at the front end portion thereof so that screws can be screwed into the support column 1110. A screw-in portion 1111 to be formed and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side in pairs on the same surface as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 which is convexly provided in a columnar shape with a step on the front side at a position closer to one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the elongated main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121, the second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and the second accommodating portion 1122 are arranged in opposite directions to the first accommodating portion 1121 and the drive side arm member. It mainly includes a third accommodating portion 1123 in which the arm gear 924 fitted with the 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line. Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is formed in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a supporting elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a supporting portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screw-in portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) that are formed in an elongated hole extending to the left and right so as to be slidably movable to the left and right by the lateral base material 1000S. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by the base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 at the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in the front view, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member to be fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150, the fastening plate portion 1001S which is arranged at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S is projected in a columnar shape toward the back side in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the long holes 931 to be supported, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner of the front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Mainly includes a ridge portion 1005S which is projected on the front side along an arc shape having the same center as the above.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip of the supported convex portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between the two, and in that state, a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 is screwed from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S to support the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the normal position, but is formed at a convex height that allows a contact when the second effect member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position. Will be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941, and is on the back side in the right corner portion in the front view. Axial support column 941 that is projected in a columnar shape and is axially supported by a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged close to the shafted support column 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. Part 942 and the like are mainly provided.

The shafted support column 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and is a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A screw-in portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S arranged at the tip of the shaft support support portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with a collar sandwiched between them. By screwing the screw into the lid member 945, the lid member 945 acts as a stopper. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip-side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces the vicinity of the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc concave portion 1004S to generate resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 that are configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and the arm gear 924 in a range of a predetermined angle in the out-of-diameter direction. The detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 overhanging the petal operating device 800, the shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports the collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates the urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800, and the support elongated hole. A cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in front view so as to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right of 1140, and a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden by the board cover 1000C in front view. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effecting member 940 with a slight distance from the second producing member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is missing, the screwed portion 1006S makes the second effect member 940. 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction. The 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. As a result, even when the heavy device called the petal operation device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910, it is easy to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIG. 168, FIGS. 170 and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900 and the back plate. 1100 is a front view, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 show a connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. (Refer to 151), it extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle rotation range), so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171 the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates in advance of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 in a manner of projecting toward the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, the second effect member 940 operates following the petal operation device 800. It can be visually recognized as if it were.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view which shows through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of a slit member 810 and a rotating plate 830.

175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 expands from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expansion shown in FIGS. After passing through the middle position, the expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the rotation operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position, and then the gathering operation (third operation) is performed. It is configured so that it can return to the initial position (gathering position) by performing operation).

At the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is the inner end (the end on the circular opening 811 side) of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810. As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. It is in a state of gathering that makes up the flowers.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c). By interlocking the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)), the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 can easily be fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof. As a result, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly linear from the inner end to the outside along the central slit 814. Guided by to move.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expansion operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination. Becomes faster.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. 177. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. ..

As the guide rail 832 is tilted clockwise in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Further, as the guide rail 832 is curved in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side with respect to the direction D15, the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed become more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823 to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the certainty of power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. , The structure is divided into roles.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially and becomes fully open, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. FIG. 178 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is subsequently locked to the outer end of the central slit 814. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before due to a small torque that is lower than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member The 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the front-view counterclockwise direction indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. In this way, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotary power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotating plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous without any delay. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view clockwise) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction in the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is formed. While being braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), whereby the expansion operation is performed. Is gathered in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit, to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit, in the central slit 814, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are moved from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the central portion. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the gathering state, and finishes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is further rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). It rotates clockwise in the front view in the gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the assembled state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this gathering operation to the rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift after a while, or to shift immediately so as to be continuous without a pause. It can also be.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is rotating.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by a wall on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent and formed toward the front side in a manner in which the notch 9145b is covered from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back surface side, and is upwardly generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes a thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. This is for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible fraudulent activities will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly launched, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146 to the other end of the thread Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that even if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the thread Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, thereby opening the ball P9 as a winning opening. It is possible to repeatedly pass through 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and it is possible to obtain an illegal profit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, a thin plate blade is passed through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed toward the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is brought when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. As a result, when the thread Y8 is pulled, the thin plate blade portion 9153 is prevented from warping or bending when an outward load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 of the foul ball passage portion 9145. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits cheating is afraid of discovering cheating, after grasping the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of pants). ), It is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around. While stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right, and the bottom opening arranged behind the ball pulling lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right-sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes. That is, since the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give the ball discharged to the lower plate 50 in the front-rear direction a velocity component in the right direction (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side), among the balls to be discharged, The proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8 can be increased.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side occupies a region of about two-thirds of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53. The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and a boarding restriction step portion is formed at the boundary. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated with. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the boarding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding regulation step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by a wall on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 184 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 185 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed from diagonally above left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2. Then, the sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side in a manner of covering the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). Radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to be convex from the side surface on the back surface side to the back surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius is about Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 collide with the ball P8 and crack or chip. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape that extends toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily inserted into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a portion constituting the bifurcated blade portion of 10153, and extends to the left in a manner of slightly ascending and tilting from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angled recess 10155 having an acute recessed deep portion is formed between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 can enter the acute-angled concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8 can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side as compared with the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraud. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portions connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are configured to abut on the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right opposite sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand and causing the ball P8 to flow back through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and be discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the opposite directions at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area is lengthened, so that the detection of fraudulent activity can be accelerated.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the thread Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a weak firing intensity and did not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment uses the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball receiving port 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is made of a resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have an arc shape similar to that of the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game region side. A guide member formed to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 having a width at which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a formed and arranged close to the ball launching unit 112a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b and.

A foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furniture, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In the present embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the permissible amount, the full tank switch (not shown) that is arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act as described above, in which balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c so that the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, by hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to project cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and to form a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance to the base member 68b1. A long screw B11 is inserted into the through hole drilled as the mounting hole and the through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position with the through hole, and in that state, the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that comes into contact with the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment). , About 1/3 below the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. Can be avoided. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball that rolls on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 with a closing plate 2062b4 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and a width (about 2 [mm] in the present embodiment) through which the thread can enter. It is recessed to the back side to the right position. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is provided with a notch 2062b3 for a semicircle on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed, so that the same method as described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment is performed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act through a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end (ball P8 is fixed) on the side of the thread Y8 protruding toward the player. Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball P9 toward the front side (see FIG. 182), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion that projects downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be switchable between ON and OFF when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) shows. The state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. Further, in FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch is shown. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the sphere flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. 190 (b), the sphere immediately flows away. Since the state shown in 190 (a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored by the timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at the shortest, 0.6 seconds later). Because it can be done.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that moves while filling the passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 191 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When advancing the tip of a device such as an endoscope in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball in the foul ball passage 2062c, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is dispelled. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is excluded by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the weight portion 68a2 is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long soft portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a2 is maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, it is possible to control so as to sound an alarm when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , Cheating can be detected early.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped as much as possible (see FIG. 190 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it is early. Can be exchanged for. As a result, compared to the case where the replacement member for the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraudulent activity even before the replacement and the trouble of forgetting the storage location and searching for it can be saved. The effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by the fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be arranged).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. It is possible to maintain the deterrence of fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the exchange has been carried out, and even if it has been exchanged, the degree of damage is unknown. it can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the free fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a flange portion 2887 thereof, as compared with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment. A regulation portion 2888 that protrudes from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 to the back surface side is provided. The free fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment has only a difference in the back cover 2886 as compared with the free fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment, and is provided with the same as the free fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The regulating portion 2888 projects to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the regulation portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operations of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. .. In addition, in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is shown in time series, and the simultaneous points are shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b), respectively. The state of is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 that change the posture by the action of the regulation unit 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other, centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that inclines in a manner away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulating unit 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a) (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are inclined. At petal 802, posture changes occur to the extent possible.

As the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 changes in this way, the load from the regulating portion 2888 is received, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), since the narrow slide rib 803a of the slide member 2820 only comes into contact with the slits 815 on both sides, frictional resistance is suppressed, and the slide member 2820 has slits 814 and 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a with the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T with the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed) increases frictional resistance. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the sliding member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance of the sliding member 2820 to the movement of the slits 814 and 815 in the longitudinal direction. The torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) without waiting (slide member 2820 in the normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the moving resistance of the sliding member 2820 and the moving resistance of the slide member 2820 in an inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operating device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 196 (a), FIG. 196 (b) and FIG. 197, the appearance of the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, the regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b as shown in FIG. 196 (b), and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 become the normal postures. Be returned.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and thus the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

The case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is in contact with the regulating portion 2888 has been described, but if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petal 802 can be moved to the fully open position and rotated at the fully open position, which is also possible in this embodiment.

Further, the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888 is such that the petal 802 slightly changes its posture even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position or at the petal 802 rotating at the fully open position. By setting the position so that the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be evacuated, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in the front view. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it serves as a mark as to whether or not the petal 802 passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. The difference in perspective can make a difference between the petal 802 expanding to the maximum and performing a rotational operation, and the petal 802 expanding halfway to perform a rotational operation.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can function as a directing part. As a result, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The regulation unit 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulation unit 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulation unit 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 coming into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, the meaning to be conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while making a slight change in posture in contact with the regulating portion 2888. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts with the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position, but if the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the petal 802 changes its posture. The degree of spread varies. Therefore, even if the regulation portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described in the expanding position, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 198 and 199, an operation example of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is shown in time series. Further, in FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. Since it is the same as in the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is widened in the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Of the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a to be provided and the side slits 815 arranged on the front view clockwise side of the central slit 814, the side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the front view clockwise side. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814 and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814. Inside, a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b, which is recessed in a wall portion on the front clockwise side in a manner of widening the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction, is mainly provided.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from a position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)) of the slit member 3810. Is formed in.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)) from a position where it is arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803. Is formed continuously to.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts rotating clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (the slide rib 803a at the right end is a clock). It moves in the direction of entering the peripheral concave portion 3815a (see FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)) with the portion that first abuts with the 3810 as a fulcrum.

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. And the contact between the central recessed portion 3814a and the screwed portion 2803S and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are clocked with a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance given to the slit member 3810 by the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. When the slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side comes into contact with the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a moves to the front counterclockwise side from the concave base end of the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)). Therefore, by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the front view clockwise direction, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved. The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194 (b). ), The rotation operation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 (rotating around the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Rotational motion) is present (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). (See a)), the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view (see FIG. 199 (b)). That is, the rotational operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) can be obtained. From the position of the petals 802 to be fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the gathering position (see FIG. 195). Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment is the curvature of the lower frame member 8320. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The second state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 (a), the first state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 201, and the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 202 (b). The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been explained in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments of the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment. Yes, and other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. On the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are bored along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are bored at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. Mainly provided with a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the above-mentioned liquid such as drinking water downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but the possibility that foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the easier it is for the tilting device 310 to be displaced (deformed) to the left or right near the front end. In addition, this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed so as not to be a gap V13 enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin). However, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right side (for example, to the left), the gap V13 formed in the other side (for example, to the right) is formed in the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The size of the gap V13 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the two and the coin, and the size can be such that a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also formed in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by shifting (deforming) the position by applying a load toward the back side, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, when a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the left or right gap V13 or the front-rear gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, and the tilting device 310 tilts, a coin is coined. There is a possibility that foreign matter in the shape may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward to the left and right toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good feeling of operation, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be performed by the operation device 8300, so the coin-shaped foreign substance is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as it is discovered that the coin-shaped foreign matter has been removed, but in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

203 (a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (c) is a side view of the operating device 8300. FIG. 203 (d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (e) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 203 (a). FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right center positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (left and right in the vertical view in the second state). In the first state of the tilting device 310, the tilting D81 is tilted downward toward the center of the left and right due to being curved toward the center, and the tilting D82 is tilted downward toward the front side due to the tilting device 310. (See FIG. 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required as the size of the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily secured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign matter in a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. The size is larger than the size of the object. That is, in the present embodiment, a portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a lateral width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits the light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portion of the lens member 313 which is connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 is mirror-finished (mirror-finished member) in the present embodiment. Is fixed) to reflect the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

Due to this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member 8320 will continue to remain. It should be noted that this effect is not limited to the case of visual recognition through the first through hole 8326a, but is the same when visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set so that the largest possible coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) can be discharged. The width in the normal direction of is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. Can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is removed. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the standing state (posture) as it is.

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

To remove the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since the installation portion 15a is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which it is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)). Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit / receive signals to / from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to quickly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to normal operation, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. Note that FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and FIG. 204 (b) shows the front frame 14 as the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The front-rear displacement member 2652, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and is displaceably supported in the front-rear direction, and the locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652, The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below at two front and rear positions and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and is on the front side of the front / rear displacement member 2652. It is provided with an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies an urging force toward.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), the torsion spring NBb is abutted. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member NBb and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the rear position. , It is a continuously connected inclined surface.

The tilt angle and formation range of the inclined surface 2652a are such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned downward at the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned upward at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652. Set.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the post-rotation claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and pushes it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, so that the torsion spring NBb is a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force that becomes the force, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of selection of the operator and workability.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are crawled above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegality of melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire and infiltrating the inside as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt out to detect fraud at an early stage has been described. However, the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment is used when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is restored to a tensile shape (stored shape) by applying heat. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape in which the back side and the lower surface side are opened, and the main body box portion 2281 which is stacked above the reverse cup portion 2178 and the back side opening so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. A back cover member 2282 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and a back cover member 2282 are provided with a space.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, extends from the lower right corner portion and abuts on the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and narrows the opening from the lower corner portion upward. The narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, the protruding portion 2285 projecting upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284, and the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 are recessed from the back side. The first conductive portion 2286, which is housed in a concave portion and one end projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and hits the upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a contactable length, a torsion spring SP15 for generating an urging force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and a protrusion on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. It includes a shape memory spring 2288 that is supported by the portion 2285 and is arranged below the second conductive portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205 (b)) (FIG. 205 (b)). c) By doing so, the continuity is cut off, and the fact that the continuity is cut off is input and an error signal is output.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

By filling the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173 by the extension portion 2283, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, maintains the shape after deformation in a low temperature state, and has a property of returning to a shape memorized in advance by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. ..

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back lid member 228 in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state and then returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and reduces the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, forming the light guide member 540 in a curved manner causes a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 which schematically represents the part 2543b, and FIG. 206 (c) is a schematic downward concave part 2543c which is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, which schematically represents a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 206 (e) schematically represents an upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 206A, the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, the region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and the lower and inner lens member 530 with reference to the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is this. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the eighth embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in the substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 206A, the light proceeds in the direction of collecting light toward the inner lens member 530 side and in the direction of spreading light toward the outer lens member 550 side according to the above-described configuration. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate and have a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the left and right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed while producing a light emitting effect. The effect can be improved.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 15 is formed flat has been described, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400. As a result, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower plate unit 6400 is improved. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the paper surface will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface will be described as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 is arranged in front of the operation device 10300 in which the swing device member 10310 is arranged in the upward position in FIG. 207 and the operation device 10300 below the operation device 10300. The lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, the horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the light emission effect, and the upper part of the front frame 10014 that mainly covers the light emission effect and It mainly includes an upper effect device 6500 for executing sound effect.

The above-mentioned glass unit 16 is arranged in an area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and a game area in which the game ball flows down is configured on the back side of the glass unit 16. It is the same as the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, FIG. 207 omits the illustration of the state of the back side of the glass unit 16, and FIG. 208 shows the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). Omitted, the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be visually recognized from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is arranged.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 shows a directional view (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) along the longitudinal direction of the lever member of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)). To.

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, which are formed in the shape of a thin plate and have flexibility to the extent that they can be bent and deformed. As shown in FIG. 209, the accommodation recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the degree of the recess toward the back side increases as it approaches the center on the left and right, and the center of the accommodation recess 17a on the left and right and the operation device. It is arranged so that the left and right centers of the 10300 are aligned with each other.

The back side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodating recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the back side as it approaches the center on the left and right. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) side of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the center on the left and right.

Therefore, in the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be large, the vertical displacement of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front-rear position from the metal body portion 10014a to the fitting position. It is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, in the left and right positions (positions separated from the center to the left and right) where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, the operation can be performed even if the front and rear positions from the metal body 10014a to the fitting position are lengthened. There is no problem in suppressing the displacement of the device 10300 in the vertical direction, and by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal body portion 10014a. A wide arrangement area such as the upper plate 17 and the frame button 22 can be secured.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 shows a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the front side of the outer frame 11 with the left end portion axially supported by the hinge 19 as the center.

The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. The front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12 by removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19. Since the configurations to be newly described are respectively arranged on the front frame 10014, the description will be described below focusing on the front frame 10014.

FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. In addition, in FIGS. 211 and 212, a state in which the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014 is shown.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member forming a skeleton, includes a metal main body 10014a integrally formed with a front door mounting bracket 58, and the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are metal main bodies 10014a. It is fastened and fixed to. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal body portion 10014a side (back side), and the metal body portion 10014a has a fastening portion. A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male screw) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body 10014a and screwing and tightening the fastening member (male screw) into the fastening portion.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operating device 10300 is held so as to be sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear of the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, the configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order.

FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower plate unit 6400 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and is shown in a directional view from the back side, and the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their insertion holes 6801R and 6801L are shown for easy understanding. The assembly direction line connecting the fastening points is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled to the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330 is plate-shaped so as to project from the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts on the upper surface of the convex portion T10 so as to ride on it.

Below the operating device 10300, a bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is arranged. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) formed with an opening toward the front side and a recessed portion De2 with the inner case member 10330 side opposite (lower side) and the back side open. Be prepared.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape in a rear view with the lower side open, and is formed in a size that can be fitted to the plate-shaped convex portion T10, that is, is recessed with the plate-shaped convex portion T10. By fitting with the portion De2, the operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. Further, since the plate-shaped convex portion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-shaped convex portion T10. In addition, the fitting here may be such that the bottom member De can be aligned with the plate-shaped convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of a gap.

At the tip of the plate-shaped convex portion T10, a pair of left and right cylindrical projecting portions projecting in a thin columnar shape toward the front side and a fastening screw are formed so as to be screwable at an intermediate position between the pair of columnar projecting portions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of cylindrical projecting portions are inserted into the recesses recessed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-shaped convex portion T10 and the bottom member De. The fastening screw to be formed and screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into the insertion hole formed at the corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and by tightening this fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, the concave portion De2 formed in the latter half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-shaped convex portion T10, while the front half portion on the opposite side (see FIG. 215 (a)) supports the plate shape. It is arranged above the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a of the portion 6426. That is, the front half portion of the bottom member De is arranged so as to face the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be in contact with the resin member 6427.

It should be noted that the possibility of contact here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may be in contact with the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be separated from each other while a load is applied to the operation device 10300. The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may come into contact with each other when the operating device 10300 is displaced downward due to a vibration effect.

After fitting the operation device 10300 into the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by fastening a fastening screw to be inserted into the front frame 10014 from the back side.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 is covered with a plurality of fastening portions 10333 (three locations in the present embodiment) formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, and one of the fastening portions 10333. It is a metal plate, and is mainly provided with a metal plate portion 10334 that is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and can receive a compressive force when fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be in contact with the edge portion of the insertion hole H10a formed in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter capable of inserting the fastening screw. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is arranged on the front side of the metal main body portion 10014a. However, a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be passed through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal body 10014a.

Here, in the periphery of the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than that of the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of the through hole is designed so as not to interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is covered on the back surface side of the fastening portion 10333.

As a result, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal body portion 10014a by fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 to the front frame 10014. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal body portion 10014a can be electrically conductive, they can have the same role as the so-called ground wire. As a result, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

Further, by arranging the metal plate portion 10334 between them, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a function of a washer. As a result, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal body portion 10014a.

The shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw-in hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claws are formed so as to be displaced in the front-rear position, the function of the spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

The locations where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts required for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom in design on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is a problem because the operation device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load in the sinking direction (downward direction) is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses the subduction displacement of the operation device 10300 on the front side while concentrating the fastening points on the back side. This will be described in order below.

First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side is fitted with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the front side portion of the operating device 10300 is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by the fitting portion 6426d, and the subduction displacement is suppressed.

Next, the operations of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with a plate-shaped projecting portion on the back side edge of the upper half portion arranged on the back side of the swing operation member 10310.

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half portion, and a plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d that further project from the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c. Mainly prepared.

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-shaped overhanging portion 10322c that projects in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half portion. The right front cover 10322 is not formed with a portion corresponding to the partial overhanging portion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d are configured as portions to be inserted and fitted into the accommodating recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodating recess 17a of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the housing recesses 17a have a lower edge overhanging portion 10017b whose lower edge projects to the front side with substantially the same overhang width over the left and right sides of the housing recess 17a, and the left and right sides of the housing recess 17a. On both sides, below the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b, at positions slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c, they are arranged to face the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b in a manner of projecting to the front side. A plurality of opposed overhanging portions 10017c forming a groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d whose upper side is bored in the front-rear direction as a long hole at a surface position with the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b. And an escape hole 10017e formed in the front-rear direction at a position arranged side by side with the facing overhanging portion 10017c on the right side.

When assembling the operation device 10300 into the accommodating recess 17a, the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposite overhang 10017c, and a plurality of partial overhangs 10321d Is inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodating recesses 17a.

In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction by fitting the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c into the groove between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the facing overhang 10017c. Is suppressed.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial overhangs 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with respect to the accommodating recess 17a. It is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, since the accommodating recess 17a is formed in an open arch shape on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are in contact with each other and accommodated inside the arch, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated. Can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or the back side direction.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the position shift of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a load toward the rear to the swing operation member 10310. (Return to the original position at an early stage).

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, he / she mainly operates it with his / her left hand. In a general gaming posture (a posture facing the pachinko machine 10010), the player operates the swinging operation member 10310 at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 10010. In the operation of the arranged operation device 10300, since the left hand is extended diagonally to the right front, it is rare that the load at the time of the operation has no left-right component.

Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 is given a load toward the rear and at the same time a load is applied in the left-right direction, so that the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left-right directions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the accommodating recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged between them. Therefore, when the operation device 10300 is displaced. The restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that can occur occurs in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in the direction of returning the operating device 10300 to the original position. As a result, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be restored at an early stage.

From each of the above configurations, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodating recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation device 10300 with respect to the accommodating recess 17a.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which the fixed assembly portion 6802 described later of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be arranged at a position where it projects outward from the plate-shaped overhanging portion 10321c.

Next, the operation device 10300 and its surroundings will be described. First, the outline of the internal structure of the operation device 10300 will be described. 215 (a), 215 (b), 216 (a) and 216 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line CCXVa-CCXVa of FIG. 207.

FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIGS. 215 (b), 216 (a), and 216 (b) show. , The state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), in the operation device 10300, the lever member 10340 that pivotally supports the swing operation member 10310 with the shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is centered on the displacement of the shaft support rod 10363 arranged on the arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1 and the shaft support rod 10363 thereof. Displacement is possible in a manner combined with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is configured to be generated by the operation of the player.

That is, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swing operation member 10310 can be pushed in in the form of rotational displacement centered on the shaft support rod 10363. (Pushing operation).

Further, by grasping the swing operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the lower front side, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down in the form of rotational displacement centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1. Can be (push down operation).

Further, in the state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation is performed by the action of the posture correction device 10312 (the action of giving a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b). The member 10310 is in a posture in which the member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (backflip posture, a posture in which the member 10340 is backward by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, since the angle of change in posture of the swing operating member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. ..

Further, when the lens member 10317 that is displaceably supported by the swing operation member 10310 is pushed (push operation) while the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 is swung due to the load during the operation. The operating member 10310 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support rod 10363 and is displaced in a manner of tilting forward, so that the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 can be changed to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216 (b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply a load for operation from a plurality of directions, and if the load mode is different, the displacement mode of the swing operation member 10310 is also available. It can be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by a drive motor around the lever support shaft 10331d1. As a result, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibrating device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 is directly or indirectly contacted with the lens member 10317. It is configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a bobbin member (arranged on the lever member 10340 side) which is a cylindrical member around which a copper wire is wound. A disk-shaped plate in which a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected. The pressing member is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

The vibrating device 10366 is configured to be capable of generating linear vibration along the direction Y17a along the straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

As a result, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making maximum use of the vibration energy of the vibrating device 10366, and the effect of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be improved.

Next, the details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. In the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, where the outer end (the end opposite to the swing operation member 10310) is formed to be curved, the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. The radius. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the range of motion of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured, and the player can grip the swing operation member 10310. You can secure a space to put your finger in.

Further, since the bending of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310, the design can be improved and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be caused as a whole. , The allowable width of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L bored in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to both left and right ends of the accommodating recess 17a can be inserted. A fixing assembly portion 6802 for inseparably fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330 with a fastening screw is provided.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodating recesses 17a through insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the farthest points from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane passing through the center in the left-right direction and orthogonal to the left-right direction), and the load is difficult to be transmitted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that is inserted through the 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the accommodating recess 17a.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed at the center in the left-right direction of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. The position is shifted to the right from the position where the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are located on the backmost side). That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left and right centers to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left and right centers. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

In the present embodiment, since the boundary between the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is deviated from the center in the left-right direction, one member (mainly, the portion located on the backmost side) of the accommodation recess 17a is located. In the embodiment, the alignment with the accommodating recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), so that the assembly can be facilitated as compared with the case where the alignment is performed by both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted during the operation of the operation device 10300. Here, the swing operation member 10310 can be arranged close to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 on the back side (particularly, they are arranged close to each other at an upward position (see FIG. 218)). Since this is a location, there is a risk that the fastening screw will loosen due to the transmission of the load during operation of the operating device 10300. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fixed assembly 6802 is arranged so as to be shifted to the left and right from the left and right centers where the load during operation is maximized, so that the transmitted load is reduced as compared with the load during operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

In this way, by shifting the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and also shifting the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the assembly efficiency can be improved and the fastening screw can be loosened. It can be made less likely to occur.

Both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 in the fixed assembly portion 6802. That is, in the fixed assembly portion 6802, the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

However, with respect to the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is inserted into a through hole formed in the upper plate portion of the inner case member 10330 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 220), and the upper plate portion thereof. Is only sandwiched by the fixed assembly 6802 from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the number of fastening points formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced as compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, respectively.

As a result, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when many fastening points are provided on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are less likely to bend due to the rigidity of the fastening screws, and may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to easily bend while maintaining the fastening portion, the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be reduced, but in this case, the durability may be lowered or fraudulent activity may be caused. There is a risk of

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening points as in the present embodiment, it is possible to sufficiently bend the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. As a result, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be disassembled to the left and right in a state of being integrated with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fastened to the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a) in the front-rear direction. Will be done.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 can move relative to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 can move relative to the right cover member 10324. , The assembly position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be described below.

The operation device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 so that the back side is formed along the curved surface of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided, and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are provided with adjusting elongated holes 10323a and 10324a, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at the outer upper end, respectively.

The adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively. Since they are elongated in the left-right direction, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed due to variations in molding or the like. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjusting elongated holes 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a recessed in the right direction from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 in contact with the left front cover 10321 and the fitting recess 10322a. In a state where the wall member 10322b to be mounted in the embodiment is provided and the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the movement to the left is stopped by the end face of the left front cover 10321 to prevent the wall. The member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

With such a configuration, when the wall member 10322b is replaced, the wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is a load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). This is the place where you repeatedly receive). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of the assembling work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to the transition from FIGS. 221 and 222 to 219 and 220). After being fastened and fixed, the left front cover 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330 to align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. It is fixed.

Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 and the left cover member 10323 are purposely used to correct the misalignment of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. It is necessary to loosen the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shift the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to make a correction.

Further, in anticipation of this, when the left front cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully tightened to the inner case member 10330 but are weakly fastened and fixed to determine the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left front cover 10321 After the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream side of the assembly procedure), the work procedure return of fastening and fixing the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream side of the assembly procedure) occurs. However, since the work itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification of the work.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so that the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are placed in the inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, the assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 include shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R in which the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344 and the front edge portion are arranged so as to face each other. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing the gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and the piano wire is inserted into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts to be attempted or mischievous acts of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is displaced due to the influence of the load (impact) during operation and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are operated during the operation of the operation device 10300. There is a risk that the 6803L and 6803R will rub against each other and resin shavings will be generated. Resin shavings have little effect as long as they are small, but if a large amount of resin shavings is clogged in the detection groove of a light-transmitting type switch typified by the so-called photocoupler type, the shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a risk that the degree of freedom in selecting the switch that can be adopted is limited.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembly portion 6802 as the fastening point of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is located at the left and right center position (the place where the load during operation and the load during operation are generated at the maximum). Since it is arranged at a position separated from the left and right, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a from shifting, prevent the generation of resin shavings, and suppress erroneous detection. In the present embodiment, the photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation in the backward rotation direction of the swing operation member 10310, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

Then, when the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward rotation direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is shielded, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, since no load is applied to the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, the durability can be improved as compared with the case where the load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, and a front view fan shape on the lower side of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, which are continuously formed as the plate portions of the above, are mainly provided.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (that is, a lever support shaft 10331d1 (that is, FIG. 215)) on which the back surface can come into contact with the curved portion of the upper front side of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. It is formed as a surface of an arc shape) with a center angle of about 90 degrees centered on).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R include a protruding interference portion 6805a projecting from the back surface side to the back surface side. The protruding interference portion 6805a is arranged slightly inside the inner edge portion Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to project to the back side.

As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a displaces the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively, in a state of being assembled (see FIG. 220). It is regulated by Rm1. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being disassembled in such a manner that they are separated from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer circumferences of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, and are connected so as to expand outward in the front view and bend toward the front side at the expanding tip. It includes curved portions 6806L and 6806R.

The left front cover 10321 includes fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L, which are formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in at the right end portion and are arranged vertically. Further, the right front cover 10322 includes insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, 6808R which are arranged vertically at the left end portion and are bored so that fastening screws can be inserted.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). As a result, the load and impact associated with the operation of the operation device 10300 can be dispersed in each fastening portion, and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be suppressed.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion that is easily visible to the player (particularly, it is easily visible from the front view). It is possible to prevent the performance of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, see FIG. 207) from being deteriorated. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a bored in the left-right direction is sandwiched in the portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and the inner case member 10330 is sandwiched and fixed by the fastening screw. .. It should be noted that the tip of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner of contacting the left surface of the plate portion on which the insertion hole 6802R is formed, not in the so-called “co-tightening” mode. .. In other words, by fastening, no compressive load is generated on the portion of the insertion hole H23a to be bored.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load during operation on the operation device 10300, the operations of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent within the above-mentioned gap range. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fixed assembly portion 6802 from being similarly displaced when a minute displacement that may occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs.

It should be noted that the extending length of the tubular portion extending to the right from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed at the time of fastening. .. In this case, since the restoring force of the portion of the insertion hole H23a to be bored increases the fastening force, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into an insertion hole H23b drilled in the left-right direction is screwed in a portion protruding toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing the fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In this embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted into a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable along the left-right direction at a portion protruding toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing the fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion and the insertion hole are formed at a plurality of locations along the forming direction of the facing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, but the combination of the objects to be fastened is formed at each location. It is configured differently. As a result, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at the same time, so that the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be described below.

First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at one place, it is possible to prevent one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

Next, if the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fixed at one place in the same manner, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. it can.

After that, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screw into the fixing assembly 6802 to fasten and fix the cover. Further, by screwing and fixing the fastening screw in the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

In this way, by forming the portion where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, as compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 only in the fastening mode. The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening work can be improved as compared with the case where the fastening screw is inserted in both the left and right directions.

Further, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Since the operation direction of each operation unit of the operation device 10300 is along a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the direction of each operation unit of the operation device 10300. It is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of. That is, when a load or impact during operation is generated along the operation direction, no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw is generated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to a load or impact during operation of the operating device 10300.

In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (including a part operated by operation. For example, a swing operation member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 10340, etc.), but all the operation parts are levers. Since the design operates in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if the operating portion does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating portion that pushes in the diagonally left and right directions), the operating portion of each operating portion The direction found as the balance (average) of the operation directions (for example, the intermediate angular direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the operation part where the operation instruction is frequently performed may be targeted (operation instruction is rarely generated). You may set the fastening direction (ignoring the operation part that you just need to do).

223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Except for the portion to be formed and the portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed, a plurality of surfaces arranged to face each other come into contact with each other in the vertical direction.

In the contacting portion, a plate-shaped portion extends to the right from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending to the right along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223 (a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, it is restricted that the shielding plate portion 6803R is displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from passing between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In the present embodiment, the inner case member 10330 arranged below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the back side portion is housed therein, and the lever member 10340 thereof are driven. It is possible to prevent the liquid from coming into contact with the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, or an electric system (such as a substrate) that drives the drive motor.

In addition, the cuts of the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the center of the left and right of the swing operation member 10310, while the cuts (joining surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same surface as the left and right center position of 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the cuts of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340 is arranged closer to the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (in the bulging portion from the inner case member 10330 to the left). Correspondence, see FIG. 218), even if the lower part between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L gets wet, the liquid that wets that part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. It is possible to prevent the drive motor from getting wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb extending to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate portion 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-shaped support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body portion 6411 and the lower plate of the lining base member 6410 There is a possibility that the liquid passes between the main body box portion 6421 of the forming member 6420 and flows toward the through hole 6412 or flows along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, when the liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may hit the player or wet the Senryo box.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of the liquid by sandwiching the through hole 6412 without a gap. By suppressing the passage of the liquid between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will hit the player or wet the Senryo box, so that the player can use it. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are streaked in a manner of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak portion D23 formed in is provided. The streaky portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The streak portion D23 serves as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. That is, the rigidity along the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is maintained (or decreased) while maintaining (or decreasing) the rigidity in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23, as compared with the case where the streak portion D23 is formed as a simple plate. Improve (anisotropic). This will be described by taking the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and have a role as a portion for filling the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be displaceable slightly downward by a load or impact during operation for the purpose of preventing the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodating recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

That is, when operating the operation device 10300, there is a possibility that a gap may be formed between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are extended (elastically deformed and bent) in the vertical direction, so that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a, and a gap can be accommodated. Can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed) in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed, thereby providing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since it is made larger (because it is made more rigid), it is possible to suppress vibration or deformation more than necessary when the shape is restored. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for one purpose of taking measures against problems that may occur during the operation of the operation device 10300.

Since the streaky portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape in front view, when a downward load is applied in the center, the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R can withstand upwards (pulling force is generated) on both the left and right sides. .. That is, even if a downward load is applied during the operation of the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned early.

On the other hand, even if a load is generated in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23, the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the downstream side due to the allowable deformation based on the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R include end streaky portions D24 formed in a streak shape in a manner of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streaky portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The end streak portion D24 mainly includes left and right streak portions D24a formed on the left and right sides and a central streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and each is formed as a countermeasure against a load in different directions.

The left and right streaks D24a are streaks arranged above the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and are formed in a shape that is inclined downward toward the back side. This downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load (along the direction of the load) such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310. That is, the resistance to the operation load can be improved by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a.

As for the inclination angle of the left and right streaks D24a, those arranged on the left and right sides are formed to have a stepwise larger angle with respect to the front-rear direction than those arranged on the left and right center sides. That is, the streaky portion extends in a plurality of directions. As a result, the resistance to the load during operation of the lens member 10317 can be improved regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

Moreover, the forming width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R on which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter in the one arranged on the left and right side than in the one arranged on the left and right center side. That is, since the formation width is shortened toward the side (left and right side) where the inclination in the front-rear direction corresponds to a large force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is small, and the resistance force is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the inclination in the front-rear direction is large as the direction in which the load is likely to be large during operation (the direction in which the hand is waved down).

On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion arranged downward from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portion on the front side), and has a shape that rises and inclines toward the back side. Formed from. This ascending inclination corresponds to the direction of the load when the operating device 10300 (inner case member 10330) tilts forward.

That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the central reinforcing portion D24b by the central reinforcing portion D24b, the load during the tilting operation centering on the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 causes the operation device 10300 (inside). It is possible to improve the resistance to the case member 10330) being displaced forward.

In addition, the central muscle portion D24b is formed of a total of seven muscles, one in the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right center side toward the back side. As a result, when the operation device 10300 (inner case member 10330) is displaced forward due to the load during the tilting operation centered on the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the displacement occurs in the left-right direction. The resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the bending in the left-right direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is more severe than the bending in the vertical direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the vertical direction). It becomes a large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge portion). When the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed in such a manner that The load (stress) applied to the load can be released (stress concentration can be avoided).

Even in the case of bending and deforming in this way, the lower edge overhanging portion so that the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. It is supported between 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are formed longer in the front-rear direction toward the left and right outer sides, so that the left front cover 10321 And it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the right front cover 10322 and the accommodating recess 17a.

Further, by making the flexibility of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the downstream side (V-shaped design member) of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operating device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operating device 10300. The ease of transmission to 6450 (see FIG. 232) can be changed by the direction of vibration or load.

That is, it is possible to easily transmit the vibration along the vertical direction and the operation load to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while the vibration and the operation in the left-right direction. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50. It can be difficult to do. As a result, even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swinging operation member 10310, it is possible to prevent the vibration and the load from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50, giving the player a sense of discomfort. it can.

Further, where the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c formed on the upper edges thereof are elongated on the left and right. It is inserted between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, when the shapes of the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c are compared with the shapes of the lower edge overhangs 10017b and the facing overhangs 10017c, the vicinity of the left and right ends is displaced in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the upper end portion on the front side of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrudes to the front side of the accommodating recess 17a), the curvature of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c is loosened (the left and right ends are displaced to the back side). It is preferable that the molding error can be dealt with by deforming so as to (make it).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the streaky portions D23 are formed on the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R along the vertical direction, the rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R in the horizontal direction is compared with the rigidity in the vertical direction. To be lowered. Therefore, when the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are deformed to the side where the curvature becomes loose, the deformation of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. , The deformation width of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be handled can be increased.

In this way, the streak portion D23 does not improve (weaken) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the forming direction (horizontal direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

Based on these facts, the streaky portion D23 may cause a problem when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled, see FIG. 213), and a problem that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated. It is possible to correspond to both.

It will be described back to FIG. 212. In the present embodiment, a flat plate-shaped flat plate portion (a plate-shaped portion in which a ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed along the metal main body portion 10014a) is formed on the lower left front portion of the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. A plate-shaped upper plate portion extending to the front side so as to be bent at the upper end portion of the upper portion of the flat plate portion, which is configured to be inclined downward toward the right. A back covering portion 10014b formed from a resin material is disposed in the embodiment. That is, the back covering portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross-sectional shape on a plane orthogonal to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The back covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is abutted (connected) to the flat plate portion at the rear end portion and is abutted (connected) to the upper plate portion at the right end portion thereof. In the region (space) formed in this way on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back covering portion 10014b face each other, balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, so-called foul balls, and the like are stored. Will be. Next, the details of the lower plate unit 6400 constituting the lower plate 50 will be described.

FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower plate unit 6400 is shown at an angle looking up from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower plate unit 6400 is a cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a in a manner that covers the front side of the metal body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212). The base member 6410, the lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted to the lining base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and the lower plate that is a plate-shaped device attached to the lining base member 6410 from below. One of the ball discharging device 6430 fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420 and the lower plate forming member 6420 being attached to the lining base member 6410 at the left end of the lining base member 6410 in a manner capable of preventing the lower plate forming member 6420 from coming off from the back side. , An intermediate holding member 6440 that is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side), and a V that is arranged on the upper part of the front side of the lining base member 6410 and is formed in a V shape from the front view from the resin material. Mainly includes a character design member 6450.

The lining foundation member 6410 has a main body portion 6411 formed in a substantially flat shape with a lower bottom surface and a substantially box shape with the back surface and the upper surface open, and a slight skeleton portion in the front-rear direction in the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through hole 6412 formed through the remaining hole 6412, and a projecting shape portion 6413 projecting downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the left-right center side of the main body portion 6411 with reference to the through hole 6412, and a protrusion thereof. On the back side of the shape portion 6413, a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness of the protrusion shape portion 6413 is substantially equal to other portions of the main body portion 6411 is mainly provided.

By configuring the recessed shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. Can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 exert a plurality of advantageous effects at a position where the operation device 10300 is held from below, and the details will be described later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the size of the bottom surface shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is formed to be much larger than the size of the bottom surface opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball pulling lever 52.

By forming the through hole 6412 in advance in this way, the ejection speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 can be adjusted to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the lining base member 6410. It is possible to correspond to the discharge speed of the ball.

That is, the ejection speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432. For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as that of the bottom opening 6432, the ejection speed of the ball is set to that. It cannot be made larger than this. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, the size of the bottom opening 6432 may be changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 may be changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412 ( (By changing the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430), the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the ball from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the lining base member 6410. In other words, the discharge rate (discharge mode) of the ball can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower plate unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

The demand for changing the ejection speed of the ball is not limited to the case where the playability of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a manner that requires the payout ball to be transferred to the Senryo box, and in a manner that does not require the payout ball to be transferred to the Senryo box (so-called "personal"). In the case of).

When it is necessary to transfer the payout ball to the Senryo box, if the ball is discharged at high speed, the ball may overflow from the Senryo box frequently, so the ball is designed to be discharged at a slower speed than the specified speed. It is desirable to be done.

In the present embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm], and is based on a comparison between the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a sphere shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]). The upper limit of the balls that can be ejected from the opening at the same time is limited to about 7.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the payout balls to the Senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the Senryo box, so that the upper limit of the desired ball ejection speed changes significantly in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the paid-out balls flow into the automatic counters arranged in each of the pachinko machines 10010. Therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, the balls are built in the automatic counters. The operating speed of the ball sink is illustrated.

As described above, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the ejection speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view, but there is a possibility that the strength of the main body portion 6411 is lowered. There is. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, so the size and arrangement of the through hole 6412 However, it may be limited to the extent that it can withstand the load during operation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the lining base member 6410 in a manner of compensating for the decrease in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the lines shown by the imaginary lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 as the fastening directions in a manner in which the lining base member 6410 is sandwiched from above and below. , The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the left and right long skeleton portions located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited in any way. For example, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 may be designed so that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 come into contact with each other before the fastening (arranged at the fastening preparation position). (See FIG. 233), there is a gap between the two before fastening, but the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw, and pressure may be applied.

Further, the portion to be pressed does not have to be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side portion in the vicinity of the projecting shape portion 6413) and the back side portion (a long plate portion arranged behind the through hole 6412) that may be impacted each time it is opened and closed. Since a large load is likely to occur, it is preferable to adopt a design mode that suppresses the load.

By sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 in this way, the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently secured, so that the bottom opening 6432 is formed. The bottom opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about the decrease in strength due to the above. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 in which the lower plate 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface, a discharge port 6422 opened vertically on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and a main body box portion. An L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting from the back side of the bottom surface of the 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from the bottom surface, and a ball discharging device 6430 projecting downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) the range surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 into which fastening screws are screwed, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge portion of the discharge port 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421. Mainly includes a plate-shaped support portion 6426 extending to the right from the right end portion of the above, and a flexible resin member 6427 mounted on the upper surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426.

The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position which is the front end portion and the right end portion of the lower plate 50. The upper surface of the bottom of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface in a manner of descending and inclining toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball flowing into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows down toward the discharge port 6422 and is discharged. Since the outlet 6422 is arranged on the front side close to the player, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 where a load from the operation device 10300 is likely to occur, and the effect of the strength decrease due to the formation of the through hole is considered. Therefore, the discharge port 6422 is combined with the ball discharge device 6430. The measures are taken by, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has a different protrusion length at the left and right positions, which corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, the lower plate 50 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the right, so that the upper surface of the lower bottom portion (through hole) of the main body portion 6411 is formed. In order to bring it into contact with the upper surface of the edge portion of 6412), it is necessary to shorten the protrusion length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 toward the right, which corresponds to this. As a result of this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end portion (lower end portion) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 (contacted by line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portion 6424 is formed at two locations on the front side end where a load from the player is likely to occur, and one on the back side end where a load is likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By preferentially providing the fastening points in the places where the load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the lower plate forming member 6420 from being displaced due to the fixing being displaced when the load is generated, while limiting the fastening points. ..

Further, since the fastening portion 6424 is arranged in the vicinity of the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body portion 6411 is separately provided even though the fastening portion 6424 is fastened inside the through hole 6412. It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge portion of the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410 (while fastening without forming in) (making it easier to maintain the relative position). Can be done). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 while eliminating the need to form through holes other than the through hole 6412.

The guide rib 6425 is also used for the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball pulling lever 52 and for the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is formed from a long plate shape on the left and right, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is required. Therefore, the ball pulling lever 52 is in the long direction. Since it slides in the left-right direction corresponding to the above, the movement guidance of the ball pulling lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 are preferably realized.

Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed in pairs as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Further, even if one is damaged, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so that the useful life of the lower plate unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible member having an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

The ball discharging device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-mentioned ball removing lever 52 is arranged, a circular bottom surface opening 6432 formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 that are arranged at positions that overlap with the fastening portion 6424 of 6420 and are tightened by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6424, and a rectangular frame shape that surrounds the fastening hole 6433. Mainly includes a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410.

The ball pulling lever 52 has a grip portion 52a projecting forward so that the player can operate it in a manner of sliding left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). A pair of rib-shaped portions that project upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extend along the left-right direction, and are guided by the guide rib 6425, and are provided with the guided ribs 52c. Is integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom surface opening 6432 is vertically opposed to the discharge port 6422 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between them. As described above, when the ball pulling lever 52 is not operated, the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432. Therefore, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined by the closing plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being lowered while adopting the configuration (arranged).

The details of the fastening mode of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 is provided with a flange portion 6431a that projects outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat side and both left and right sides) excluding the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is internally fitted into the through hole 6412 of the lining base member 6410 with a gap, and when the ball discharge device 6430 is fitted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the collar is fitted. The portion 6431a comes into contact with the lower surface portion of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that allows contact from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front-back and left-right directions, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is formed. , As described above, abuts in the vertical direction with the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

In this way, the ball discharge device 6430 can be positioned on the lining base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharge device 6430, and the balls are fastened after aligning the positions of the configurations. Each configuration can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening. Therefore, the assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the lining base member 6410 is inserted, and is formed through a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding from the front side and a metal main body portion 10014a (see FIG. 211). A portion where a screw to be inserted into a through hole to be formed is fastened and fixed, and a plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding from the back side and a portion that interferes with the left upper end portion of the lining foundation member 6410 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes an interference portion 6443 formed in a plate shape.

FIG. 226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. 226 and 227 show a state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from FIGS. 224 and 225.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is opened and the opening width is narrowed toward the center of the left and right, and the V-shaped main body portion 6451 is arranged downward toward the center of the left and right. A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the main body 6451, a positioning portion 6453 formed near the center of the lower edge of the main body 6451, and left and right of the main body 6451. It is formed by a plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 that are formed so as to extend to the back side near the end portion so that the fastening screw can be screwed in, and a plate shape that extends in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side portion of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right-side reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the elongated direction of the main body 6451 and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 on the left side of the main body 6451 are formed and aligned in the elongated direction of the main body 6451. Mainly provided with a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. As a result, it is possible to limit the places where a through hole is likely to be formed in order for a person who commits a fraudulent act to invade the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. That is, it is less difficult to make a through hole in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 than in the case of making a through hole in the V-shaped design member 6450, so that an illegal through hole is formed in the left front cover 10321 or It can be made to open in the right front cover 10322.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the points to be checked regularly to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the through hole is likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the check load can be reduced as compared with the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

The main body portion 6451 is formed of a thin wall, and is said to be flexible and deformable in the direction of narrowing the groove width (deflectable and deformable in a manner of being crushed up and down). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 fits with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, the vertical displacement that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated is transmitted through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Be transmitted. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 bends and deforms in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the groove of the main body 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 is caused by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

That is, at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 can be operated by deforming the V-shaped design member 6450 and then transmitted to the downstream side (for example, the lining foundation member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the displacement amount of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 by the operation can be suppressed. Or, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 is a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with reference to the center of the left and right, and a plate-shaped protruding portion protruding toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. Mainly equipped with 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion fixed to the lining foundation member 6410 by screwing the fastening screw into the recess formed on the front side with the fastening portion of the lining foundation member 6410 inserted from the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in a manner approaching from the back side of the lining foundation member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 226 and 227).

It should be noted that at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6452) is invisible in the lower plate forming member 6420 in the insertion direction view of the fastening screw (FIG. 230 (b)). That is, in the state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the lining foundation member 6410, the fastening screw inserted into at least a part of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the lining foundation member 6410 to the V-shaped design member Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a pre-stage for disassembling the 6450, the number of man-hours required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is bored in the front side vertically elongated portion 6426c described later in the front-rear direction, and a fastening screw screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted, and the fastening screw is inserted to the lower right fastening portion 6453L. It is provided with an insertion portion 6426c1 to be fixed with. In addition, the operating device 10300 is arranged so as to shield the insertion portion 6426c1 from the rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, on the premise of disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from the shielding position. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the required man-hours such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to illegally remove the V-shaped design member 6450 and suppress fraudulent acts that enter the inside through the created gap.

The plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R abuts on the upper surface of the front vertical portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R.

As a result, for example, even when the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) and the fitting portion 6426d of the operating device 10300 are applied. The front side portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the ascending direction as the operating device 10300 is displaced in the ascending direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, the ascending displacement of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed.

The left and right overhanging fastening portions 6454 are portions where fastening screws to be inserted into a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed in, and the fastening position is , The back side (the side close to the metal main body 10014a) from the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L.

The right-side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left-side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin-walled shape that can be bent and deformed by themselves to transmit displacement downstream by their own deformation. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing the above. As shown in FIG. 227, the left side reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged more densely than the right side reinforcing rib 6455. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib 6456. In addition, in FIG. 228 (a) and FIG. 228 (b), the cross section in the plane which divides the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 in the thickness direction is shown. Further, while the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have a common thickness, they are designed so as to change the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction in accordance with the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right side reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a joint portion to be coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. A mode in which the distance between the 6455a and the upper facing portion 6455b, which is arranged parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, increases toward the back side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. Mainly includes a lower facing portion 6455c, which is arranged so as to face each other in a manner inclined by.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion in which the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point, and the load can be distributed in the front-rear position. As a result, the load capacity of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and it is possible to prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, the generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower facing portion 6455c is reinforced on the right side because the separation width from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 becomes longer toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the back side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to increase). It is possible to increase the allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself, and it is possible to avoid collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 when the displacement occurs.

Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the displacement and the load transmitted via the right front cover 10322 to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the downstream side (lower right side) of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322, but the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member for operation. It is possible to reduce the rate at which the load, displacement, and vibration associated with the operation and drive of the device 10300 are transmitted to the operation handle 51. As a result, it is possible to ensure the playability that the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left side reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back surface side, and is a joint portion to be coupled to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. The 6456a, the upper facing portion 6456b which is arranged parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and the overhanging portion 6456c which projects toward the back side from the back side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower facing portion 6456d which is arranged parallel to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap, and is mainly provided.

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion in which the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point, and the load can be distributed in the front-rear position. As a result, the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and it is possible to prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, the generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The overhanging portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that inclines in a direction (downward) away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the back surface side. As a result, the overhanging portion 6456c is not formed as a portion that always abuts on the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that abuts only when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhanging portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement when the displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

The upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at a surface position with the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front-rear position where the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the back covering portion 10014b when the back covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower facing portion and the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. Is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 abut on the back covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed and the amount of downward displacement of the back covering portion 10014b can be reduced. ..

As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower plate 50 (the space where the balls are stored and which the player may touch) becomes. It can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the back covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, but the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back covering portion 10014b. Can be suppressed. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate an abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged on the right reinforcing ribs as compared to the 6455 placement intervals. Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load. In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand that touches the ball stored in the upper plate 17 arranged on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load is likely to be uneven on the left and right sides. By arranging them in a row, it is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by making the right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 different in shape, it is possible to cope with loads of different modes. That is, in the right-side reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to block the transmission of the load, thereby causing a momentary load or impact via the operating device 10300. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 distributes and supports the load so that the weight is applied to the back through the upper plate 17 for a long time. It is possible to prevent the lining portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to correspond to the mode of the load which tends to be a problem.

229 (a) is a top view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower plate unit. It is a left side view in the arrow R direction view of 6400.

As shown in FIGS. 229 (a) and 230 (b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the concave shape portion 6414 of the lining base member 6410 to the left and right. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed on the upper surface of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 in a surface contact manner, while being arranged away from the recessed shape portion 6414. The details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 will be described below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are portions of a portion that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface in the same manner as the deformation when a part of the main body portion 6411 of the lining base member 6410 is pressed from above. It is a part that constitutes the front and back, and the shape of one of the front and back and the shape of the other are similar. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 in the lower surface view and the inner shape of the concave shape portion 6414 in the upper view are formed as a shape whose scale is changed by the amount that can secure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411. To. Therefore, from one shape, the other shape can be easily imagined.

As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the width of the projecting shape portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the protruding shape portion The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are large. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a manner of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, which will be described in detail later.

Here, in a game-playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be displaced up and down as the player operates the operation device 10300. In relation to this displacement, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are formed of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410. Shavings may be generated due to collision or rubbing.

When shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, shavings may enter the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, resulting in malfunction, or shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor and induce erroneous detection. It is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings because it is possible to do so.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings or reduce the amount of shavings generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414, so that the main body portion 6411 It is possible to eliminate the displacement of other parts such as.

On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member. Since it is converted into a deformation of 6450, it is possible to eliminate the need for displacement of other parts such as the main body portion 6411.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the main body 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the lining foundation member 6410 is on the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that rises and inclines toward. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is often placed on a concrete or flooring floor in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt on the floor adheres to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body 6411 is difficult to see from the player, it is preferable to avoid dirt from adhering to the product as long as it is a product.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the projecting shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the front side. When the shape portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is created between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, the portion that comes into contact with the floor surface and adheres to dirt is limited to the protrusion shape portion 6413. can do. Therefore, when the front frame 10014 is installed in a playable state, the game store side only needs to wipe off the dirt on the projecting shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. ..

In addition, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hooking portion on which a finger is hung when carrying the front frame 10014. In the past, the lower plate portion was placed in the center of the left and right sides of the front plate, so it is easy to hook the lower plate portion and lift the front frame and assemble it to the back frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, since the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left side (opening / closing shaft side) in the left-right direction, it is difficult to lift and assemble the front frame 10014 by hooking a hand on the lower plate 50. It is said that it has a similar structure.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking a hand on the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the root side of the operation handle 41, so that the operation handle 51 may be damaged. Is not preferable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the projecting shape portion 6413, which also functions as a finger hook portion, is arranged at the left and right center positions so that it can be recommended to hook a hand on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400 to lift the front frame 10014. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the back frame by hooking his / her hand on the projecting shape portion 6413 to lift the front frame 10014 and axially supporting the front frame 10014 to the back frame.

Then, by setting the work procedure to wipe off the dirt before and after the time when the finger is hung, it is possible to make the operator aware of the part requiring the wiping of the dirt in relation to the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to wipe off the dirt.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is not excessive or deficient according to the amount of deformation expected in the protruding shape portion 6413. More specifically, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body portion 6411, the gap between the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface becomes larger toward the front side, which is formed wider as the protruding shape portion 6413 faces the front side. It corresponds to the increase in the amount of deformation (deflection amount) due to the load.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, even if the projecting shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014, it is easy to secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor. Can be done. On the other hand, when the projecting shape portion 6413 bends and deforms to the limit and the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 can easily come into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body 6411.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is heavier than expected or the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is overloaded, a part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on the floor.

Further, it is said that the deformable amount is formed larger toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413. It works well even during the game execution. For example, when exchanging the Senryo box, a clerk at a game store slides the Senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. At this time, the Senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are moved. May collide. If the impact or load due to this collision is accumulated in the constituent members as fatigue, the constituent members will be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable amount of the projecting shape portion 6413 increases toward the front side where it easily collides with the Senryo box. Therefore, the impact and load due to the collision with the Senryo box can be easily released by deformation (deflection deformation), and the destruction of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable playing environment for the player.

Further, on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the Senryo box and the main body portion 6411 collide with each other on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413 when the Senryo box is replaced. As a result, the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 is damaged can be reduced, so that it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable playing environment for the player.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 are shown, and the outer shapes of the other operating devices 10300 are schematically shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b) of the V-shaped design member 6450 (FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (FIG. 228)). b) Supported by)).

Since the main body 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the rear and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body 6451, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 Is directed in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component for returning the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left and right center. For example, the restoring force of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 from the bending deformation is directed upward and obliquely.

As a result, it is possible to deal with not only the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement. For example, as in the present embodiment, even when the moving direction of the operating portion of the operating device 10300 (for example, the swinging operating member 10310) does not have a left-right component, the downward load given by the player is left-right. It may have a directional component, and when such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can cope with the displacement of the operating device 10300 in the left-right direction by bending and deforming based on its own curved shape (absorbing the displacement in the left-right direction or using the restoring force). (The arrangement of the operating device 10300 can be returned), and further, the reaction forces from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are directed upward and toward the center of the left and right, so that the operating device 10300 can be returned to the position before the displacement at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design (see FIG. 207) of the front frame 10014 in the front view.

233 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa of FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (b) is a lower plate unit 6400 in line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the vicinity of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in the assembled state of the lower plate unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is a protrusion of the lower plate forming member 6420 (the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 on the back surface side portion). It is pressed against the end portion (lower end portion)) and the ball discharge device 6430 (flame portion 6431a). As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that allows contact from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224) in the front-back and left-right directions, and is L-shaped. As described above, the lower end portion of the plate portion 6423 comes into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233 (c)). As a result, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, since the ball pulling lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 when not operated, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined by the closing plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the lower part of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being lowered while adopting the configuration (arranged).

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width becomes wider and the recessed depth increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed so as to be more easily bent toward the front side.

As a result, it is possible to impart sufficient bending performance to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 tends to be large, so that when the operation device 10300 is operated, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lining foundation member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) by the load. This will be described in detail.

As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. The operation timing and operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player is made to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification, and has a role of drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is stopped and controlled at the initial position from the start of the game to the execution of a specific reach effect (see FIG. 215 (a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, the player executes a push operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 for an operation for a notification (notification such as "press a button!") That prompts an operation in the display effect, a stage switching, and the like. To. Therefore, most of the load generated by the operation is the load generated when the lens member 10317 is pushed in and operated, and the load is along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215 (a)). Since the frequency of notifications is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load is high.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is driven and controlled so as to displace the swing operation member 10310 up and down. For example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at a downward position. The notification prompting the operation is executed in the state (see FIG. 215 (b)).

In this case, the operation direction is the direction Y17b (see FIG. 215 (b)) that is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position, and is in that direction Y17b. A load is generated along the line. Since the notification is generated only when a specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is widened toward the front side and the recessed depth is increased. Therefore, the load is increased toward the front side. It is formed so that the corresponding performance of is high.

That is, as compared with the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, it can be configured to cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of the load in an appropriate place, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It is possible to easily avoid being easily damaged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since both the side closer to the player and the side where the load is frequently generated during operation are the front side, the concave shape portion 6414 is wide enough toward the front side. , But not necessarily limited to this, although it was formed in the deep bottom. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of occurrence of the load during the operation is reversed. In this case, the concave shape is widened toward the back side. By forming it on the deep bottom, it is possible to configure it so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of load occurrence at the right place compared to the case where it has a common shape in the front-back direction, and it deforms too much due to the applied load. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem or the fragility due to insufficient deformation.

As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b hits the main body portion 6411 vertically at a position on the left and right outer sides of both left and right width ends of the recessed shape portion 6414. Get in touch.

As a result, the ratio of the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 to the recessed shape portion 6414 can be reduced as compared with the case where the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b abuts on the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the recessed shape portion 6414 from being damaged by the load when operating the operation device 10300.

Further, as a response to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the bending of the plate-shaped portion from the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is used. Therefore, the load capacity can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 in the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and the left and right and trailing edge portions of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. A vertically long portion on the front side that is formed to be taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a by being coupled to the front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b that hangs down in a plate shape. It mainly includes a 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d extending from the front side vertically elongated portion 6426c to the back side and being fitted with the operation device 10300. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are appropriately referred to.

The flat plate-shaped portion 6426a is formed to be wider than the left-right width of the recessed shape portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. A hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the lining base member 6410 (between the upper and lower sides). That is, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a does not abut on the main body portion 6411, but the extended end portion of the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b formed in a U-shape when viewed from the bottom (see FIG. 225) abuts on the main body portion 6411. , The position of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a with respect to the lining foundation member 6410 is determined.

As described above, since the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are formed in a box shape with an open lower portion instead of a block shape, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. It is composed. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed with respect to the load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion The 6426b can also be flexed and deformed, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the lining base member 6410 (main body portion 6411, protruding shape portion 6413, and concave shape portion 6414) arranged below the operating device 10300 can be formed. It can be further prevented from being damaged.

The hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b extends to the upper surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend until it enters the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, a space is formed between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shaped portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in FIG. 234). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shaped portion 6414 also serves as a drainage. For example, even when the liquid has infiltrated through the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted through the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be infiltrated into the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid infiltrating behind. Thereby, the infiltration of the liquid can be easily stopped by the front frame 10014.

The front vertically elongated portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operating device 10300 by the fitting portion 6426d extending to the back side, and the lower portion on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load given to the operation device 10300 by the player can be distributed not only to the main body 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load given to each configuration can be weakened. it can.

Further, a space is also formed between the vertically elongated portion 6426c on the front side and the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the vertically elongated portion 6426c on the front side and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drainage. For example, even when the liquid has infiltrated through the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted through the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be infiltrated into the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid infiltrating behind. Thereby, the infiltration of the liquid can be easily stopped by the front frame 10014.

The fitting portion 6426d is formed in a laterally long shape so as to be matable with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to the lower surface and the front side vertically elongated portion 6426c formed on the extension base end side.

Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can withstand even when a load is applied to displace the operating device 10300 downward. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

Here, the operating member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load associated with the operation and vibration of the player's operation member 10300 is transmitted to the plate-shaped support portion 6426 via the resin member, and is transmitted to the lining foundation member 6410 arranged downstream thereof, where the plate-like shape is transmitted. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear in the direction of the load transmitted from the operating member 10300 to the main body 6411. The component of the direction can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur when the load generated from the operating device 10300 is transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, which affects the flow mode of the launched ball, or the board is cracked due to the load transmitted to the board boxes 100 to 104 and the electronic board. Can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the upper effect device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In addition, in FIGS. 235 and 236, the above-mentioned lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are not shown, and the upper effect device 6500 is shown in a state where the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper effect device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the sound device 6610 arranged in pairs on the left and right, and has an illumination substrate 6570 in which light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. , Each component that acts as an intermediary for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (leaf spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the direction of separation from the metal main body 10014a is arranged on the back surface side of the upper effect device 6500. As a result, the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the upper effect device 6500 to the metal main body 10014a can be increased (stable fastening and fixing).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper effect device 6500. In addition, in FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled upward is shown.

The upper effect device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, a front side unit 6520 to 6550 that occupies a front side portion below the upper lid member 6510, and a rear side unit 6560 to arranged behind the front side unit 6520 to 6550. Mainly equipped with 6580.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper effect device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate formed as a semi-elliptical plate-shaped portion obtained by dividing a long ellipse on the left and right into front and back. A plurality of insertion holes 6512 formed up and down near the front side edge portion of the main body plate portion 6511 so that fastening screws can be inserted, and extending downward from the back side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A female screw hole is formed from the back surface of the extension tip, and a plurality of fastening portions 6513 are mainly provided so as to be able to fasten a fastening screw to be inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a into the female screw hole.

The back surface side portion of the upper lid member 6510 from which the fastening portion 6513 extends is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and the other constituent members of the upper effect device 6500 are supported by the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6512. That is, the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 can be utilized to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper effect device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 is provided with a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in such a manner that it tilts forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged so as to face the front surface of the plate on which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513 and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the expanding rib 419a), the upper lid member 6510 has the sound device 6610 and the metal body portion 10014a. It can be prevented from coming off from.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and a concave-convex shape portion 6514 formed in a manner of projecting downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. With this uneven shape portion 6514, it is possible to increase the force that resists the load in the direction perpendicular to the plane (maintaining the shape) as compared with the case where the upper lid member 6510 having the same thickness is composed of a plate-shaped member having a smooth surface. Can be made easier).

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper effect device 6500. In addition, in FIG. 239 and FIG. 240, the illustration of the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is omitted, and the state in which the front side units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear side units 6560 to 6580 is shown. In the present embodiment, the upper effect device 6500 is moved by moving the front unit 6520 to 6550 in the front diagonally downward direction (the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed and the direction along which the surface is aligned) with respect to the rear unit 6560 to 6580. Can be disassembled, but details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the front unit 6520 to 6550 has a role of receiving, refracting, or transmitting light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED, and the rear unit 6560 to 6580 emits light of an LED or the like. It has a role as a means and a role of supporting an illuminated substrate on which a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

241 (a) is a front view of the rear unit 6560 to 6580, FIG. 241 (b) is a front view of the illuminated substrate 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective of the rear unit 6560 to 6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear unit 6560 to 6580 includes a partition member 6560 formed in a manner of partitioning the internal space into a plurality of parts in a front view, and a plurality of LEDs for irradiating the partition member 6560 with light. A pair of the illuminated substrate 6570 to be arranged and the partition member 6560 are laminated and arranged on the back side, and are arranged with a slight gap from the illuminated substrate 6570 in the internal region of the outer shape, and are surface-supported in the outer shape portion. Mainly includes a back support member 6580 and.

It should be noted that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap. Means that.

The partition member 6560 is arranged so as to be close to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570 and face each other, and is configured to partition the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570 from the vicinity of the illuminated substrate 6570. To. By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each section, and the light emission mode of the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 is significantly different. However, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

The partition member 6560 has a facing plate portion 6651 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed in the left and right central portions of the facing plate portion 6651, and a hole in the left and right lower portions of the facing plate portion 6651. A left-right light hole 6563 to be provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted into the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the facing plate portion 6651. , A rectangular tubular shape that surrounds the central light hole 6562 and extends to the front side of the facing plate portion 6651, and a long tubular portion that surrounds the left and right light holes 6563 to the front side of the facing plate portion 6651. A plate-shaped connection formed from an extended left and right tubular portion 6567 and a T-shaped plate-shaped portion in front view, and connecting the opposing plate portion 6651, the central tubular portion 6566, and the left and right tubular portions 6567 on the front side of the opposing plate portion 6651. Mainly includes a unit 6568.

The facing plate portion 6651 includes flange portions 6651a to 6651c that project from the upper edge portion to the back surface side in a long left-right shape. The first flange portion 6651a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6651b is formed in pairs on the left and right, and extends from a position where a cut is made from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6651a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564. The third flange portion 6651c is formed in pairs on the left and right sides, and extends from a position opposite to the end portion of the second flange portion 6651b with the fastening portion 6564 in between to the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the plate-shaped joint portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c has a role as a shielding plate for preventing light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570, and the cut thereof is arranged at least on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is configured in a place where the light emitted from the LED is less likely to leak. In other words, even if light is incident from the outside, the light is hard to be mixed with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange portion 6651a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a position between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563, and the LED is intentionally placed on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is a break where it is not placed. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

The cut between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at a place where the fastening portion 6564 is arranged, and the place where the alternative portion that blocks light is arranged is taken as the cut. It was done. That is, even if the light travels to the cut, the light that is about to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that the occurrence of the event that the light leaks from the cut can be suppressed.

Here, the flange portions 6651a to 6651c can be configured as a series of seamless portions, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c cannot be sufficiently secured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. (Assuming a downward load applied to a member arranged in front of the partition member 6560, a load given by gravity or a player), it is necessary to counteract only by the force generated by the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fastening portion 6564. Occurs. In the present embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the illuminated substrate 6570 decreases, which limits the places where the LEDs can be arranged. This will reduce the design freedom of the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6651a to 6651c into lengths that can secure the rigidity, it is possible to counter the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 with the rigidity of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, the work man-hours can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the illuminated substrate 6570 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length in the long direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6651c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the upper effect device 6500 is formed from a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left-right center in the top view (see FIG. 237). In general, the load given by the player (for example, the hanging load) is applied at the front end of the upper effect device 6500, so that the load given by the player at the left and right center of the upper effect device 6500 is maximum. And gradually becomes smaller as it approaches the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6651c are intentionally made to have different lengths. More specifically, the left-right length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right sides of the first flange portion 6561a is longer than the left-right length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximized. Further, the third flange portion 6651c arranged on the left and right sides thereof is longer than the left and right length of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left-right length is the shortest in the left-right center portion, and gradually increases as it approaches the left-right end portion. As a result, a counterforce can be generated without excess or deficiency in the load applied to the upper effect device 6500.

As a result, deformation and displacement of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 can be stably maintained. The maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case where the force for holding the illuminated substrate 6570 is reduced due to the deformation or displacement in the separation direction to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being displaced, and the deformation in the approaching direction is not limited. This also includes the case where a load in the compression direction is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 due to displacement or displacement to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being destroyed or deformed.

The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563 are a plurality of through holes formed corresponding to the LED pattern arranged on the illumination substrate 6570. The central light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes sized to surround a plurality of LEDs. ..

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed so as to project toward the back side of the fastening portion 6564. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion extending to the front side in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a in which a fastening screw can be inserted at the bottom of the tip. A fastening screw that passes through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the insertion hole 6565a from the back surface side, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to the partition unit 6540 described later. With this configuration, the step of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear unit 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240). it can.

The central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear end portions of the front unit 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylinder portion 6566 and the left and right cylinder portions 6567 is incident on the front unit 6520 to 6550.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 is a portion in which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper effect device 6500, and the central tubular portion 6566. The upper surface is arranged at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. As a result, since the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 takes charge of the load prior to the central cylinder portion 6566, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylinder portion 6566, and the central cylinder portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. It is possible to easily avoid such a situation.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 is extended downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right tubular portions 6567. As a result, when the load is transmitted to the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portions reaching the left and right tubular portions 6567 also counteracts the load. can do. In this case, since the plate-shaped portion is formed, a counterforce can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-shaped portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right tubular portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The illuminated circuit board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and is a portion to be bored or cut out in a plate-shaped substrate portion 6571 and the substrate portion 6571, and is a fastening portion through which the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted. The insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 formed in the substrate portion 6571 and through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of LEDs arranged in the left and right central portions of the substrate portion 6571 (FIG. 241 It is formed of a first illumination unit 6574 formed from (shown by a uniform rectangle in b) and a plurality of LEDs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illumination unit 6574, and is formed at the vertical center of the substrate unit 6571. A second lighting unit 6575 arranged near the unit, a third lighting unit 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate unit 6571, and a connector 6577 connecting electrical wiring (not shown). Mainly prepare.

As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction, and is relative to the partition member 6560. It is arranged according to the positional relationship. That is, the first illumination unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second illumination unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third illumination unit 6576 is under the partition member 6560. Each is placed below the edge. As a result, each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area partitioned by the partition member 6560. The first illumination unit 6574 and the second illumination unit 6575 illuminate the inner region of the partition member 6560, whereas the third illumination unit 6576 illuminates the outer region of the partition member 6560.

The third illumination unit 6576 is shown so as to be partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in the front view. As will be described later, since the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 travels diagonally downward by the light receiving member 6558, it is necessary to avoid a situation in which the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is blocked by the partition member 6560. As a result, the third illumination unit 6576 and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to overlap at least partially in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the substrate portion 6571 is designed so that the fastening force at the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 does not act on the fastening insertion portion 6572. That is, the illuminated substrate 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed from a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval) when viewed from the front. As a result, the assembly efficiency can be improved, and the details will be described later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, is a pair of members having substantially symmetrical shapes with each other, and is a front plate portion 6581 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6570 and its front. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the back side, and a front plate. A pair of rear box portions 6584, which is connected to the left and right edges of the portion 6581 (the edge opposite to the opposite side of the pair of members) and the lower edge portion and is formed in a box shape and is opened to the back side. A box-shaped lower surface box portion 6585 having a smooth upper surface and being opened downward on the side close to the rear surface box portion 6584 on the mating side, which is a portion of the portion 6584, and the lower surface box portion 6585 and the front plate portion thereof. A plate-shaped portion connected to the 6581 and facing the mating member (back support member 6580) and facing the facing plate portion 6586, and a cut penetrating vertically between the facing plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. It mainly includes a notch portion 6587 which is a notch.

The front plate portion 6581 is a plurality of fastening supports composed of an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A through hole formed from a portion 6581a and a vertically long oval shape having a width slightly longer than the diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560, and is arranged at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front-rear direction. A plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly bored in the lower edge portion forming the boundary between the plurality of positioning holes 6581b and the rear box portion 6584 and capable of inserting fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front unit 6520 to 6550, and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c thereof. Similar to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of positioning elongated holes 6581d formed in a long hole shape along the lower edge portion forming the boundary with the rear box portion 6584 and used for positioning the front unit 6520 to 6550, and an electric wire. It is mainly provided with a wiring hole 6581e, which is formed at a position corresponding to the connector 6577 of the decorative substrate 6570 and allows electrical wiring to pass in the front-rear direction.

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes a minor diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560, while the outer width in the left-right direction is 6570. It is made longer than the left-right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted inside the oval rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the illuminated substrate 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the oval rib. (See FIG. 244 (a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front unit 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front unit 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the direction of inclination in which the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination. (See FIG. 247).

As a result, it becomes easier to avoid interference between the front unit 6520 to 6550 and the illuminated substrate 6570 as compared with the case where the opening is made in the front-rear direction, and the positions of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are moved closer to the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed with the same size, a wide arrangement area of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be secured, and when the illuminated substrate 6570 is formed with the same size. The area where the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the flange portions 6651a to 6651c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (a load in the hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion for suppressing the forward tilt of the partition member 6560.

The upper plate portion 6583 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be matable with the fastening portion 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is formed in a rectangular shape in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513) with the upper and rear sides open.

The rear box portion 6584 includes an overhanging portion 6584a that projects toward the front side of the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmission portion 6584b made of punching metal that is covered with an opening formed in the overhanging portion 6584a, and a right member. The light receiving portion 6584c formed from the light transmitting member arranged at the right end portion of the overhanging portion 6584a, and the light receiving portion 6584c arranged at the position closest to the center of the upper end portion (the position closer to the front plate portion 6581), and are in an assembled state. (See FIG. 207), the pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed so as to generate an urging force in the direction of repulsion from the metal main body 10014a and the insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are inserted. It mainly includes a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which the fastening screws are fastened.

The overhanging portion 6584a has an upper edge portion formed from a shape that follows the shape of the lower edge of the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 241), and the upper surface thereof constitutes a guide surface that guides the front unit 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission unit 6584b is a portion through which a sound wave generated from the sound device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. The sound transmission unit 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating film 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the audio device 6610.

The light receiving unit 6584c is a portion that receives light emitted from the lighting unit 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED arranged in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014 and shows the player as a light emitting effect. Is. In this embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a manner different from that of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, while the light emitting effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed at the time of the variation effect having a high probability of occurrence, the normal variation effect and reach effect, the demonstration effect, etc., the light emission effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a probability of occurrence. It is executed when an extremely low and extremely advantageous effect is generated for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c.

The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion through which the front unit 6520 to 6550 enters from the lower side, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted from the back side is fastened to the metal main body portion 10014a.

The cutout portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from an exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is bored up and down on the lower surface of the left and right central portion (the portion farthest from the vibrating film 6611) of the acoustic device 6610. To form. That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by the support plate portion 10014d supporting the back side of the sound device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as a sound toward the back side due to the vibration of the diaphragm 6611, as opposed to a sound output toward the front side due to the vibration of the vibration film 6611. This is the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 to the outside through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex type speaker). By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, it is possible to simultaneously generate sounds having different tones.

244 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241. FIG. 244 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the CCXLIVb of FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 in the −CCXLIVb line, and FIG. 245 (a) shows the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 6570, a partial cross-sectional view of the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610, FIG. 245 (b) shows the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. 241. It is a partial cross-sectional view, and FIG. 246 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241. FIG. 246 (b). Is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illuminated substrate 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. 241.

In addition, in FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is enlarged and shown. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. As a result, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the illuminated substrate 6570 (vibration width) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. ..

As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), the fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6580a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the illuminated substrate 6570 sandwiched therein. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, in the illuminated substrate 6570, the fastening insertion portion 657 is only aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening portion.

Further, while the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a abuts on the back surface of the illuminated substrate 6570, the partition member 6560 is separated from the illuminated substrate 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is not sandwiched in the front-rear position, the illuminated substrate 6570 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilt displacement).

Further, the lower edge portion of the illuminated substrate 6570 is not supported by the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This also applies to FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape to such an extent that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244 (a)). It will be described that the forming in this way facilitates the assembly of the partition member 6560 to the back surface support member 6580.

As in the conventional case, for example, when the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564, the partition member 6560 is positioned vertically and horizontally with respect to the back support member 6580. Will need to be assembled.

However, in the present embodiment, since the illumination board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, the back support member 6580 of the illumination board 6570 is assembled when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align with the above, which may make the work difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ribs and the positioning holes 6581b of the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, and the fastening support portion 6581a have a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Since it is formed by, it can be assembled even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

As an example of the assembly order, first, the illuminated substrate 6570 is attached to the compartment member 6560 so that the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the compartment member 6560 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570. At this time, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 does not have to be determined in the long direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be an arbitrary position.

In the present embodiment, the flange portions 6651a to 6651c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illuminated substrate 6570, so that when the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled to the compartment member 6560, the compartment member of the illuminated substrate 6570 The misalignment with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not have to be determined in the elongated direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be an arbitrary position. That is, rough positioning (for example, positioning such that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242) and positioning with a sufficiently long allowable width in the vertical direction) may be performed. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved with respect to the back support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, screw in the fastening screw (see FIG. 244 (a)).

In this state, even if the position of the illuminated substrate 5670 is displaced, the partition member 6560 is lowered to a position where the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)) by its own weight. And aligned with the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged non-fixed between the partition member 6560 and the back support member, and it is generally easy to have difficulty in aligning the illuminated substrate 6570. By forming the ribs and the positioning holes 6581b of the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, and the fastening support portion 6581a in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape), although it is an assembly mode. , Assembling efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is misaligned, it is configured to be corrected to the original position by its own weight. Therefore, due to the misalignment of the illumination board 5670, the effect of the light emitting effect during the game is maintained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

The expansion hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). The central light hole 6562 is arranged in an inverted T shape at the left and right central portions (arranged at four locations, see FIG. 241), and is arranged in a substantially gourd shape (approximately pot shape) on the outer side thereof. It is mainly provided with a direct entry hole 6562b (arranged at eight locations, see FIG. 241). The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later in FIG. 263.

The expansion hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole through which the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined so that the opposite distance increases toward the direction.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be defined. That is, the way the light is shown to the player can be changed depending on the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion raised toward the front side of the expansion hole 6562a is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closed portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). As a result, the light that has passed through the expansion hole 6562a can be incident on the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521 without leaking.

FIG. 246 (a) shows the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246 (b) shows the positioning slot 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the front side units 6520 to 6550 are formed from the rear side units 6560 to the rear side units 6560 to along the inclination direction. It is assembled to 6580 and fastened and fixed.

Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved as compared with the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the illumination substrate 6570 can be positioned so as to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the illumination substrate 6570 can be secured. .. On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front unit 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the audio device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed on the left and right outer sides where the vibration film 6611 of the speaker is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the front side. It can be formed (see FIGS. 235 and 246).

As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning slot 6581d incline downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. The reason why it is formed (not inclined) along the above is that the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in the back support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a. In the present embodiment, since the pulling direction is set in the same front-rear direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a, the shapes of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are distorted. It is formed in (a shape whose shape changes depending on the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back surface side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated by fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the wall thickness of the upper edge of the portion to which the load is applied due to fastening is thinned toward the center of the hole, so that the load is imbalanced between the upper edge and the rest. Is likely to occur, and the fastening screw may loosen depending on the usage condition and the number of years of use.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be adopted, but the difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points results in high cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening points in question, the cost will increase due to the inability to make the fastening screw a common part, while the fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, which will lead to high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is arranged so as to face each other across the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in a recessed shape in the front wall 6620 ( It includes a retaining plate portion 6621 that is a part of the portion (concave formed) and is formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion on which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area in which the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the back support member 6580. Further, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, further progress of the fastening screw is restricted and the fastening screw is prevented from falling out. Can be prevented.

When the fastening screw is not loose, the retaining plate portion 6621 is formed with a size that is slightly spaced from the head of the screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when the sound is output from the sound device 6610, the vibration of the sound device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit from 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

Further, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 that are recessed at the back position of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoidance recess 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) to such an extent that contact with the head of the fastening screw can be avoided (a slight gap between the contact avoiding recess 6622). It is recessed in the dimension that can be

As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. Further, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same front-rear direction as the resin die punching direction, the wall thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, which is sufficient. Fastening force can be generated. Therefore, it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a will loosen, but if the fastening screw loosens, the same function as the retaining plate portion 6621 described above can be avoided from contact. It can be generated in the recess 6622.

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when the sound is output from the sound device 6610, the vibration of the sound device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit from 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, the fastening screw is configured so that the transmission of vibration generated by the contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw can be grasped. It is possible to notice the occurrence of looseness, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the fastening screw is left loose.

For example, it is exemplified that the transmission of vibration is configured to generate an abnormal noise or the vibration is detected.

As described with reference to FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged close to the back support member 6580, while being arranged without being fixed to the back support member 6580. Will be done. As a result, the acoustic device 6610 and the illumination board 6570 can be arranged close to each other with the back support member 6580 in between, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illumination board 6570 for illumination. It is possible to prevent the substrate 6570 from cracking.

Here, the partition member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position other than the effect portion (that is, the illumination unit 6574 to 6576) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and the ratio of the effect portion on the surface of the illuminated substrate 6570 is determined. For the purpose of ensuring a large size, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

Therefore, the problem that the partition member 6560 is likely to be insufficiently fixed is likely to occur, and without countermeasures, the partition member 6560 may transmit the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580, and the partition member 6610 may be transmitted. When the 6560 vibrates, the effect of the effect may be poor, the fastening portion may be loosened, or the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partition member 6560 is fixed from another direction to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560. On the other hand, it will be described with reference to FIG. 247.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper effect device 6500. In FIG. 247, the fastening location, the fastening direction, and the fastening direction of each component of the upper effect device 6500 are schematically shown. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the upper effect device 6500 is configured such that the front and lower surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580 are surrounded by the front units 6520 to 6550, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper lid member 6510. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front unit 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In the present embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted via the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is in the thickness direction (see FIG. 238). Easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction).

Along with this displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the center of the front and rear, the distance between the front and rear of the insertion holes 6512 formed apart from the front and back is shortened. As a result, a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the back surface side is generated, and a compression load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

That is, since the partition member 6560 can be sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 to apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. Can be done.

Here, even if the width in the front-rear direction of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, when the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displacement to the side away from the partition member 6560), the partition unit 6540 gives the partition member 6560. The load applied is likely to be insufficient, and the action of suppressing the vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the compartment unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the guided unit 6550, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the compartment unit 6540 from being displaced to the front side. As a result, the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 can be sufficiently secured.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254 (a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 The transmission direction of the vibration can be set to be along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

As a result, the bending deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening points can be suppressed from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even when the vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

By devising the fastening points as shown in FIG. 247, the illuminated substrate 6570 is placed close to the acoustic device 6610, which is prone to vibration, in a non-fixed state, thereby preventing damage to the illuminated substrate 6570. It is possible to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560 by transmitting the vibration to the partition member 6560 that prevents the illuminated substrate 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by an allowable amount or more.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintaining performance of the upper effect device 6500 while improving the durability of the illumination substrate 6570 arranged close to the audio device 6610.

Further, one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment is to correspond to the displacement amount of the upper lid member 6510. That is, since the upper lid member 6510 has a configuration in which the back surface side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in a thin plate shape in the front-rear direction, the upper lid member 6510 is likely to be curved and displaced in a manner in which the displacement amount on the front surface side is larger than that on the back surface side. It is for that.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end portion of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the radius of curvature is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 starting from the back end portion due to the shape of the upper lid member 6510. Can be curved and displaced at. In this case, the upper lid member 6510 itself is given a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members arranged below it are given a compressive load.

Since the direction of this compression load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the displacement amount increases (toward the front side), it is relative to the front-rear direction. It will follow the direction of downward inclination toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction that is downwardly inclined toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. Therefore, the fastening direction of the fastening screw and the upper lid It is possible to bring the direction of the compression load generated by the displacement of the member 6510 closer to that of the member 6510.

As a result, in addition to being able to sufficiently generate a resistance force against the compression load at the fastening position, the component of the compression load applied in the direction in which the fastening screw is sheared (the direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) becomes small, so that the fastening screw breaks. Can be suppressed.

The fastening screws that form the fastening direction in the direction of downward inclination toward the front side are used for fastening the plate guide unit 6550, and the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the lower side and the back side of the illuminated substrate 6570. (See screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246 (a)). In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced. Therefore, the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the displacement allowance of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, even if the illuminated substrate 6570 is displaced, if the displacement amount becomes excessive, the excessive displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be regulated by making it possible to contact the plate guide unit 6550.

Further, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the illuminated substrate 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration source.

In the present embodiment, the fastening portions (fastening support portion 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left and right center sides (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction descends toward the front side. Fastening portions (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the direction of inclination are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not arranged in close proximity to each other.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation (displacement) generated on one fastening portion on the other fastening portion. That is, even if the fastening portion along the front-rear direction is loosened and the displacement occurs in the front-rear direction, the affected portion can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that the fastening portion is inclined downward. It is possible to avoid a load in the direction of inclination (along the front-rear direction) from the fastening direction with respect to the fastening portion along the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the screw.

Further, the resistance force of the upper effect device 6500 to the load in the pushing down direction can be improved by fixing the portion that is long in the front-rear direction on the left and right center side with the fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is downwardly inclined toward the front side is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the pushing down direction than the fastening portion in which the fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction is downwardly inclined toward the front side on the left and right outer sides formed short along the front-rear direction, the resistance to the load in the pushing-down direction is reduced. It is possible to secure the arrangement area of the lighting substrate 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 while minimizing the influence of the above.

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560-6580 on the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line of FIG. 241 (a). In addition, the specific part is enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the illuminated substrate 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 comes into contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. Further, while the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partition member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, the contact positions are formed so as not to coincide with each other in the front and rear directions.

With this configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 and adjust the susceptibility to displacement. It will be described in order below. First, the improvement of the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described.

Here, when the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 come into contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at positions that coincide with each other in the front and rear, for some reason (error during resin molding, improper fastening, etc.), the partition When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the plate thickness of the illuminated substrate 6570, a compressive force is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570, and when the applied load is large, electricity is applied. The decorative substrate 6570 may crack.

Further, even when a compressive force is not applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 at the time of assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, so that a load (for example, a load in the compression direction) is applied. There is a possibility that the illumination substrate 6570 may be cracked by this load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions of contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 on the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 do not match in the front and rear (there are places where they abut at offset positions). Even if a load is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the illuminated substrate 6570 but a load that bends the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, it is possible to deal with the bending and deformation of the illuminated substrate 6570, so that the possibility of cracking of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be reduced.

Next, the adjustment of the susceptibility to displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described. In the illuminated substrate 6570, the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) of the partition member 6560 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 are inserted to prevent misalignment, but in the present embodiment, they are densely packed near the center of the left and right. Arranged (see FIG. 243).

In addition, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is in contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, the contact resistance between the illuminated substrate 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally large, and sufficient frictional resistance can be secured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 in the vicinity of the left and right central portions of the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, even when the peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to easily maintain the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (particularly the lower side) of the illuminated substrate 6570, neither the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 nor the fastening portion 6564 is arranged, and a load compressed from the front and rear is not generated. Displacement can be made more likely to occur as compared with the left and right central portions of the 6570.

Therefore, when the peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 or the third illumination unit 6576 of the illumination substrate 6570 can be easily changed.

In the present embodiment, since the sound devices 6610 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the vibration mode of the illuminated substrate 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each sound device 6610. That is, there is a case where the sound is output only from the right sound device 6610 and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially, and a case where the sound is output only from the left sound device 6610 and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially. The illumination substrate 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes depending on whether the vibration is caused or the sound is output from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610 to vibrate the left and right sides of the illumination substrate 6570.

Next, the front unit 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550. It should be noted that in FIGS. 249 and 250, the reference numerals of the detailed configurations are omitted for ease of understanding.

In FIGS. 249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illumination substrate 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed so as to surround the optical transmission unit 6520 and forming an outer frame. The state in which the member 6530, the partition unit 6540 that abuts on the front and rear of the partition member 6560 and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 that is guided to the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is shown. To.

In the light emission effect via the front unit 6520 to 6550, the optical transmission unit 6520 receives the light from the first illumination unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives the light from the second illumination unit 6575, and the guided unit. The 6550 receives the light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

251 (a) is a front view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252 (a) is a compartment. FIG. 252 (b) is a front view of the unit 6540, FIG. 252 (b) is a rear view of the compartment unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the board guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a board guide. It is a rear view of the unit 6550.

254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVa-CCLIVA line of FIG. 251 (b), and FIG. 254 (b) is the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG. 251 (b). FIG. 254 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 254 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251 (b).

FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

The partition unit 6540 is formed of a milky white member 6541 formed of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape in a front view, and a light transmission unit 6520 formed through the center of the milky white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. A through hole 6542 formed so that the rear side portion can be inserted, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are portions protruding inward of the through hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530. A pair of post-guidance fastening portions to which a plurality of insertion holes 6544 in which fastening screws for fastening and fixing are inserted so as to be inserted and fastening screws extending in a tubular shape to the back side and passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 are fastened. The 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape that are open to the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547, which are plate-shaped portions and have insertion holes 6547b in which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 are inserted into the plate guide unit 6550, and colorless and transparent light. It mainly includes a transparent lining member 6548 formed from a permeable resin material so as to cover the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541.

The partition unit 6540 has a front side edge formed from a curved shape that bulges toward the front side in the top view like the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape in the front view, and is centered on the back side in the side view. It is formed from a substantially arc shape (see FIG. 254 (a)).

The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a on the upper surface to which fastening screws to be inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side in accordance with the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. As a result, the front end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be brought into contact with each other on a surface, and the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be prevented from changing. Can be done.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed toward the back surface side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion that is arranged to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is located on the back surface of the front bottom portion and the upper surface of the lower plate portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Is formed with a jagged decoration with a short left and right width. This jagged shape is formed by an uneven shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

With this shape, the light incident from the back surface side can be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can be uniformly emitted in front view.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape with the upper side open in a rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. It is mainly provided with a projecting rib 6547c which has a semi-oval shape and projects to the front side.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion where an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed is inserted is formed in the screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) and a load generated by fastening and fixing is received. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is related to the resin die punching direction (in the present embodiment, the front-rear direction), and the wall thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load is applied due to the fastening is increased. It is thinned toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254 (b)).

In this case, the load is likely to be imbalanced between the upper edge portion and the rest, so that there is a possibility that the fastening screw may loosen when a small misalignment occurs repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550. is there.

In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be adopted, but the difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points results in high cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the fastening points in question, the cost will increase due to the inability to make the fastening screw a common part, while the fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, which will lead to high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to be prevented from being displaced from the partition unit 6540 at a plurality of locations. That is, first, the screwing portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the projecting rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, so that the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented from being displaced downward (FIGS. 247 and 254). See (b)).

Secondly, the front upper end portion of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage with the back surface side lower end portion of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6548b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 254 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced toward the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540.

Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced upward with respect to the partition unit 6540.

Since the displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be suppressed mainly by these first to third contact structures, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screwed portion 6554a. Can be done.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V-shape in front view, and has a lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a extending in a plate shape to the back side at the V-shaped lower edge connecting portion and a back edge portion to the back surface. A plurality of locking convex portions 6548b, which are projected to the side in a plate shape, are provided. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

Similar to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, a jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a. As a result, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cutout portion can be supplemented with the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, so that the transparent lining member 6548 extends in the left-right direction. Can emit light uniformly.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the back surface side (see FIG. 254 (c)). In order to form the 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines toward the back surface side like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. ..

If this inclined surface is to be formed by the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the drawing direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the pulling direction is the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while the direction is upward and inclined toward the back side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, which only increases the difficulty of mold design. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but instead is formed by the transparent lining member 6548 (see FIG. 254 (c)). Further, in the assembled state, the white partition member 6560 is arranged to face the lower side of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent lining member 6548 forming the inclined surface, so that the transparent lining member 6548 is directed to the player. It is possible to visually recognize the whole of the above with a uniform color (white).

As a result, the drawing direction of the molding die of the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that is laid on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear drawing direction. While having a shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent lining member 6548 is inclined in the direction of entering the inside of the partition unit 6540 in the front view), the light emission of the transparent lining member 6548 is played in a uniform light emitting mode. It can be visually recognized by a person.

In other words, the partition unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the distance between the top and bottom is narrowed), while the back portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 adjacent to each other. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the above (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in a uniform light emitting mode.

In this case, it is difficult to set the drawing direction of the molding die of the transparent lining member 6548 to the front-rear direction, but the transparent lining member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-rear direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the direction of ascending inclination) as the punching direction of the molding die, the manufacturing process in which the die is resin-molded in the front-rear direction (one direction). The transparent lining member 6548 can be manufactured by the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent lining member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visually recognized through the transparent lining member 6548 can be made to emit light uniformly.

The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is formed of a colored opaque resin material in a substantially V-shape in front view, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580, and the main body resin member 6551 and the main body resin member 6551. An extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape on the back side along the lower edge of the left and right center portions, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure through holes 6553 bored at the back side end portion of the extension plate portion 6552. A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 and facing the insertion plate portion 6547 of the partition unit 6540 to fasten and fix the fastening screws, and the left and right sides of the main body resin member 6551. A plurality of back-side fastening portions 6555, which are arranged along the lower edge and are fastened and fixed with fastening screws passing through the screw insertion portion 6581c (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back-side support member 6580, and the back-side fastening portion 6555 thereof. A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 that are projected in a rib shape between the two and are inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back support member 6580, and a plurality of insertion rib portions that are formed in the front-rear direction on the left and right arms. It mainly includes a through hole 6557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed in a plurality of through holes 6557.

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the die pulling direction. That is, each component is formed in an inclined direction that ascends toward the back surface side or in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6553.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed in a plurality of small hole shapes (the range is subdivided). Is formed). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which a thin wire such as a piano wire is inserted.

Further, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width is narrowed toward the end of the hole and toward the back side. As a result, the hole can be clogged with the fine wire rod. Therefore, when the fine wire rod is further advanced to the back after entering the exhaust pressure through hole 6553, or when a load is applied by hooking it on a specific member. The movement resistance of the thin wire can be increased. As a result, the time required for fraudulent activity can be extended, and fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The front side fastening portion 6554 includes a screw-in portion 6554a to which the fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of wall-shaped positioning wall portions 6554b on the left and right sides of the screw-in portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at intervals slightly longer than the width and length of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned with each other.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the elongated direction. Guided portion 6558a, and a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b formed in a box shape in which the front side of the guided portion 6558a is bulged and the back side is open so as to be fitted into the through hole 6557, and the guided portion 6558b. Mainly includes an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the central side end portion (end portion on the side facing the pair of light receiving members 6558) of the portion 6558a.

The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570. The above-mentioned decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. As a result, light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (1 to 2 in FIG. 241 (b)). However, it can be visually recognized as uniform light over the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of a point light source can be diminished).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture of being inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (a posture in which the light receiving surface is inclined so as to be along the traveling direction of light in the assembling direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guide unit 6550). Since it is mounted in a posture that intersects with the assembling direction), the light emitted from the LED arranged on the third illumination unit 6576 of the illumination substrate 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is received in the front-rear direction. It can be refracted when passing through the member 6558, and can be advanced in a direction of obliquely downward inclination toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed so that the objects arranged on the left and right outer sides have a shorter bulge length toward the front side than the objects arranged on the left and right inner sides. Thereby, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected below the partition unit 6540.

The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550, which is arranged to face the partition member 6560, is formed from a planar shape particularly in the extension plate portion 6552 of the central portion, and has no partition. Difficult to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition for partitioning the area above the extending plate portion 6552, the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

It will be described back to FIG. 249. In the description so far, the portions that receive the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 arranged on the left and right have been described. Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520, which is a portion that receives the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, will be described.

257 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258 (a) is a rear view. It is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (orange in the present embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and is a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body portion 6531 thereof. An opening 6532 that is formed in a substantially gourd shape (approximately a pot shape) in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and a protruding rib 6533 that is projected in a rib shape on the back side along the lower edge of the main body 6531. A plurality of fastening portions 6534, which are arranged at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that fastening screws to be inserted into the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed in, are mainly provided.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is opaque to light, the portion inside the outer shape that transmits light is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed from a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241 (a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521, but since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed differently depending on the difference in the front-rear position, it is in front of the opening 6532. It is possible to allow the player who visually recognizes the light to visually recognize a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width becomes longer as it approaches the opening 6532 (so that both the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction), so that the transparent tubular member 6521 The light that is visually recognized from the front of the opening 6532 around the position where it overlaps the upper plate portion in the front-rear direction is visually recognized in a pattern that spreads horizontally as compared with the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind the range of the light that is visible to the player. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first illumination unit 6574 (or the illumination substrate 6570), it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range. The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

The projecting rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking convex portion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent lining member 6548, and is arranged at a position where the formation of the locking convex portion 6548b is omitted. In the present embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking convex portion 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (they are formed on a curve having the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other. Will be).

FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The optical transmission unit 6520 is a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a bottomed tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface arranged at an intermediate position between the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer circumference, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape covered with a transparent tubular member 6521 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin. , A shielding member 6524 formed in a tubular shape so that a portion opposite to the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523 can be inserted from a colored (white in the present embodiment) resin material, and the shielding member 6524. A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion capable of surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front end portion, and an outer extension extending to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. It mainly includes a frame extension portion 6526.

The bottomed tubular member 6521 is a member that extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction, has a curved shape so that the left and right wall portions are constricted inward, and has an LED arranged in the first lighting unit 6574 and the front-rear direction. A region surrounded by a rear outer shape portion 6521a formed from an outer shape overlapping with the LED, a plurality of light receiving protrusions 6521b projecting from the back outer shape portion 6521a to the back side at a position facing the LED, and a back outer shape portion 6521a. A closing portion 6521c that closes the LED in a plate shape, a plurality of light transmitting holes 6521d formed in the closing portion 6521c at a position facing the LED, and at least the left and right width of the upper wall and the distance between the left and right wall parts toward the front side. It mainly includes a main body tubular portion 6521e that becomes longer toward the main body, and a frame-shaped extending portion 6521f that extends to the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body tubular portion 6521e.

The light receiving protrusion portion 6521b is a portion to be inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by shortening the distance between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illumination unit is connected to the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the facing plate portion 6651 of the partition member 6560. Light can be incident from the 6574 LEDs. As a result, total reflection can be easily generated.

In this way, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, totally reflected and travels to the front side, whereas the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 described above The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, which are recessed in the direction away from the LED, and travels in the air, and the box-shaped light receiving portion The front side wall portion of the 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is made to emit light. Therefore, the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 or the third irradiation unit 6576 can be visually recognized by the player as a uniform light with a low amount of light as compared with the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574. it can.

Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped light receiving portion 6558b is formed is made of a colorless transparent and light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

The frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is generally formed from a similar shape to the back outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is compared with the outer shape of the back outer shape portion 6521a due to the relationship via the main body tubular portion 6521e. And be enlarged.

Therefore, it can be visually recognized by the player as light that illuminates a large area as compared with the size of the area where the LED is arranged in the first lighting unit 6574.

The shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is such that each portion is arranged at a distance substantially the same distance from the bottom back side surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, the shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523. As a result, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emitting mode.

The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are formed with a size that allows the circular screwing portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted.

The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a flat shape on the back surface side, and is formed in a bottomed tubular shape capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw inserted into the bottom portion. A pair of terminal fastening portions 6523a to which the portions 6543 are fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusing shape (decorative shape consisting of ridges having a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom portion of the cup shape, and the decorative shape portion thereof. It mainly includes a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light emitted from the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. As a result, the player who sees the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can visually recognize the cup-shaped member 6523 as if the surface is emitting light, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region facing the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the front surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f without diffusely reflecting the light passing through the inside of the wall thickness of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f. It can be passed to the side. As a result, the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be visually recognized by the player as clear light.

The back end of the shielding member 6524 is formed from the same shape as the central tubular portion 6566 of the partition member 6560, and is recessed in a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251 (a)). A pair of left and right guide recessed portions 6524a are provided.

The contact plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are formed with a size capable of inserting a circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to accommodate the flange portion 6522, and the extension length thereof is the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate-shaped portion.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are housed inside the outer frame extending portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)), so that the optical transmission unit 6520 The assembled state of the light can be maintained stably. Further, the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 is inserted in the order of the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a, and is fastened and fixed. The assembled state of the 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear end surface of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylinder 6521e to advance forward, and the front end of the frame-shaped extension 6521f. It can be emitted from the cup-shaped member 6523 and irradiated. Since the distance between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is set short, the cup-shaped member 6523 has a line shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523) for the player who visually recognizes the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523. It can be visually recognized in a light emitting mode that shines along the outline). As a result, the difference between the light emitting mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emitting mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above can be highlighted, so that a sharp light emitting effect can be executed. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 261 shows a six-view view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-view view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is symmetrically configured, the left side view is omitted.

261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is a bottom surface of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521.

262 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. In FIG. 262 (e), the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is not shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the transparent tubular member 6521 has a shape in which the left-right surface portion and the lower bottom surface portion are inclined so that the left-right width and the vertical width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that. On the other hand, since the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction, it is not possible to form a portion that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body tubular portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the back surface side is moved in the pulling direction (rear), but the inner surface of the outer surface portion 6521a formed on the rear side portion. If the same inclination is used, interference will occur when the resin mold on the back surface side is moved. Therefore, the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body tubular portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the front side is moved in the pulling direction (front), but a frame shape formed on the front side portion thereof. If the outer surface of the extension portion 6521f has the same inclination, it will interfere when the resin mold is moved. Therefore, the outer surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side to be pulled out forward and the resin mold on the back side to be pulled out to the rear is composed of the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, and the above-mentioned inclination is formed on the front and back sides thereof. Where a surface is formed and the above-mentioned non-sloping surface is formed, the length of the non-sloping surface in the front-rear direction of the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 is compared with the length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter.

As a result, while the transparent tubular member 6521 has a gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position, so that the light passing through the inside of the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress changes in the anteroposterior position of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is incident inside the wall thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, it is possible to facilitate repeating the total reflection until it reaches the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521. Since the leakage of the transparent tubular member 6521 can be suppressed, sufficient light can be visually recognized by the player who sees the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that the vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion is fastened to the guide recessed portion 6524a as compared with the case where the vertical width is the same in the front-rear direction. Since the 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembling can be reduced.

FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit 6560-6580, the acoustic device 6610 and the optical transmission unit 6520 in the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG. 241. FIG. 263 illustrates a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged at assembly positions with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed with a size that causes a slight gap when it is inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of the partition member 6560, and the tip thereof is the facing plate portion. It can be inserted up to the surface position of 6651. Thereby, the distance between the first illumination unit 6574 and the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness of the facing plate portion 6651.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is formed from a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the lateral direction intersecting the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 arranged to face each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b, only the light traveling substantially straight from the first illumination unit 6574 to the front side (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) is incident, and other light is incident. Can be prevented.

The light incident in this way easily travels toward the front side inside the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and even when reflected at the boundary, the angle formed by the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of light is small. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the weakening of the light before reaching the front side end portion of the transparent tubular member 6521.

The dimension of the light receiving protrusion 6521b in the longitudinal direction is set to be about twice the dimension in the lateral direction. Therefore, with respect to the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent tubular member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared with the case described in the wall thickness direction of the surface. Can also be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the back outer shape portion 6521a coupled with the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b does not come into contact with the facing plate portion 6651 and is arranged at a slight interval. As a result, among the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, the light incident from the end surface of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (light having a large angle formed by the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) is reflected to the player. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized.

That is, only the light that passes through the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b and travels within the wall thickness of the main body cylinder portion 6521e can be visually recognized by the player, and the other light (weak light) can be cut. In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with reference to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylinder portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b passes through the inside of the expansion hole 6562a and passes through the light transmission hole 6521d (see FIG. 260) of the transparent tubular member 6521. It passes through and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the wall thickness of the member but travels in the air, it can be visually recognized as a uniform light by the player.

The raised tip of the expansion hole 6562a and the closing portion 6521c are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light that has passed through the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first illumination unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. It is a front schematic diagram. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes through (total reflection) within the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521. The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized as an enlarged shape (substantially a gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a.

In addition, as described above, since the light in the wall thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 travels to the front end without being weakened, it corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a even in the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The position where it is emitted emits strong light (lights like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer in the strong light emission distance L17b in the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 than in the actual distance between the arrangements L17a of the edge light emitting unit 6574a, so that the light is used as a point as it is. Only visible can be seen, and the effect of light production tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance between the strong light emission arrangements L17b of the visually recognized light is longer than the actual distance L17a between the arrangements of the edge light emitting unit 6574a, so that the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light of the edge light emitting portion 6574a is radially propagated in the direction along the side surface of the transparent tubular member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion portion 6521b). , The light emitted from the adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light visually recognized at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, the line-shaped light can be visually recognized from the front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 even in a place where the LEDs of the first illumination unit 6574 are not arranged (between the LEDs) (imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state in which the light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower ends of the first lighting unit 6574 are arranged at the boundary positions between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the main body cylinder portion 6521e (see FIG. 262 (e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above the optical axis, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 to the lower side of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f. It overlaps at the center of the left and right.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), the optical transmission unit 6520 is moved as shown in FIG. 264 (b) even though the LED is not arranged at the center of the lower end portion of the first lighting unit 6574. Through this, line-shaped light can be visually recognized in the lower left, right, and center.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first illumination unit 6574, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520 is increased, and in addition, the light is used as a point. It is possible to weaken the degree of visibility and to visually recognize clear line-shaped light.

When the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside thereof is obscured by the decorative shape provided on the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light traveling inside the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521. It is difficult to grasp the position where the lights intersect. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is indefinite, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission effect from being lowered.

Further, when the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, it is possible to visually recognize as if a new point light source is arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. That is, since it is possible to make the illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The effect of the effect can be improved.

The light emitted from the surface emitting unit 6574b (four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first lighting unit 6574) arranged inside the transparent tubular member 6521 when viewed from the front is inside the transparent tubular member 6521. Pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the wall thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged holes 6562a arranged to face each other (see FIG. 245 (b)). It progresses radially along.

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface emitting unit 6574b is visually recognized as planar light spreading as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface emitting unit 6574b in the front view. Further, the light is diffusely reflected by being irradiated to the decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light in the front view.

That is, the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the region where the light radiated from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 in the front view and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f) can be brightly illuminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as light having different impressions, that is, edge-shaped light and planar light. In addition, by configuring the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light to be irradiated with diffusely reflected light, it is possible to avoid darkening the boundary. Therefore, the impression of the visually recognized light can be changed stepwise and continuously.

Here, various modes are exemplified as changes in the impression of light that is visually recognized. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emitting state such as light / darkness or blinking, or a change in the color of light.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

As described above, the partition unit 6540 that is visually recognized from the front on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that bulges toward the front in the front and side views. Therefore, the light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 on the left and right and up and down (a direction in which the light diffuses with respect to a point on the back surface side).

Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the partition unit 6540 has the front side edge located on the back side toward the left and right outer sides, and the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 is emitted from the mounting posture. , The direction in which the cup-shaped member 6523 is separated from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left and right and up and down (the direction in which the light diffuses with respect to the point on the back surface) proceeds.

As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the light becomes larger as the player gets closer to the player, as compared with the case where the light is produced only in a mode in which the light travels in the front-rear direction. Can be improved.

Next, the lateral effect device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral effect device 6700.

In FIG. 265, the upper effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 are not shown, and the direction view from the diagonally right front in a state where the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a is shown. In FIG. 266, a directional view of the lateral effect device 6700 from diagonally left front is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 is an effect device arranged on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the metal main body 10014a, and divides the vertically long elliptical shape in half in a side view. It is formed from the shape of the ellipse.

In the horizontal effect device 6700, a pair of left and right devices having similar shapes are arranged, but since the internal configurations are the same, the horizontal effect device 6700 on the right side will be described in detail, and the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side will be described in detail. The description is omitted.

The horizontal effect device 6700 is covered on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a so as to cover the front side of the base member 6710 so that the front-rear stacking relationship can be visually recognized at the upper end portion of FIG. 266. It is configured in such a manner that the units 6730 to 6760 are arranged.

The fastening of the base member 6710 and the metal body portion 10014a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a. Then, the fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the metal main body 10014a is fastened and fixed to the fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the base member 6710.

Of the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, except for the base member 6710, there are no constituent members to be fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the position where the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where the back side end portion and the surface position of the base member 6710 are formed). Is formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is arranged so as to face the glass unit 16 in close proximity to the glass unit 16 as shown by the unit on the left side in FIG. 265.

Since it is arranged in this way, it is easy to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back surface side of the glass unit 16 can be visually recognized integrally. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700. In FIGS. 267 and 268, a state in which the lining units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side is shown.

As shown in FIG. 267, an illuminated substrate 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to be capable of emitting light are mounted is disposed on the front side of the base member 6710, and the illuminated substrate 6720 is mounted on the illuminated substrate 6720 from the front side. The lining units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 in a covering manner.

That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports an illuminated substrate 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 and the illuminated substrate 6720. Mainly includes a light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 and a light receiving side unit composed of an inverted unit 6730 to 6760 that receives the light emitted from the light emitting side unit and makes the player visually recognize the light. .. First, the light emitting side unit will be described.

269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720, FIG. 269 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (c) is a right side view of the base member 6710. 269 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a view of FIG. 269 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 6710 and the illumination substrate 6720 in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line.

As shown in FIGS. 269 (a) to 269 (f), the base member 6710 has a flat plate-shaped support plate portion 6711 arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and arranged on the back side of the illuminated substrate 6720, and an electric circuit board. A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting toward the front side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 in which fastening screws are inserted so as to be inserted at positions outside the illuminated substrate 6720 and close to the illuminated substrate 6720 in front view, and insertion holes 6736 at two locations above and below. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which the fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a portion of the support plate portion 6711 (step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) on the right side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 (enclosing the game area). Multiple alignment holes 6716 drilled as long vertical holes in the area (opposite side of the window, opposite side of the glass unit 16), and a plate shape with steps from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. The outer frame plate portion 6717 extending to the illumination plate portion 6717 and the inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back surface side are mainly provided.

The tip of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 is arranged so as to face the back surface portion near the outer shape portion of the illuminated substrate 6720, and comes into surface contact with the illuminated substrate 6720. As a result, a gap is provided between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the support plate 6711 on the back side of the portion other than the vicinity of the outer shape (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illuminated substrate 6720.

As a result, the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a, and the amount of heat transferred to the illuminated substrate 6720 even if the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710. Since it is possible to suppress (suppress to be low), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as a high temperature of the illuminated substrate 6720 and malfunction.

The positioning protrusion portion 6713 is a portion for aligning the illuminated substrate 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into the positioning holes 6722 formed at two positions of the illuminated substrate 6720. That is, the illuminated substrate 6720 is provided with a positioning hole 6722 at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 6713 with reference to the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269 (a)). Will be set up.

The insertion hole 6714 includes a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the lining units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6735 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268), and positions them. It is a through hole that is formed so that it can be matched and through which a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and the fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 6736 is formed so as to be screwable. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the upper and lower fastening portions 6715.

The alignment hole 6716 is a hole through which the projecting portions 6743, 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the lining units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. The lining units 6730 to 6760 are formed from a substantially cup shape in which a pair of thin-walled plate-shaped members (flat plate member 6740 and curved plate member 6750) are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides and open to the back side (see FIG. 268). ), It is fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side portion (edge-shaped portion).

Here, the joint portion between the base member 6710 and the lining units 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer shape portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load given by the player (for example, the player collides with the player). It can be displaced by the load generated by this. As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear end portion having a thin wall shape, it is deformed when a load is applied to the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction). Or, there is a risk of misalignment with respect to the base member 6710. In order to prevent this, the number of fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a possibility that the number of man-hours for the assembly work increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the increase in the number of fixed portions, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are formed as base members by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716. It is possible to suppress the positional deviation (positional deviation in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6471 of the flat plate member 6740 is arranged close to the outer surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, the player left the flat plate member 6740. Even if a load in the direction is applied, the flat plate member 6740 comes into contact with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 on a surface, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lining units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while suppressing the increase in the man-hours for the assembly work. The main body plate portion 6741 can be provided with a concavo-convex forming portion 6741a in which a fine concavo-convex shape is formed in a contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, so that the load can be dispersed. ..

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal main body portion 10014a and comes into surface contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 to cover (cover) the right side of the metal main body portion 10014a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal body portion 10014a from being visually recognized by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a that is recessed along the front-rear direction from a part of the alignment holes 6716. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, while it is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recess 6717a is formed in a size that fits with the projecting portion 6743 or is arranged so as to face each other with a slight gap in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, as compared with the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the positioning hole 6716, the area in which the projecting portion 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), and thus the flat plate member. It is possible to prevent the 6740 from being displaced with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion of the curved plate member 6750 that is arranged to face the main body curved portion 6751, and is formed in a surface shape facing the game region side (inside).

The illuminated circuit board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and has an arbitrary main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and an arbitrary main body plate portion 6721. It mainly includes an LED chip D1 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in a pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the movement from side to side and up and down, and the movement to the front and back is performed by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). Movement is restricted by being sandwiched between (see).

The LED chip D1 in the present embodiment has a similar chip mounted on it, but in relation to the region shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 269 (a) as the boundary of the region showing the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760. It can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting unit D1a arranged inside the frame of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting unit D1b arranged outside the frame of the imaginary line. Mainly prepare. The difference between the light emitting units D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode that is visually recognized by the player, but the details will be described later.

Next, the lining units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the lining units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lining units 6730 to 6760.

As is clear from the states shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, which are decomposed and shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, the lining units 6730 to 6760 are formed of a light-transmitting resin inside and light passing through the inside. The light receiving member 6730 is provided so as to be refractable and covers the illuminated substrate 6720 from the front side, and the front portion thereof is covered with other constituent members.

272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. 273 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and FIG. 273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). is there.

274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274 (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. is there.

Note that FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the left side, FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274 (a) is a front perspective view. , The light receiving member 6730 is a rear perspective view seen from the right side, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272 (b), the lining units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for ease of understanding.

The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a light receiving surface portion 6731 which is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of the illuminated substrate 6720 and is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720. An inner extending portion 6732 extending to the back side so as to be bent from the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and an outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. An outer extending portion 6733 extending to the back side so as to be bent from (the right edge in FIG. 274), and a plurality of extending portions (in the present embodiment) protruding from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in a long rib shape. 5) long ribs 6734, and the base end of the long ribs 6734 (the side to be combined with the light receiving surface 6731) and the front and back of the light receiving surface 6731 are extended from the front to a long fin shape. Multiple fins 6735 (five locations in this embodiment), and a plurality of insertion holes 6736 into which fastening screws arranged at the upper and lower ends and fastened to the fastening portion 6715 (see FIG. 269 (a)) are inserted, and curved. It mainly includes a decorative projecting portion 6715a (see FIG. 276) of the plate member 6750 and a fitting portion 6737 formed from a shape that can be fitted.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and a decorative pattern having a complicated cut is formed on the back surface side. In the decorative pattern, long protrusions arranged along a plurality of concentric circles having different diameters are formed centering on a portion facing the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view of FIG. 274 (b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position facing the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which the light emitted from the back is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731. (See FIG. 275 (b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is also inclined (refracting the light traveling along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 toward the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731). Inclined in mode, see FIG. 275 (b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted near the shaft portion of the long protrusion, travels to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then has a large diameter further away from the shaft of the long protrusion. A wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be made to emit light by refracting at the portion and proceeding to the front side.

Further, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape having a triangular shape in front view and a substantially central portion bulging toward the front side is formed in a manner in which the basic shapes are regularly and densely arranged, and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is a surface emitting portion. A decorative recessed portion 6731a, which is recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape at a position on the front side of D1b, is provided.

With the decorative recessed portion 6731a, it is possible to increase or decrease the surface emission of the light receiving surface portion 6731 (incrementally increasing or decreasing the intensity). That is, since the light is collected on the central side of the recess due to the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emitting mode as compared with other portions.

The inner extension portion 6732 and the outer extension portion 6733 are configured such that the extension end portion abuts on the illuminated substrate 6720 in the front-rear direction, and the extension end portion of the inner extension portion 6732 extends over the entire upper and lower sides. A portion that is in contact with the illuminated substrate 6720 but is not partially in contact with the extended end of the outer extending portion 6733 is formed.

That is, the outer extending portion 6733 includes a separated end portion 6733a which is formed so that the extending length is as short as the plate thickness of the illuminated substrate 6720 so as to be separated from the illuminated substrate 6720 without abutting. In the present embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to flow in and out of the region between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, so that heat can be prevented from being trapped.

Further, when the illuminated substrate 6720 is in contact with the entire upper and lower parts like the inner extending portion 6732, the LED chip D1 arranged so as to project from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732. Therefore, the thicker the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732, the more the area in which the LED chip D1 is arranged is limited.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the illuminated substrate 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. Can be placed in. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chip D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extension portion 6733.

The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion on the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) has dense ridges having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed that is aligned with. As a result, the light emitted to the left through the inner extension portion 6732 will emit surface light (spread radially), and it will be easier for the player to visually recognize the uniform light.

As will be described later, when a part of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes for each region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end of the fin 6735, the light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling on the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b are visually recognized. However, at a position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is more than the light D1p. Is also visually recognized as strong light (the magnitude of the light intensity corresponds to the length of the arrow).

As a result, the magnitude of the light intensity visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed for each of the vertically arranged regions to be visually recognized. It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed up and down. It can be visually changed for each area lined up in.

The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed to have the same thickness without tapering in the front and rear. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed in a substantially linear shape in the rear view, and a V-shaped rib 6734b formed in a substantially V shape by being bent in the rear view.

The side surface of the elongated rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is jagged on the line, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (no surface emission) and is unidirectional. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the side surface of the long rib 6734 from emitting light uniformly. Therefore, when the lateral effect device 6700 is viewed from the left-right direction, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the surface emitting portion are emitted. It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light emitted from D1b is mixed and visually recognized.

That is, the long rib 6734 is formed long vertically and is configured as a portion that can be seen in the left-right direction, while suppressing the light passing through the long rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in the form of surface emission. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily visually recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in two on the upper and lower sides, and are formed so as to extend in a direction in which the linear ribs 6734a are inclined toward the upper and lower center positions toward the left side (center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265), and the left end portion. The 6734a1 is connected to the inner extension 6732, while the right end 6734a2 is separated from the outer extension 6733.

Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can directly enter the inner extension 6732 through the left end 6734a1, while the light passing through the right end 6734a2 can directly enter the outer extension 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized darker.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed and the visibility of the light from the left-right direction is deteriorated, while passing through the left end portion 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a. The light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, in the vicinity of the left end portion 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (interval position) away from the left end portion 6734a1, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b Since it is possible to visually recognize the light by color and brightness, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left-right direction visually recognize the light of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the vertical center position and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 by an intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bent position, while both end portions 6734b2 are separated from the outer extending portion 6733. The reason why the bent position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is arranged to face the bent position.

That is, by shifting the position of receiving the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light (main light) linearly emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a in the front-rear direction becomes the connecting position. Since it is possible to suppress the incident light, it is possible to reduce the loss of light incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has the same function as that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can directly enter the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while the light passing through both end portions 6734b2 can enter the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized darker.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed and the visibility of the light from the left-right direction is deteriorated, while the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is provided. The light that has passed through and entered the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only for the light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (interval position) away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b Since it is possible to visually recognize the light by color and brightness, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left-right direction visually recognize the light of different colors and brightness.

The fin 6735 is formed so as to decrease in thickness from the extending base end toward the tip end side, and includes a tip curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a and a tip bending fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , Is mainly provided.

In the tip curved fin 6735a, the upper and lower inner edges are curved, and the left side surface (inner surface of the front frame 10014) is densely formed with triangular wavy (jagged) notches to form a light diffusing portion. , The right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has an inclined surface in which the extended tip is inclined toward the back side from the upper and lower ends toward the center in the vertical direction and intersects with the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b, and the left side surface (front frame). A triangular wavy (jagged) notch is densely formed on the inner surface of the 10014 to form a light diffusing portion, and the right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, in the tip curved fin 6735a, since the end portion on the left surface side is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, light with a large amount of light emitted from the front side end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a irradiated from the edge light emitting portion D1a (mainly). Light) will be emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inner extending portion 6732 side (back surface side, root side), and the left surface side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the long rib 6734 and the inner extending portion 6732 are coupled, and the elongated rib 6734 is also extended inward by the light passing inside the long rib 6734. It can illuminate the installation part 6732. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a can be combined to produce light emission. , The effect of light emission can be improved.

It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as a process applied to a surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, the shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or the wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The mode of passage of light passing through the side surface can be changed from the difference in the formation mode of the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735. That is, the light passing through the left side surface can be visually recognized as uniform light due to the surface light emitting action due to the notch, while the surface emitting action does not reach the light passing through the right side surface, so that the light passes through the right side surface. The light to be emitted can be visually recognized as local light. Needless to say, the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is displaced (for example, vibration caused by the operation of the player or vibration caused by opening and closing the front frame 10014). Since the maintenance work for returning the position to the case) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal effect device 6700, the maintainability can be improved (the difficulty level is low and the time is shortened).

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction in an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and aligns and aligns the light receiving member 6730 with the constituent members of the lining units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. A single recess 6737a is provided so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are limited to one place (while reducing) the place where the recess 6737a is arranged (the place where the fastening part 6753 is arranged) on the inner extending portion 6732 side. The position deviation and posture deviation of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

Here, when the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal effect device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so that the more fastening points there are, the more easily shadows are generated. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal effect device 6700 is formed to be large, the light is separated at the fastening portion, and there is a possibility that the effect of the light effect is reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the bearing capacity is lowered, and there is a possibility that the lateral effect device 6700 may be deformed from the root due to the load given by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening portion is limited to the recess 6737a, and the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to maintain the bearing capacity. ing.

As a result, it is arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light effect portion and the illuminated substrate 6720 at the fastening portion of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side (in the present embodiment). It is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points).

Further, in the present embodiment, light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back surface side through the recess 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG. 275.

275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 in the CCLXVa-CCLXXV line of FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. 275 (b) is a light receiving member 6730 in the CCLXVb-CCLXXVb line of FIG. 274 (b). It is a sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the recess 6737a is arranged in the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b which is arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and the striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via the fastening portion 6753 fitted in the recess 6737a. Light is formed so as to be able to travel to the back side portion of the main body curved portion 6751. That is, the light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back side (opposite side of the light irradiation direction) of the illuminated substrate 6720.

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a place where the fastening screw is fastened, and is considered unsuitable for light emission effect because the fastening screw tends to be in the shadow. However, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion 6753 is intermediately connected on both the upper and lower sides. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw up and down, so that the player can visually recognize the light while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw. That is, by advancing the light from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (diluted).

In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is enlarged and shown. Of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction having a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface portion 6731 while being slowly refracted and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. At that time, it is further refracted and condensed. As a result, it is possible to increase the emission intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a.

As described above, in the light emitting mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of light increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a becomes longer, centering on the decorative recessed portion 6731a in which the intensity of light is increased by focusing. It is said to be a lower mode.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. Compared with the case where the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is irradiated from the light having a higher intensity (light that can be seen in the vicinity of the decorative recessed portion 6731a) than when the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is directly viewed. The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to light having a lower intensity than when the light is directly viewed, and the light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Returning to FIG. 270, a member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member whose back side is open is arranged. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. Is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left-right direction and united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, so that each member is inseparably fixed.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed of a colorless, transparent and light-transmitting resin, and has a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate having a divided oval shape and a main body plate portion 6741 thereof. A flat plate portion that is arranged on a flat surface that is translated from the flat surface to the left side and is connected with a step on the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6471, and a rear end portion of the main body plate portion 6471. A plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear side to the back side, and a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at positions separated from the projecting portion 6743 so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the back surface side, and a main body. A plurality of insertion holes 6745, which are formed in the plate portion 6471 with a size capable of inserting a fastening screw, are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape that is recessed from the left side surface to the left and is projected from the right side surface to the right corresponding to the recessing, and the right end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 is , Aligns with the right side surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

The uneven forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in a manner in which a hexagonal pyramid arranged so as to taper to the left is filled, and produces an action similar to that of a reflector. As a result, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that an external force is applied. It is possible to prevent it from cracking or hanging. Further, it is possible to reduce the contact friction when sliding the base member 6710 to assemble the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

Therefore, after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when an impact is applied by the player or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. In addition to being able to improve durability by making it difficult, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the horizontal effect device 6700.

The mated plate portion 6742 is formed on the right surface in the front-rear direction along the groove portion 6742a in the step between the plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction and the main body plate portion 6741. It is provided with a hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

The protrusion 6743 is a portion to be inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion to be inserted into the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269 (a)). It is a part that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through.

Further, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at positions close to the outside of the right edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. In particular, since the fastening portion 6744 is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269 (a) and 274 (b)), the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member with respect to the flat plate member 6740 are arranged. The misalignment of 6730 can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are arranged at four locations above and below. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions, the fixing force is insufficient even when the number of fastening portions 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small. Can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is arranged so as to face the main body plate portion 6471 of the flat plate member 6740 and is formed to be curved so as to bulge to the left toward the back side, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730. A main body curved portion 6751 formed of a sex resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner side surface, and a curved plate portion arranged in parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751 and on the front side of the main body curved portion 6751. Corresponds to the fitted plate portion 675, which is connected with a step on the edge and is arranged to face the fitted plate portion 6742, the plurality of fastening portions 6753 configured so that the fastening screw can be screwed in from the back side, and the insertion hole 6745. A plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that the fastening screws can be screwed in at the positions to be screwed, and a plurality of insertion holes 6755 in which the fastening screws are inserted so as to be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the main body curved portion 6751. It mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6756 in which fastening screws are formed so as to be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the fitted plate portion 6752.

The main body curved portion 6751 is a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting from the right side to the right in a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b formed in the front-rear direction on the front side portion of the above, a flat partition portion 6751c for partitioning the striped shape on a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner side surface near the rear end portion.

The decorative projecting portion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750.

As a result, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for aligning with the light receiving member 6730. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling even in a configuration in which only one fastening portion 6753 is arranged (less) in the upper and lower central portions as in the present embodiment.

The flat section 6751c is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the leading edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction and the side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the leading edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat section portion 6751c, so that the light is visually recognized as clear light. Can be made to.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game region) of the tip curved fin 6735a is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat section 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the leading edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the leading edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the light is visually recognized as clear light. Can be made to.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

Like the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 675 is a step between a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as fine grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface and the main body curved portion 6751. Is provided with a front-rear direction hole 6752b formed in the direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269). Since a) and FIG. 274 (b)), the misalignment of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750 can be suppressed.

The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is arranged at positions (4 locations) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744, the curved plate member 6750 when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced is reduced. It is possible to suppress wobbling. As a result, the number of fastening portions 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so that the number of places where the light is blocked by the fastening screw can be reduced, and as a result, the light emission effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which the fastening screw can be inserted from the back surface side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6674 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. It is formed (see FIG. 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed so that the inner side surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6674 of the cover member 6760 is arranged to face the right side of the fastening portion 6674 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). Will be done. As a result, the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6674 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 is carelessly used. It can be prevented from being removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6674 back and forth along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 is formed by bending the main body plate portion 6661, which is a flat plate portion having a shape that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6661, and covers the curved plate member 6750. The curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion having a shape that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and the curved plate portion 6762 are extended to the left rear of the curved plate portion 6762 from two positions separated from the upper and lower center positions by approximately the same distance vertically. A plurality of connecting extension portions 6763 connected at the ends and a plurality of fastening screws arranged on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 so as to be screwable. Base end fastening portion formed by screwing a fastening portion 6674 and a fastening screw disposed at the rear end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into an insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of the base member 6710. It mainly includes a 6765 (see FIG. 279) and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 projecting from the rear end side end portion of the main body plate portion 6761 to the rear surface side.

The main body plate portion 6661 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is projected to the left in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a plurality of projecting ribs 6761a.

The projecting rib 6761a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion of the main body plate portion 6761, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and is projected to the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of projecting ribs 6762a are provided.

The projecting rib 6762a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and this overhanging portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The connecting extension portion 6763 includes a protruding rib 6763a that protrudes to the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

The projecting rib 6763a is formed so as to project rearward from the back side edge portion at the connecting position of the connecting extension portion 6763, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the overhanging portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the lateral effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6674 is configured as a portion capable of restricting the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state (see FIG. 265) of the lateral effect device 6700, whereby the curved plate member 6750 is formed. It is possible to prevent it from being accidentally removed.

In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a and 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b and 6752b restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right, and the relationship between the fastening portion 6674 and the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a regulates the curved plate member It regulates the movement of the 6750 to the left. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The base end fastening portion 6765 is arranged at the back end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 can be screwed. Is formed in. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

The projecting portion 6766 is a portion inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. Further, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are the illuminated substrate 6720 and the illuminated substrate 6720 with respect to the cover member 6760 arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. The misalignment of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line of FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. 280 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the CCLXXXb of FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 on the −CCLXXXb line, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of member 6730.

As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the front-rear distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 rises from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be incident on the long rib 6734 without leakage, and the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) to facilitate the movement toward the front side. ..

Further, in a place where the long rib 6734 is not arranged, the front-rear distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained at the front-back width (formation length) of the long rib 6734 or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area as a portion where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are emitted on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially. It is possible to distinguish it from the light and make it easier to see.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel as clear line-shaped light that travels by totally reflecting the inside of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or through the long rib 6734. While it is visually recognized as light that brightens a small area, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is uniform light (pale light) through the light refracting surface portion of the light receiving surface portion 6731 and the inner extending portion 6732. ) Is visually recognized.

As a result, as compared with the conventional mode in which the lens that collects the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area, the present embodiment According to the above, it is possible to visually recognize the glittering light (line-shaped light) in a small area, while visually recognizing the light (plane-shaped light) spreading in the area of the illuminated substrate 6720. Then, it is possible to easily perform an effect of visually recognizing only one of these different lights or making both of them visible by control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing the light effect.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is used for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are used as light. By making the color and brightness of the above different, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280 (b), on the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction, the right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is positioned with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side surface (front frame 10014). (Inner side surface) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closer to the right side). Therefore, the normal on the left side does not face right beside (the direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720, that is, the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), but the direction having the component facing the front side. Turn to. As a result, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed toward the inner extending portion 6732. Can proceed. The progress of this light will be described with reference to a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 is a schematic view of a base member 6710, an illuminated substrate 6720, and a light receiving member 6730 that schematically show a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

The intensity of the light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the plane of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface increases, but the light itself is irradiated radially. In the present embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, and thus the following will be described in order.

The arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that is incident on the end of the long rib 6734, totally reflects inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and travels to reach the front end of the fin 6735. .. Since the light that reaches the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, the light is partially transmitted (exited) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735 as compared with the case where the light is partially transmitted (exited). , The energy loss of light can be reduced. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is long, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the light having sufficient brightness.

The arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the left side (inside the front frame 10014) side surface before reaching the front side end portion of the fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed in a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

The arrow L23c passes through the long rib 6734 and directly advances to the inner extension portion 6732, and indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light has not been refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, it can be visually recognized brightly. Further, since the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emission manner.

The arrow L23d indicates the traveling direction of the light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as the coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed so that the length in the thickness direction is shorter than that of the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and the fin 6735 is formed on the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014). Since the jagged recess is formed, the long rib 6734 is configured to partially protrude from the fin 6735 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-rear direction in the same manner, it is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all the coupling positions of the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6731, and a part (particularly, the long rib) can be entered. In the region (near the left side surface of 6734), the entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and the light reaching this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Since the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, the light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of the arrow L23d includes the light traveling toward the back surface side of the illuminated substrate 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the back side portion of the illuminated substrate 6720 can be made to emit light by the illuminated substrate 6720 provided with the LED chip D1 that irradiates the front side with light (at least, the illuminated substrate 6720). Light can travel toward the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed from a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in the rear view (see FIG. 276). As a result, the light traveling along the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner up and down, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, the light effect can be performed by combining the light emitted from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 toward the glass unit 16 and the light traveling by the arrow L23d. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be alleviated. That is, when incident on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, but is indicated by the arrow L23. When the light reaches the inner extending portion 6732, it is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness because the energy loss of the transmitted light occurs when the light is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. In this way, the difference in the brightness of the light due to the irradiation direction can be alleviated, and the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 can be easily made uniform in the front-rear direction.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 arranged on the left side, most of the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the right side is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape (or similar shape), but left and right. As a special non-symmetrical part, the formation of the long rib 6734 (protrusion to the back) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. That is, it is intended that the effect of advancing the light to the fin 6735 is maintained on the left side, but on the other hand, it is desired to suppress the light advancing to the game area side due to the light advancing to the long rib 6734.

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the position where the launch ball enters the game area, which is the left side of the game area, the intensity of the light emitted from the lateral effect device 6700 to the inside (game area side) is reduced. Is aimed at. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the launch ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it becomes difficult to adjust the launch intensity and confirm the launch of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, the ball launched by right-handed (strongest firing intensity) flows down in most cases, and there is little need for the player to visually check the ball for adjusting the firing intensity. .. In addition, since a large number of game balls flow down continuously in a narrow place in a short time, by irradiating the place with light and reflecting it on the game ball, the effect of producing the effect using light is achieved. Can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, and the light can be easily emitted from the horizontal effect device 6700 to the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in the present embodiment. , It is possible to improve the effect of production.

The arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is emitted in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). It shows the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light, but the long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Since the light traveling along the arrow L23e is extremely low in intensity because it extends to the position, it can be configured as light that is difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, so that the effect of producing the light is reduced.

Returning to FIG. 280 (a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect in the vicinity of the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the recess 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, a part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both wall portions of the recess 6737a and reaches the left side surface of the fitting portion 6737, as described above with the arrows L23c and L23d.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6735 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6735. Therefore, the fastening screw is illuminated in the vicinity of the recess 6737a. Therefore, there is a risk that the effect of the light emission effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 are combined. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing misalignment, and it is possible to reduce the number of places where the effect of the light emitting effect is reduced.

In addition, the recess 6737a is arranged near the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the recess 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732 to form the fastening screw. It prevents the area from becoming too dark. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of deterioration of the effect of the light emitting effect.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the illumination substrate 6570 is arranged on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 has been described, but the pachinko machine 18010 in the 18th embodiment is on the right side of the operation device 10300. By disposing the effect device 18800 provided with the illumination substrate 18830 below, it is possible to execute the light emission effect even in the lower part of the front frame 18014. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with the effect device 18800 in comparison with the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, and the other configurations are the same. Only the device 18800 will be described, and the description of other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect device 18800 is a device for light emission effect in which the back side and the upper surface side are coupled to the lining base member 6410 on the front side of the lower plate unit 6400, and the effect device 10300 and the operation device 10300. It is arranged between the operation handle 51 and the operation handle 51.

The effect device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emitting effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect by structural ingenuity. Next, in order to explain the structural device, the internal structure of the effect device 18800 will be described.

FIG. 284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect device 18800 on the CCLXXXXVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 (b) is an illumination substrate 18830 of the effect device 18800 in the direction of the arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of. Note that FIG. 284 (b) schematically shows a support mode of the illuminated substrate 18830.

As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the effect device 18800 is arranged with a planar gap on the front side of the coupling base member 18810 coupled to the lower plate unit 6400 and the coupling foundation member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the coupling base member 18810, an illuminated substrate 18830 arranged in a gap between the coupling foundation member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the illuminated substrate 18830. The light receiving member 18840, which is formed so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the above can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the covering member 18850 which is attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840. And mainly prepare.

The coupling foundation member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface whose front wall surface, which is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 18830, is inclined downward toward the back surface side. The inclination angle of the inclined surface is the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of vibration of the vibrating device 10366 when the swinging device member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is arranged in the upward position and is in the posture before the operation. It is formed at an inclination angle that is parallel to the inclined surface.

The illuminated substrate 18830 is arranged parallel to the wall surface on the front side of the coupling base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibrating device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. The illuminated substrate 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, an elongated hole 18831 formed in a long shape in the vertical direction, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates an upward urging force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted to support the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the elongated hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as a length (allowable length) at which the illuminated substrate 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

The LED chip D1 is arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, the apex of the pentagon) on the front side of the illuminated substrate 18830, and irradiates light in the normal direction of the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives the light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light in the front-rear direction.

That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction is changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is downwardly inclined toward the front side (player's line of sight). It is possible to prevent the effect of the light effect from being reduced even in the direction away from the light effect.

The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and has a plate-shaped portion 18841 that can close the opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion 18841 from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 18841. It is mainly provided with a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 extending to.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape in which the front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmission, and is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the joining base member 18810 side, and is fastened and fixed to the joining base member 18810. It is mainly provided with 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 formed at a position and size capable of accepting an extension plate portion 18842 at the bottom portion on the back side.

In the present embodiment, since the resin die punching direction of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chip D1 is arranged at the apex of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged side by side at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate portion 18842. As a result, the extended plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate-shaped portions having different widths. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also bored at three upper and lower positions with different widths.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a gently curved curved plate shape, although it begins to be extended along the normal direction of the plate-shaped portion 18841. The radius of curvature of the curvature can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the curvature is such that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the illuminated substrate 18830 reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the light incident on the extended tip (rear end side end) of the extended plate portion 18842 to reach the plate-shaped portion 18841 while maintaining the intensity.

The lining member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage in a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where light production is not desired, and can be realized in various embodiments. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) formed so that it can be attached, or a member formed in a cup shape from a resin material.

In the present embodiment, the lining member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and the bottom of the cup arranged on the front side has a pentagon based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 are formed at the apex positions of the above holes for light passage.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chip D1, and it is possible to have similar shapes with slightly different sizes. Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the forming mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important when designing the arrangement of the through hole 18851 than the arrangement of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the base of the extension plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in the front view.

The operation of the effect device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illuminated substrate 18830 is movable in the first deviation direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is arranged with a permissible width of the elongated hole 18831, and the first deviation direction is an operation. It coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

That is, when the operation device 10300 produces a vibration effect, the illumination substrate 18830 is configured to be slidable due to the vibration. When the illumination board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extension plate portion 18842 shifts, so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is less likely to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the through hole 18851 is visually recognized dark because the light does not easily travel through the extending plate portion 18842. That is, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes in a direction different from the first deviation direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the illuminated substrate 18830 is suppressed, and the illuminated substrate 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the urging force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illuminated substrate 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear end of the extension plate portion 18842 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is incident on the extension plate portion 18842 and then totally reflected. Is formed so that it can proceed to the front side.

That is, even when the operating device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized in the dark) while the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in to operate. , The through hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

Therefore, when the through hole 18851 is darkly visually recognized in the case of performing the vibration effect, it is possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. Can be done. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled so as to emit light when a big hit occurs or when the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Therefore, the player's interest in the presence or absence of light emission of the LED chip D1 can be improved.

As a result, the player's motivation to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. Therefore, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's motivation to participate is increased and the player actually becomes a player. The swing operating member 10310 can be directed to operate.

In the present embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 is arranged outside the lining foundation member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 18830 may be arranged so as to penetrate the lining base member 6410 and enter the inside so as to be in contact with the operation device 10300.

In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides and moves not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the push-in instruction as the notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed (pushed) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to visually grasp the presence or absence of the LED chip D1 emitting light.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed (pushed) at a timing other than the notification, the notification that is advantageous to the player can be easily overlooked. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 other than the timing when the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 may break down early or the operating device may be operated unnecessarily to generate noise. It is possible to suppress annoying acts.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be split left and right has been described, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the 19th embodiment are formed so as to be split back and forth. There is. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 according to the 19th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in the present embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 19322 are arranged so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configurations of the covers 19321 and 19322 have substantially the same shape as the above-mentioned covers 10321 and 10322, and are mainly described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be divisible by a dividing surface corresponding to the reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted into the insertion hole 19321a formed in the upper cover 19321 in the direction orthogonal to the dividing surface and are on the lower side. It is formed so that it can be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction in which the swing operation member 10310 is parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before the operation in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw to be fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact of vibration.

Further, since the direction Y17a of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (pushing direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216 (a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Since the fastening directions of the lenses are orthogonal to each other in the side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screws from loosening due to the impact generated by the operation of the lens member 10317.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 286. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in a cross-sectional view and the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion has been described. The protruding shape portion 16413 and the concave shape portion 16414 in the form are formed so as to be slightly inclined in the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 16400 according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in the present embodiment, the inclinations of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are compared with those of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the 17th embodiment. Is set toward the vertical direction.

In addition, the lower end of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the 17th embodiment) and the upper end portion of the concave shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the concave shape portion 6414 of the 17th embodiment) (corresponding to the concave shape portion 6414 of the 17th embodiment). The base end of the recess) is arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

When the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is abutted against and supported by the base end portion (upper surface of the main body portion 6411) of the concave shape portion 16414, the main body portion is supported at the supporting position. Since the support thickness of the 6411 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) can be sufficiently secured, the deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load during the operation of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right end portions is changed as compared with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right outer surfaces of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the concave shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in a cross-sectional view) without any inclination. Even in this case, the supporting thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are deformed when an external force is applied by forming the protrusion shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 so as to be inclined in an inverted C shape in cross-sectional view. It can be easily directed to. As a result, the degree of fatigue given by the external force can be reduced as compared with the case where it can be deformed in both the left and right directions, and the plate portions forming the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are damaged at an early stage. Can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "the button that cannot be pushed" can be performed. it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and the effect can be produced in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is in the descending operation), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotary operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the end and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the accommodating member 5430. When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, when the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321 and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the convex leg By adopting a mode in which the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the accommodating member 5430 is switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 The amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player, the button (tilting device 310) can be pressed with the specified pressing method. The motivation of the player for the operation can be increased, and the operation of the button (tilting device 310) can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for transmitting the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the accommodating member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 310 is pushed to the end of movement. The 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the housing member 5430 may not be in contact with the housing member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 can be transmitted to the player in a state where the tilting device 310 is not operated to make the effect lively, the player can change the effect (expected) by stopping the vibration when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, which is less noticeable to the surroundings. Since it is possible to recognize the difference in degree), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. it can.

As a variation of the effect, the case where the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 cannot be brought into contact with each other by the player pushing the tilting device 310, and the case where the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 continue. It is desired to generate both a case where the arrangement is possible to abut the same, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. You may. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower board surface support device 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and the game board is in the process of fixing the board surface support device 600 from there. 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by using a path that bends back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 do not interfere with each other. It can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear side assembly 480 comes into contact with the inner side surface 461Hi of the front side assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connecting line 453 in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connecting wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connecting wire 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451 even when the load of the above is applied.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H is further projected. In the range of length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connecting wire 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, when the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body 461B and the tip end side main body 461T, the base end side main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the tip side main body 461T are jointly used. You may configure a large speaker room with.

Further, although the volume of the base end side main body portion 461B is larger than that of the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the volume may be the same. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction or the position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, of the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (base end side main body portion 461B and tip end side main body portion 461T). The connection direction, the direction in which the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 intersect with the opening direction of the opening) have been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491. By making it difficult to perform fraudulent acts that invade the game area and prolonging the time required for the fraudulent acts, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent acts. Here, as the suppression of fraudulent activity, the suppression of fraudulent activity itself and the suppression of obtaining the profit of fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity) are exemplified.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the free fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800, but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. Can be made to. As a result, the radial sliding operation of the petal 802 and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides and moves by the operation of the drive side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. You may. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the part of the game board 13 which is arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not the 600 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it is possible to restrict the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not come into contact with the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the possibility that the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin collides with the metal board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 is damaged can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced. Can be used for a long period of time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light applied to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and the other surface is arranged on the front side so as to be switchable (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate around a parallel axis), so that the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, the effect can be diversified by switching between the mode of the light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that projects inward of the center frame 86.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LED 512a at the vertical position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 is made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on one side on the front side and the other side. Consider switching between cases where it is placed on the front side. When the surface of the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face the portion corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member emits light. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching that changes the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is increased, the amount of light is increased, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (the brightness becomes low, the amount of light becomes small, and the light emission becomes faint). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory).

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-shaped (narrow state) light is emitted to the moving accessory and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to emit light at a position distant from the moving accessory or the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to fall, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss received by the game machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, the operating resistance can be improved by the inclined surface 2803T getting into the recessed portion.

In the 16th embodiment, when the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540 is changed, the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is the direction in which the light is inclined upward in all the CCVIb to CCVIe regions, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the aircraft to be played. It is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward. As a result, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, the downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe that emit light to the inner lens member 530, and the upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId that emit light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the upward tilting direction, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is directed downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010, it is possible to improve the interest of the player playing the game.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed near the center of the left and right sides has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

Further, both the one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and the one formed near the center of the left and right may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 for dealing with the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for dealing with the problems (ease of holding, durability, etc.) of the front frame 10014 alone. The 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is arranged above the projecting shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable) has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured to be impossible for the player to operate and produces a vibration effect, an illuminated board that performs a light emission effect, or a board box. It may be something that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by the player.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape formed in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount directed within the operating load of the operating device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. You may.

Further, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the same effect as when one wide groove is formed is obtained in terms of reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300. Can be done. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to be along the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially, for example, in a top view.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 is projected below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 and can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed longer in the vertical direction than the fingers of the worker carrying the front frame 10014. In this case, since it is possible to insert a finger into the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 (it can be used as a finger hook portion), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. ..

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is arranged below the operation device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that generates an elastic urging force may be used, or a device such as a damper for the purpose of damping vibration may be used.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 lack flexibility and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated in the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by the drive motor around the lever support shaft 10331d1 has been described, but various aspects of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, the load may be transmitted from the rotary gear rotated by the drive motor to the lever member 10340 by the load transmission of a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism (for example, a rotary cam) that does not approach the gear mechanism is interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that the load can rotate idle when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction orthogonal to the plane on which the operating device 10300 is loaded during operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when an operation portion that does not operate on the plane is arranged (for example, if there is an operation portion that pushes in the diagonally left and right directions), the balance (average) of the operation directions of each operation portion is set. The direction to be found (for example, the intermediate angular direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening is performed for the operation part where the operation instruction is frequent (ignoring the operation part where the operation instruction is rare). You may set the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are united by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive, or it may be combined by fitting by matching the shapes.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a high rigidity (direction along the top and bottom) and the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 are in line, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, since the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of vibration of the vibrating device 10366, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operating device 10300 when the vibration is generated. it can. Further, the mode of the vibrating device 10366 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a linear motion type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by configuring the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to be irradiated with the light emitted from the predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the right front cover change as the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 change. It can be produced so as to change the appearance of the light visually recognized through the cover 10322.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that the bending can be easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity in the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened in that direction. The difference can be large.

In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a to the direction along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position is increased with respect to the bending. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be made different.

On the contrary, the formation direction of the left and right streaks D24a may be the direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swinging operation member is opposed to the bending. It is possible to increase the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the 10310 is arranged in the upward position. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be made different.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled therein. In this case, when assembling to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the displacement suppressing effect due to the interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be exerted.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 comes into contact with the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening portion in which a fastening screw is screwed in in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw extends above the plate-shaped support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. It may be configured to be inserted into the insertion hole formed in the portion. In this case, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 not only at the time of the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 but also at the time of the downward displacement, and the load can be dispersed.

In the 17th embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 fits the size of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b with respect to the thickness dimension of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted. Although the case where it is formed with a possible thickness (dimension relation with almost no gap) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be shorter than the size of the gap (the gap may be formed at the time of assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (displacement of the operating device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, it is possible to prevent the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 from colliding with each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of powder (dust).

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in the shape of a flat plate has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 is formed in a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge, and the facing plate portion 6651 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with the shape so as to fit each other at the time of assembly. You can do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partition member 6560 from separating from the back support member 6580 toward the front side in a state where the partition member 6560 is positioned at the position in the assembled state.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in the cross-sectional view has been described, but the main point is that the distance increases toward the front side, and this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one side surface of both side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed from a curved shape.

In the 17th embodiment, the milky white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind the transparent lining member 6548 formed from the colorless and transparent resin material to the player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a. Although the case where the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily visible as a series of regions is described by making the color of the above visible, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a may be formed in a milky white color in advance by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with the fastening screw in the fastening direction that inclines downward toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that inclines downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set by selecting the placement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the side on which the displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the 17th embodiment, the configuration in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured so that its front-rear width can be changed to be driven, and the degree of compressive force that can be generated due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 may be changed.

That is, if the partition member 6560 is driven so as to shorten the front-rear width in a manner in which the back side edge of the partition member 6560 is displaced to the front side, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 will be connected even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed. A gap can still be generated between them, and a compressive force can be less likely to be generated. Since the degree of holding the illuminated substrate 6570 can be lowered because the compressive force is less likely to be generated, the degree of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the illuminated substrate 6570 in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 may be deformed can be changed, and similarly, to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570. The appearance of the illuminated light can be changed.

In addition, the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is shortened at normal times (a space is left between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580), and the front-rear width is widened by drive control to increase the front-rear width between the partition member 6560 and the back support. It may be configured so as to change the situation so that a compressive force can be generated between the member and the member 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that support the illuminated substrate 6570 by sandwiching them are laminated on the front side of the front frame 10014 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the illumination board 6570 may be arranged below the back support member 6580, the illumination board 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member away from the sound device 6610), or the illumination board 6570 may be fastened and fixed. The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 inserted through the partition member 6560. In any case, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illuminated substrate 6570.

Further, the back support member 6580 (and the sound device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the back side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You can do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other. Therefore, the front frame 10014 is sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 in the closed state. It is possible to easily replace the illuminated substrate 6570 and return the misalignment.

In the 17th embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged to face the head of the fastening screw so that vibration can be transmitted and abnormal noise can be generated when the fastening screw is loosened. Although the case where it is possible to grasp the above is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light travels near the head of the fastening screw and the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw may be visible from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of shadows, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws is found compared to the case of grasping with abnormal noise. It can be made easier.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the fastening screw is fastened in a direction in which the fastening screw is inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be inclined to the left or right with respect to the front-back direction, or the portions inclined to the top, bottom, left or right may be mixed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 are formed from a shape extending linearly in a front view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a curvedly extending shape, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a grid shape.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the side surface of the long rib 6734 is made a smooth surface to suppress the diffusion of light from the side surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light-shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the energy of the light traveling to the fin 6735. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light on the front side edge can be emphasized, and if a part of the side surface is covered (for example, using a light-shielding tape having polka-dotted holes), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape, it is possible to improve the effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 is not extended to the back side in the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, although the long rib 6734 is extended to the back surface side, it may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Even in this case, the intensity of light in the vicinity of the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the light traveling along the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735 to improve the effect of light in the front view of the fin 6735. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (cutout, etc.) may be formed so that at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 is emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in the present embodiment, the side surface is inclined in such a manner that the thickness of the fin 6735 gradually decreases toward the front side, so that the light of the fin 6735 is before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. By making it easy to reach the side surface repeatedly, the light may be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the fastening position of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is reduced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the claws may be fitted based on the shape relationship or fixed by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being reduced due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

In the 18th embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 slides due to the influence of the vibration of the operating device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810 so that the illuminated substrate 18830 can slide even by the vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (direction along the direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction) are different, the displacement mode of the illuminated substrate 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, the player can perform a silent effect that can generate slide movement of the illumination board 18830 while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, by configuring the illumination board 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300, the player who touches the operation device 10300 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, the interest in touching the operating device 10300 can be increased by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in the situation favorable to the player occurs.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 18830 is supported so as to be floatable (sliding) in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 6570 of the upper effect device 6500 may be supported so as to be floatable. In this case, the rod member may be fixed to the front frame 10014 and floatably supported by a rod member extending from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or the rod member fixed to the wall portion of the acoustic device 6610. It may be supported so that it can float. Further, the slide direction is not limited to up and down, and may be left and right or diagonal.

In the 19th embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 follows the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be configured to be along any of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, intermediate). The reference line X19 may be formed along the direction of (angle).

Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions. Or, when the frequency of operations is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. ..

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Points where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operation device having an operation means for the player to push in, the operation device is arranged at a first state in a normal state and a position where the operation means projects from the first state with respect to the player. Two states can be configured, and the operating means is provided with an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A game machine A1 characterized in that the direction is directed toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the game machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, is configured to be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the game machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game is played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing a hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as a fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached can be provided. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new pushing operation method is, for example, placing the outer side surface of the left little finger near the shaft rod, and placing the hand near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and then turning the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is arranged so as to face the operating means. Will be done.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device includes a drive means for automatically operating the operation means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means for operating by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is provided via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the operation means to move. A game machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement of releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, the movement width in which the operating device moves can be changed by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the game machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. The gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided as a light emitting means which is arranged inside the operation device and irradiates light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's viewpoint as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means without aiming. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation by adopting the mode.

In the game machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Characteristic gaming machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Points that make it possible to respond to repeated hits while keeping the repulsive force during normal times small>
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing a player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state. A game in which a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from a second state to a first state is provided, and an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from a first state to a second state is provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means, but when it is desired to speed up the return of the operating means, the first is the first. By pushing back the operating means with the two driving means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the game machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single pushing operation or a long pressing). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the game machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determination means is provided with the position difference detecting means for detecting and the movement direction determination means for determining the movement direction of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a supporting means is provided, and the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight comes into contact with the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating the driving force separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the rotation of the drive motor to start or stop, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained while being maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction closer to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effecting device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the player emphasizes the ability to operate lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player, while if the player firmly supports the movement of the operation means itself. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the operation of the player increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. The voice coil motor is pushed out to an extended position, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the game machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the game machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The game machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means and the end portion on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operation means is operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the like. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A game machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for the production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. Then, a large load may be generated on the drive means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the production is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or reverse. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction means, for example, excluding the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means that urges the driving means and the transmitting means into a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. The engaging teeth are provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state in which they are meshed with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is formed in a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means applies a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, whereby the transmission of the driving force can be released.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored instead of being separated and completely eliminated. As a result, when the player releases the hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, when the button is driven "as an effect", if the player holds the button, one phase of the operation of the button has passed. Then, if the player releases his hand in the middle and moves from the end of the one phase, the period in which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started to move because the load is released" is reduced. It comes off.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane to transmit the releasing means. It is possible to prevent the movement from being stopped along the direction of approaching and separating from the means. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the opposite direction. A game machine D5 characterized by.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operation modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation mode of the operation means whether the drive means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operation means for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the elapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the game machine D6, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the operation mode of the drive means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like. Therefore, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the like. A first means that is configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position and suppresses the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. , An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a changeable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means, and the first means. The first means is provided with a release load means for applying a load for disengagement of one means from the operation means to the first means, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means causes an extension operation. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the terminal position of the operation means by the terminal means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. Therefore, the release is performed by detecting the operation amount of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. An example is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized in other phases.

In the game machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load given from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operably arranged by the operation of the release load means. A game machine E3 characterized in that it can be switched whether or not it operates synchronously.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member and characterized in that the rotation period of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operating means is moved toward the second position. , The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means having a vibrating portion that is movable between and vibrating, and a receiving means that is arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. When this is done, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can come into contact with the receiving means. A game machine F1 characterized in being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibrating means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. .. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). Depending on the mode), the start of vibration may not be in time before the player releases the hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time when the player operates the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the operation mode of the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the game machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contacting state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operating intensity of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means at the time of vibration can be suppressed.

In the game machine F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in the direction close to the receiving means.

In the game machine F3, the support means is characterized in that the deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means is lower than the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. ..

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means is deformed can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the support means. it can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the vibrating means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

In the game machine F3, the portion that the vibrating portion comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to prevent the driving means from being loaded. Thereby, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As a receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured so that the operating means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operating means can be moved. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force that drives the operating means, and a transmitting means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the player grips and fixes the operating means, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means and the transmitting means There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the driving means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member with a rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the deformed portion to move to the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deformed portion has a role as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means and a role as a portion for generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the game machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is projected in parallel with the rotation axis, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotation shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member intends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

In the game machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Therefore, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, and thus the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means can be reduced.

The game machine G6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines G3 to G5 includes a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Thread ball goto prevention structure. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the game balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, an illegal tool in which game balls are connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed by using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an illegal profit.

In the game machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends a flow path of the game ball.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the game machine H2, the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the load means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the load means and the game ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the load means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H3 or H4 is characterized in that the gaming machine H5 includes a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the load means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving plate, which is a plate on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving plate is a portion for discharging the game ball to be discharged from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball passes through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is the portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device, to the receiving dish, which is the dish that the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other game ball was performed by using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the game ball that is paid out can easily damage the thread.

<Structure of board retainer. Game machine I>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The game machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame so that the game board can rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured so that the state can be changed only after the game board is pushed into the position in which it is in use. Therefore, if the game board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the state changing means includes a proximity means that is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, so that the game board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force, so that the game board can be pushed to the position in use.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the game means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the game means unusable. ..

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to an unusable state, so that the game means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means when the game means is made unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the game means, the work efficiency of the removal work of the game means can be improved, and the game can be improved. Since this is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes a contact means that receives a load from the game means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the game machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the game means, the state changing means changes its state to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the game means against the state changing means, it can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, which is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means can be used to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the game means.

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is unusable so that the state changing means makes the game means unusable. The game machine I6 is provided with a blockage regulating portion that makes it impossible to block the opening on one side of the game means when maintaining the state.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the game means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the game means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and accepting the gaming means from the one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the invasion of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arrangement means is arranged in the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured so that the entry of the piano wire can be suppressed at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the arrangement means is different between the first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first place and the second means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the second place. A game machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by a method.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the arrangement means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that the invading member can be prevented from further invasion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes a support means for supporting the electric wiring, and the support means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the path from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry control part is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means includes a eliminating means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a eliminating region far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the game means by the arrangement means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a decorative plate with a five-sheet structure. Involved in fraud prevention. Game machine K>
It is arranged between the first means and the second means which are opposed to each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and between the first means and the second means along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, the connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to the second direction intersecting with the first direction. The game machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine including the third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional game machine described above, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is attached to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacement of the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the direction intersecting the third direction The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the game machine K3, the game machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the game machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates the light toward the first means or the second means side and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above and capable of introducing the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from each other by the light guide means.

The game machine K6 is characterized in that the game machine K6 is provided with a contact means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contact means. Can be done. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the opposite direction. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means is illegally attempted to be disassembled. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. As a point, not reached>
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means which is arranged to face the light guide means and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave surface facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex surface facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant. The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed depending on the unit.

In the game machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. Game machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex surface facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion that is arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion that is arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transmissivity is formed from substantially the same material, by injecting the same light into the light guide means, an effect mode of light visually recognized through the projected means and an effect mode of light visually recognized through the opposite projection means Can be different from.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Game machine M>
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). Then, in such a game machine, the vibration wave traveling to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center position of the game machine and sent to the outside of the game machine, so that it is easy to produce a bass sound. , There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. The regulation of the left-right width can be canceled and the vibration wave can travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the game machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the surface, and the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the protrusion tip of the protrusion portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The game machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A game machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the game machine M3, the game machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the game machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means in which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a directing means arranged below the support fastening means and producing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5, characterized in that the effecting means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without pressing the space used for the effect. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a follow-up state of the first displacement means being displaced in the displacement direction, and a follow-up state. In a gaming machine including a second displacement means that can be switched in a non-following state that displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in the following state. The gaming machine N1 is provided with a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means is set. , It can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The game machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the game machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the drive means for driving the first displacement means, so that the drive means is also used. be able to.

In the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the game machine N4.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a production device.

The game machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means. Game machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, not reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). (See Kai 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the game machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the game machine O1, the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2 to play.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

In the game machine O1 or O2, the accommodation means is provided with a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are composed of shapes based on the shapes of the solid objects in different directions, so that the second openings are formed. It is possible to easily remove the solid object through the portion.

In any of the game machines O1 to O4, the game machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object continues to remain can be reduced. ..

<Points related to devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine including a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means includes a protruding shaped portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is arranged can be removed from an outer frame on which a game board is arranged (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed from a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with a finger, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shape portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first supporting means functions as a portion on which the finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first supporting means slips off the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

The arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited in any way, and any projecting portion may be provided so as to project outward from the first support means. For example, it may be projected in the vertical direction or may be projected to the front side.

In the game machine P1, the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means is provided, and the projecting shape portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A game machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1, the projecting shape portion is projected downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is mainly applied as the support position. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to hold the first support means. This makes it possible to easily attach / detach the first support means to / from the second support means.

The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the position may be closer to the front side when the first supporting means is supported on the front side of the second supporting means, or the other when the first supporting means is pivotally supported by the second supporting means at one end. The position may be closer to the end, or may be the position opposite to the shaft support position with respect to the plate for storing the game ball.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first supporting means includes a recessed shape portion recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means has a gap between the recessed shape portion and the recessed shape portion. A game machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged to face the recessed shape portion.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first support means is made a gap by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means can be used. It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shavings, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first supporting means rub against each other due to the misalignment. That is, it is possible to prevent the powder from accumulating and clogging the movable portion to cause a malfunction, or the powder from accumulating at the detection location of the detection device and erroneously detecting the powder.

In this way, the recessed shape portion is not only when it is not operating (for example, when the glass frame is opened to clear an error, during maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also when it is operating (for example, when playing a game). It is also effective in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

In the game machine P3, the concave shape portion is arranged inside the range in which the protrusion shape portion is provided.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3, it is possible to prevent the portion where the concave shape portion is formed from becoming extremely thin as compared with other portions and falling into insufficient strength. it can. Further, since the concave shape portion is formed on the back surface of the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion shape portion can be bent and deformed in the inward and outward directions, so that even if a large load is applied to the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion shape portion is impacted. Cracking of the shape portion can be suppressed.

The load applied to the projecting shape portion includes, for example, the own weight of the first supporting means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first supporting means, and the first. An example is a load applied by a collision of something moved by a player or a clerk (such as a Senryo box) near a support means.

In the game machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means on the outside of the recessed shape portion, and is supported in a manner of contacting an overlapping portion that overlaps the protruding shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising a contacting means and an operating unit positioned on the contacting means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of the game machine P4, it is possible to secure a sufficient support thickness of the overlapping position for supporting the abutting means while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, so that the operation unit can be used. It is possible to prevent the first support means from being deformed during operation.

In the game machine P5, the contact means is provided with an impact damping means which is continuously formed between the contact means and the operation portion so as to be able to attenuate the impact, and the impact damping means is the recessed shape portion. A game machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width shorter than the width.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effect of the game machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operation unit to the abutting means can be attenuated by the impact damping means, and a distance is provided between the impact damping means and the overlapping portion. As a result, the impact can be damped by the deformation (deflection) of the abutting means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact damping means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the game machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion of the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of recession is formed to be larger than that of the second portion.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of denting is exemplified by, for example, the depth of dent (the greater the degree of dent, the deeper) and the width of dent (the greater the degree of dent, the wider).

If the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portion, the concave shape corresponding to the other portion. The degree of recessing of the portion may be formed to be large.

Further, the recessed shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the load generation frequency, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game store, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the game machine (a predetermined production state, a game state such as a specific game state). It may be based on the size of.

In any of the game machines P1 to P7, the projecting shape portion is formed below the bottom surface portion of the first support means along the front-rear direction, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. Game machine P8.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first support means is erected alone. 1 Even in the storage method in which the supporting means is placed on the floor alone, the first supporting means can be stored for a long period of time without the first supporting means falling down.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape portion is not limited to the own weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during the operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the game machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily self-supported by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the portion other than the projecting shape portion from becoming dirty.

<Points regarding deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
In a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by a player, a first supporting means that supports the operating means, and a second supporting means that supports the first supporting means or at least one of the operating means. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the first supporting means is deformably configured in a direction that narrows the gap between the operating means and the second supporting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means such as an effect button is supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load during the operation of the operating means is insufficient, and it is called the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

For example, when the weight of the player is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second supporting means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second supporting means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, there is a possibility that a gap may be formed between the operating means and the second supporting means on the front side portion due to the difference in the descending distance.

On the other hand, according to the game machine Q1, even if the second supporting means is lowered excessively, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the second supporting means due to the deformation of the first supporting means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend (subduction) excessively, the supporting mode of the operating means can be simplified.

The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a descending direction, in an ascending direction, in a pushing direction along the front-rear direction, in a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

Further, as the mode of contact from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified in addition to the case where the normal extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and the reaction force increases as the direction of operation increases toward the center of the bottom, so that the support of the operation means is effective. Can be done

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the game machine Q1, the first supporting means is made of a flexible material, has a support portion that supports the operating means, and is configured to be able to hold a game ball, and the operating means is configured via the first supporting means. A game machine Q2 characterized by having a game ball holding portion connected to the player.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the game ball holding portion.

Further, when the first supporting means is composed of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding portion by a floating structure, the vibration when the operating means is operated is held as it is. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball from being transmitted to the unit, it is possible to prevent the game ball held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced and generating an abnormal noise each time the operating means is operated.

Various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the vibration transmission may be prevented in the first direction while the vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to execute the effect by the sound.

In the game machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by the player, and the first supporting means fronts as the connection position with the game ball holding portion becomes farther from the operating unit. A game machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position where the position shift is likely to occur due to the operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of the position shift. While suppressing the generation of a gap between the ball holding portion and the first supporting means, by arranging the connecting position on the front side (closer to the player) in the distant position of the operating portion, which is a position where the position does not easily shift due to the operation. , It is possible to improve the design.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by the player, a main body portion supported by the first supporting means, and the operating unit and the main body portion. The operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first supporting means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. Even the gaming machine Q4, which is configured to surround the connecting portion.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while ensuring a sufficient size of the operation unit.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the method of fixing the 1st support means formed from a split body. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, respectively, or include one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body. You may let me.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, it may be fitted or fastened.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, the impact generated when the operation unit is operated can be distributed and received at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, orthogonally) with the operating direction of the operating unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating unit and the tightening direction of the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to an impact during operation.

In the game machine Q4, the game machine Q5 is characterized in that the fastening directions of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersect with the operation direction of the operation unit.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the fastening direction during the operation of the operation unit, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation and the split body is fixed. Can be prevented from being released.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the direction which intersects with the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation direction). Direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is along a predetermined straight line (pushing operation or pulling operation), the direction intersecting the operating direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is illustrated.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in the operation) are assumed during the game, at least among the plurality of planes intersecting each straight line. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a direction intersecting any of a plurality of plane intersections, that is, a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the game machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening points of the divided body are configured at a plurality of points, and the first plane including one fastening point and the second plane including the other fastening points are configured as different planes. A game machine Q6 characterized by.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the split body from being hung, it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being displaced at the same time or the fastening being loosened at both fastening points.

The fastening portion of the divided body may be arranged at a location where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Even in this case, since the other fastening points are arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, it is possible that the split body will be displaced or the fastening will be loosened due to the load during operation. Can be prevented.

In any of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating unit, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the split position of the split body. A game machine Q7 characterized by being installed.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the divided position, and the operation unit is moved when the operation unit is operated at the divided position. And the divided body may rub against each other and dust (dust, etc.) may be generated. Since the detecting means is separated from the divided position, it is possible to prevent the detecting means from detecting the powder (dust, etc.). can do. As a result, the occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines Q4 to Q7, when the game is possible, the operating means interferes with the divided body in the splitting direction on the side that separates in the splitting direction (proximity separation direction) of the divided body. A game machine Q8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the split body in the split direction.

The interfering means may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but before the assembled state, for example, during the assembling work. For example, when the split body is formed of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during the assembling operation, so that interference with the interfering means can be easily avoided and the ease of assembly is maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere in the assembly direction view (for example, the direction view in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the game machine Q9 is characterized in that the second support means includes a receiving recessed portion that is recessed so as to accept the first support means.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, since the first support means is received in the receiving recess, the first support means is affected by the displacement of the operation means. Even if the position is displaced, the operating means and the first supporting means can be returned to their original positions at an early stage by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first supporting means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the game machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, a large area where the operation unit can be arranged can be secured, and in addition, when the player grips the operation unit, it is cramped. It is possible to prevent feeling. As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and improve the operability of the operation unit.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extension direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A game machine Q11 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaky portion is different for each region, so that the first support means having anisotropy in rigidity. Can be configured.

The design criteria for the extension direction of the streaks are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield, or when the load generated during the operation of the operating means acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best response to the load. The extension direction of the streak portion may be designed as the direction.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
In a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light, the light emitting means is characterized by having a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means. Game machine R1 to do.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission production.

More specifically, in the conventional game machine described above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. It becomes dark because it is not possible to produce light emission at the place where it is used. In this case, in the front area where the game machine is easily visible, the area where the game can be produced brilliantly becomes narrow. In the first place, since the size of a game machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like is roughly determined from the standard, it is recognized that securing a light emitting production area is an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can pass the vibration of the vibrating device, and the light emitting means is arranged at the vibration generation location of the vibrating means. Can be approached to. As a result, the front region can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibration generation location of the vibrating means, which can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

The mode of the vibrating means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and may be a means configured to be vibrable (passively vibrable) with respect to a load of an external force.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, a vibrating membrane provided in the speaker, an outlet from which the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker seen in a bass reflex type speaker is discharged, a path connected from the vibrating portion to the exhaust port, and the like are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a vibrating device by rotational drive (for example, a vibrator) or a vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving.

The aspect of the proximity arrangement is not limited at all, and any aspect may be used as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be laminated on the vibrating means, and in that case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, the direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, and the left-right end to the left-right inside. It may be inclined in the direction.

The game machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, includes a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the light emitting substrate is laminated and arranged on the plurality of the vibrating means. ..

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, misalignment, etc.) due to the influence of vibration generated when the vibrating means outputs sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by different the vibrating means for outputting the sound. Therefore, the type of change (variation) of the effect mode of the light emitting means. ) Can be increased.

The light emitting substrate may be one or a plurality of substrates. When there are a plurality of sheets, at least one light emitting substrate may be laminated and arranged on the plurality of vibrating means. In this case, since a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibrating means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided, the types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means can be further increased.

In the game machine R2, the holding means for holding the vibration means is provided, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means emits light along the stacking direction. The gaming machine R3 is configured so as to generate a load in a direction of suppressing displacement of the substrate.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effect of the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means.

The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply to prevent them from coming off), it can be said that they are not fixed.

Moreover, the expression "non-fixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate is specified (the front-rear position is stable and small vibration is allowed), and the shape of the light-emitting substrate is determined. By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front and rear with a frame member having a slightly larger frame shape, it is possible to suppress displacement in a direction different from the front and rear direction (up, down, left, and right).

As a result, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the case of the vibrating means, so that the position stability of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. Can be enhanced.

In the game machine R2 or R3, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, the fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and the said A regulating means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction is provided, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A game machine R4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are laminated does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), the displacement of the fixing means is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which progresses. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the game machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared with the first displacement region. A game machine R5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced due to the influence of the vibration of the vibrating means is changed for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made to.

As a result, an excellent effect can be obtained by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement region in different modes. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement region, a surface emitting means for producing a uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means for showing the player high-luminance light by completely reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge) is arranged. As a result, it is possible to perform a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) is different for each region.

The mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a mode of suppression defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibrating means, or a mode defined by a mode of holding the light emitting substrate.

For example, as for the positional relationship between the plurality of vibrating means and the light emitting substrate, the regions that are equidistant from each vibrating means are such that the influence from one vibrating means is canceled by the influence from the other vibrating means. , Displacement may be suppressed.

In any of the game machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw is provided. The gaming machine R6, characterized in that the portions and the facing portions are arranged so as to be in contact with each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R1 to R5, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw is loosened by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion. It can be prevented from doing so.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the correspondence after the fastening screw becomes loose. For example, when the fastening screw is loosened, the loosening may be detected electrically, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibrating device. If it is vibrated, an abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or the loosened part may be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any of the game machines R1 to R6, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate and the connecting means to be fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member are provided. The connecting means is characterized in that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction is more easily caused than the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. The game machine R7.

Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the connecting means can be easily deformed in the connecting direction, the interval between the connecting positions is changed in both directions such as extension and contraction, and the favorable influence and the disadvantageous influence are cycles. It becomes unfavorable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the connection position is changed only to the side that shortens the interval. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other.

As a result, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member can be increased only in the situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, the situation where the connecting means is loaded). While setting the load in the opposite direction of the member and the second member low, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is likely to shake due to the vibration by the vibrating means, and the light is emitted. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the substrate.

The mode in which deformation easily occurs in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs in each direction, or the magnitude of the load generated in the connecting means may change in each direction.

Further, the mode of switching the loads in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member can be changed at an arbitrary timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of the game machines R1 to R7, the vibrating means is configured so that the direction of vibration can be changed between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. The featured game machine R8.

According to the game machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of actions of the vibration of the vibrating means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical concept of light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
A first aspect comprising a light emitting means configured to emit light and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine S1 includes a light guide means and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that LED light is incident from an end portion of a plate-shaped member and emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See publication). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional game machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and in order to eliminate this, the light emitting mode is weak. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, since the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different. It can suppress (changing). Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the mode of the light guide means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as frosted glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made of frosted glass, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. A member of the above aspect may be used.

In the game machine S1, the light guide means is configured so as to change the way of shining in a stepwise manner in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effect of the game machine S1, the light guide means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface even when the substrate on which the light guide means is arranged is formed of a flat plate. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

In the game machine S1 or S2, the accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and the light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged are provided, and the accommodating means supports the light emitting substrate and the light guide means. The support means is fixed at least in the first position, and the shielding means is configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A game machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in a direction.

In the game machine S3, in addition to the effect of the game machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still attached, so that the position of the light guide means with respect to the support means can be easily positioned. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the player can see it while shielding it from touching the light guide means, or it may be configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You may.

When the first position is formed at a plurality of places, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the game machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A game machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in a long direction.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effect of the game machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape and the first position is arranged at the end in the long direction, so that the fixing of the first position is loosened. By applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means, the misalignment of the light guide means can be easily corrected.

More specifically, the correction of the misalignment of the light guide means is compensated by the deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction or by the slippage due to applying a strong load, so that one of the long directions is compensated. Even when the fixation is loosened only at one end and the fixation is maintained at the other end, the misalignment of the light guide means can be easily repaired.

Further, in the case of the support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light guide means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened as the light guide means bends and deforms. Therefore, even if the light emitting means is not removed from the supporting means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light emitting means, and the light emitting substrate is loaded in that state. Can be used to correct the misalignment of the light emitting substrate.

The adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the basis of the design is that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means is mechanically regulated so as not to be completely displaced from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate in the irradiation direction view. The adjustment width may be sufficient to correct the misalignment in (the adjustment width is small), and the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means is the irradiation direction based on the design that secures a large adjustment width in advance. The position of the light guide means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same time can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with different playability (for example, when a gaming machine having different specifications is configured), the mechanical configuration of each part is not significantly changed. Since the mode of the light emitting effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means, the burden (for example, cost) related to the manufacture of the game machine can be reduced.

The non-fixed mode is not limited in any way. For example, a mode other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixing. Further, the end portion is an expression of intention to avoid being limited to the end portion. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the long direction end.

In the game machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guiding means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. The game machine S5 is provided with a portion, and the misalignment prevention portion is provided with a fixing portion with the support means.

Here, where it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means, so for the purpose of preventing it, it is also for light emitting. It is preferable to configure the board so that the displacement between the substrate and the supporting means does not easily occur.

Considering the effect of the effect, it is preferable that the light guide means is easy to align when the misalignment occurs on the premise that the misalignment with the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. , It is considered good to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if the position shift occurs between the light guide means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated, and it is considered good to hold the light guiding means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a place that the player can touch, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of the strength. As described above, the support modes expected for each means were various.

According to the game machine S5, in addition to the effect of the game machine S3 or S4, the action of the misalignment prevention unit facilitates mutual alignment at the time of assembly without directly fixing the light guide means and the shielding means. Not only that, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guide means and the shielding means during the game.

The mode of the misalignment prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, the unevenness that has the same shape and can be fitted may be used, or the unevenness that can be fitted may be such that the shape along the assembling direction is invariant, or the side closer to the mating member is tapered. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any of the game machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to the main body portion, the separation extension portion extending from the main body portion to the side away from the light emitting means, and the outer shape of the extension portion. The light emitting means is provided with a facing extension portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, and the light emitting means is arranged in such a manner that light incident on the facing extending portion is totally reflected. A game machine S6 characterized by having a part.

According to the game machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting portion from entering the portion other than the facing extension portion, the separation extension portion, the facing extension portion, and the other portion The boundary between the light and the light can be clarified, and the effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be performed at the boundary of a short width.

The mode of total reflection is not limited to any one. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guide means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guide means, a combination thereof, and the like.

In the game machine S6, the light guide means forms a covering portion to be covered on the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed from a frame shape having the same shape as the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A game machine S7 comprising a frame portion to be formed, and the facing extending portion extending from the lining portion and being coupled to the frame portion.

According to the game machine S7, in addition to the effect of the game machine S6, light can be incident on the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of the light emitting effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the facing extension portion can be formed. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of shining the opposite side of the light emitting direction.

In the game machine S7, the opposed extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is connected to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame portion at the other end from the frame portion. A game machine S8 characterized by being separated.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effect of the game machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension portion, the end portion where light can be incident on the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and the end portion where the incident is restricted are provided. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the light emission effect using the frame portion.

In any of the game machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projection position of the facing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separation extension portion with respect to the light irradiation direction is set. The game machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the opposed extension portion and the separation extension portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the detached extension portion is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emitting intensity of the light emitting means is emitted. It is possible to produce light emission without giving a sense of discomfort to the player while keeping the same value. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the detached extension portion can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top light emitting means. Point to change the way of shining depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light emitting means configured to emit light and a light receiving means capable of receiving light are provided, and the light receiving means includes a first light receiving means for receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine T1 is provided with a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to incident LED light from the edge of the planar member and emit it from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional game machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to a difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and in order to eliminate this, the light emitting mode is weak. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the production increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine T1, since the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect is reduced (change) even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light receiving means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as frosted glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made of frosted glass, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. A member of the above aspect may be used.

The game machine T1 is characterized in that the light receiving means is configured so that the way of shining is changed stepwise in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The game machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodating means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. The gaming machine T3 is provided with a partitioning means for partitioning a region, and the light receiving means is configured so that the lighting method changes for each region partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partition means is arranged at the boundary where the way of shining the light receiving means changes, so that the way of shining the light receiving means changes abruptly. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the player is allowed to do so. As a result, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates.

The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the light emitting substrate is aligned by being supported by the partitioning means from a direction that opposes the urging force applied to the light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effect of the game machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment between the light emitting substrate and the partition means, and in addition, the light emitting substrate at the time of use. And the partitioning means can be prevented from being displaced.

In the game machine T3 or T4, the partition means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of a light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A game machine T5 characterized by having a part.

According to the game machine T5, in addition to the effect of the game machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting portion and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the size of the partition means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. It becomes easy to totally reflect the light, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the game machine T5, the partition means is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, includes a non-insertion through hole that does not accept the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through hole is provided. The gaming machine T6 is formed in such a manner that the opening expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effect of the game machine T5, a through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, a light receiving means. Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any of the game machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is characterized in that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is formed larger on the side far from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines T1 to T6, the area where the player sees the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be done.

In the game machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conductive portion extending from the light emitting means side and a punched boundary surface portion intersecting the light conductive portion, and the punched boundary surface is a light conductive portion of the light conductive portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extension direction is arranged at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the game machine T8, in addition to the effect of the game machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, it is possible to easily make the wall thickness of the light conductive portion uniform. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain total reflection in the extending direction of the light conductive portion.

In the game machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. The featured game machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effect of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from a point light source). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of a point light source without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Points consisting of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction and the first fixing means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to a direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is formed by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is lowered.

For example, when a fastening screw to be inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be arranged at a position where it interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than that of the light emitting substrate by the amount of the fixing means, so that the size of the area where the support plate can be arranged is large. The size of the light emitting substrate will be limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction which are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are along the front-rear direction. Compared with the case of being inserted, it is possible to secure a wider production area on the side to be visually recognized by the player.

In the game machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction are provided on the outer surface. Game machine U2.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect of the game machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is obtained. A force can be generated and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

The game machine U3 is characterized in that, in the game machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing points of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in the fixing force.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are made of a resin molded product and the drawing direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclining each other and the drawing direction are Since it is inclined, the fixing force may be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1 or U2, a decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is used as a common part. can do.

The configuration of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening preventing means for preventing the loosening of the fixing, or a loosening regulating means for restricting further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

In the game machine U3, the suppressing means is provided with a notification means capable of notifying a fixing defect of the fixing means.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effect of the game machine U3, the notification means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that it is possible to quickly detect that the fastening screw has loosened.

The configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying, such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance. Structural means include, for example, a transmission changing means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light effect changing means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen from the outside. An example is a vibration notification means that makes the player notice by contacting the vibrating part of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal noise or strengthen the vibration.

In any of the game machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means comprises the first surface and the second surface. A game machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between them.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines U2 to U4, a plurality of directions in which the first means and the second means can generate a resistance force as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means are set. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured such that the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is narrowed is the second means side. The area occupied by the composition can be narrowed.

The game machine U5 includes a fourth means arranged on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, and the first surface is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. The game machine U6.

According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effect of the game machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in front view can interfere with each other, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area in which the device can be arranged.

In any of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, respectively.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, so that the one fixing means is used. It is possible to prevent deformation along the generation direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, and U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Characterized game machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. The game machine is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, and U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A game machine Z2 characterized by. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, and U1 to U7, the gaming machines are pachinko gaming machines and slot machines. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being a fusion of. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
This technical idea relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with speakers and LEDs (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588).
However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect. The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be capable of emitting light. The means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and includes a plurality of the vibration means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged. The light emitting substrate includes a plurality of the vibration means. Laminated on the means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 includes the holding means for holding the vibration means in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, and the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction. The holding means is configured so that a load is generated in a direction of suppressing displacement of the light emitting substrate along the stacking direction.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in Technical Thought 1, it can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the light emitting effect can be improved in relation to the vibration means.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to prevent the light emitting means from being excessively affected by the vibrating means.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13 Game board (game means)
14 Front frame (closing means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of the receiving plate, part of the game ball holding part)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,915,10145 Foul ball passage (Fal ball passage)
159 Open / close regulation part (blockage regulation part)
173 Long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Reverse cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operating devices 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311 gL, 3311 gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 shaft part (shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (urging means)
324L left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343d Coil spring (urging means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disk cams (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (convex part)
345 arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (audio means)
453 Speaker connection line (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, protruding part)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of opening)
487 Passage forming ribs (bending means, protruding parts)
500 Right panel unit (directing means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (means to be connected)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 513c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib part (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Board surface support device (state change means)
620 Rotating front claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotating rear claw member (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (driving means)
830 rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Fal ball passage (Far ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance)
5412 Weight member (vibrating part, part of repulsive means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disk member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 engaging member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a 1st through hole (part of 2nd opening)
8326b 2nd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326c 3rd through hole (part of 2nd opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate (regulatory means)
10310 Swing operation member (part of operation means, part of operation part)
10321 Left front cover (part of the first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of the first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of the game ball holding part)
6413 Protruding shape part 6414 Concave shape part 6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right side reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left side reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Top lid member (part of connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protrusion (part of the first light receiving means, part of the insertion part)
6521d Light-transmitting hole (part of the second light receiving means)
6521e Main body cylinder (part of optical conduction part)
6522 Flange part (extracted boundary surface part)
6540 compartment unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Fastening after guidance (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c protruding rib (part of restraining means)
6548 Transparent lining member (part of restraining means)
6550 Board guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate (part of the outer surface)
6554a Screw-in part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 partition member (first member, part of first means, part of accommodating means, part of partition means)
6562a Expansion hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large diameter cylindrical part (part of regulatory measures)
6570 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodating means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of facing part, part of suppressing means, part of notifying means)
6622 Contact avoidance recess (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illuminations substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guide means)
6731 Light receiving surface part (part of the second light guide means, part of the main body part, concealed part)
6732 Inner extension (part of frame)
6733 Outer extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of the first light guide means, facing extension)
6735 fin (part of the first light guide means, detached extension part)
6736 Insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (part of misalignment prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodating means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R Insertion hole (part of support)
18830 Illuminations board (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting part (part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 Streak part D24 End streak part (part of streak part)
E1 notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bent part)
V13, V14 gap

Claims (3)

In a game machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light.
The light emitting means is a gaming machine having a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means. With a plurality of the vibration means,
A light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged is provided.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the light emitting substrate is laminated and arranged on a plurality of the vibrating means. A holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided.
The light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the holding means is configured so as to generate a load in a direction of suppressing displacement of the light emitting substrate along the stacking direction.